Home

Enterprise Architect User Guide

Contents

1. Note Ensure that the database collation is case insensitive 4 Click on the database to select it then select the New Query menu option 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 42 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository New Query E 008 Script Database as Tasks Reports Rename Delete Refresh Properties 5 In the Query window use the Open File dialog to locate the supplied Enterprise Architect SQL Server Model script file d temp Date modif Type My Projects m My Computer File name Files of type All Files 6 Click on the Open button Check that you have selected the correct database to run the script in In this example the tables are being added to the ea_sq server database as shown in the drop down menu below oTt SUL Server EXD 4 4 A File Edit View Query Tools Window Community E T New Query D Piatto el aeg m 2 hI ea_sqlserver 7 Click on the Execute button SQL Server executes the script which creates the base model for an Enterprise Architect project UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 43 1 4 10 4 Oracle Server Repository Note This feature is available in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions Before creating an Oracl
2. Click on the Use data source name radio button and on the drop down arrow in its field Select the ODBC driver you have set up to connect to your MySQL repository from the list In the setup example 25 the driver title is MySQL EABASE If required type in a User name and Password If required type in an initial catalog Click on the Test Connection button to confirm that the details are correct If the test succeeds click on the OK button 10 If the test does not succeed revise your settings 11 After you have clicked on the OK button the Connection Name amp Type dialog displays 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 52 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository Name ql help file diags _ Encrypt Connection String Database Server ODBC Connection MySQL F Lazy Load Use WAN Optimization Server Port DSN 12 Give the connection a suitable name so that you can recognize it in the Recent Projects panel on the Open Project dialog 8 13 If required select the Encrypt Connection String checkbox This encrypts and hides the connection details of the database from the users that the connection string is given to 14 If required select the Lazy Load checkbox to not load the full project view when the model is loaded Instead only the parts that are necessary to display the visible portion of the tree are loaded This means that a model loads faster
3. 148 Version Control Version Control Setup Current User The CVS user name associated with all CVS commands that are issued This name is used by Enterprise Architect to determine who has a package checked out CVS EXE Path The full path name of the CVS client s executable file Note Sparx Systems strongly urge you not to manipulate version controlled package files outside of Enterprise Architect It is possible to leave the package files in a state that Enterprise Architect cannot recognize 11 5 4 Version Control with Subversion Subversion is used to manage files and directories and is an open source version control system To make use of Subversion control you must have Enterprise Architect version 6 0 or greater Tasks in setting up version control with Subversion include e Setup Subversion 148 e Create a new Repository Sub Tree 14 e Create a Local Working Copy 150 e Subversion Under WINE Crossover 150 e Version Control Configuration 15 e TortoiseSVN 153 Note To see a video demonstration of setting up a Subversion repository for version control go to http www sparxsystems com au resources demos settingupsubversion svn_final htm 11 5 4 1 Set up Subversion Obtain and Install Subversion Note Enterprise Architect relies on exclusive file locking when applying version control to its packages File locking was not introduced into Subversion until version 1 2 Enterprise Archit
4. 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 186 User Security Password Encryption 12 12 Password Encryption Note This topic is retained to support regression to releases of Enterprise Architect prior to version 7 1 For password encryption for all repositories at and beyond release 7 1 see the Save Model Copy or Shortcut topic Users of SQL Server or Oracle repositories have the option of encrypting the password used to set up the connection between Enterprise Architect and the repository The Enterprise Architect user does not have the real password thereby preventing them from accessing the repository using other tools such as Query Analyzer or SQLPlus Once security is enabled the administrator must log on to access the dialog to create encrypted passwords To encrypt a password follow the steps below 1 Select the Project Security Encrypt Password menu option The following dialog displays Password password 23 Encrypted qevtyrsf435 2 Inthe example above the password password123 is used to access the repository 3 To connect Enterprise Architect to the repository the user enters the encrypted password prefixed with so the encrypted password becomes qcvtyrst435 For more information relating to connecting to Oracle and SQL Server see the Connect to Oracle Data Repository 55 and Connect to SQL Server Data Repository 52 topics respectively Notes e Do not use the Test
5. 5 Type in the server details including Server Name User Name and Password 6 Click on the Select the database on the server option and on the drop down arrow From the list select the model to connect to 7 Click on the Test Connection button to confirm that the details are correct 8 If the test succeeds click on the OK button If the test does not succeed revise your settings 9 When you click on the OK button the Connection Name amp Type dialog displays UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 55 Connection Name amp Type Name salserver_db E Encrypt Connection String Database Server MS SQL Server Lazy Load Server Port DSN Ga 10 In the Name field type a suitable name for the connection so that you can recognize it in the Recent Projects panel on the Open Project 8 dialog 11 If required select the Encrypt Connection String checkbox This encrypts and hides the connection details of the database from the users that the connection string is given to 12 If required select the Lazy Load checkbox to not load the full project view when the model is loaded Instead only the parts that are necessary to display the visible portion of the tree are loaded This means that a model loads faster and users can begin work sooner but at the expense of later small delays as Enterprise Architect loads specific portions of t
6. ENTERPRISE ARCHITECT UML Model Management Enterprise Architect is an intuitive flexible and powerful UML analysis and design tool for building robust and maintainable software This booklet explains the Model Management facilities of Enterprise Architect SYSTEMS Copyright O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd Enterprise Architect UML Model Management O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd All rights reserved No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means graphic electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording taping or information storage and retrieval systems without the written permission of the publisher Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and or registered trademarks of the respective owners The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document the publisher and the author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this document or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it In no event shall the publisher and the author be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or indirectly by this document Printed May 2010 Special thanks to Publisher All the people who have contributed suggestions examp
7. e If two or more people work on the same diagram concurrently unexpected results can occur It is best to enable only one analyst to work on a diagram at a time e Ifa user s machine crashes the network suffers an outage or a machine is turned off unexpectedly the project file might require repair to compensate for the sudden inconsistency A repair 85 facility is provided select the Tools Manage EAP File Repair EAP File menu option to carry out this task This only applies to the file based version of Enterprise Architect the DBMS based version does not suffer this problem 7 3 Distributed Development Enterprise Architect supports distributed development using two different techniques as described below Replication Use the Replication features to enable geographically separated analysts to update and modify parts of the model in replicas then merge these back together at a central location For further information see the Replication 10h topic 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 100 Model Sharing and Team Deployment Distributed Development XMI Import Export Use the XMI based Import Export facility to model discrete packages export to XML and share among the development team This approach has several benefits over replication 1 You can assemble a model from only the parts necessary to get your job done 2 You can assemble a full model if required 3 You can assemble a model from different pa
8. Click on the OK button If required on the Project Transfer dialog select the Logfile checkbox and type a path and file name for the data transfer log file 10 Click on the Transfer button to begin the data transfer process Once the process is complete you have upsized your model to Oracle and can now open it from Enterprise Architect 1 4 7 Upsize to SQL Server Before you set up Enterprise Architect for use with SQL Server it is recommended that you run the project integrity check tool select the Tools Data Management Project Integrity Check 787 menu option on the base project to upsize to SQL Server This ensure the project data is clean before uploading UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 21 Note You cannot move a model from a source EAP file of a version earlier than 3 5 0 Warning Before proceeding ensure MDAC 2 6 or higher is installed on your system Upsizing Your Database You upsize your database for SQL Server in three stages as follows Stage One Create an Empty Database 1 Install SQL Server 2 Create an empty database Note See Create a New SQL Server Repository 40 Stage Two Configure the Database 1 Using a tool such as the SQL Query Analyser load the SQL Server Base Model sq file This is available to registered users on the Corporate edition Resources page of the Sparx Systems Website 2 Make
9. See Setup a Progress OpenEdge ODBC Driver 357 Stage Two Configure the Database 1 Create an empty OpenEdge database using the scripts OpenEdge_BaseModel sq l file This is available to registered users on the Corporate edition Resources page of the Sparx website at http www sparxsystems com registered reg ea corp ed html Make sure the new database is selected as the current database 3 Run the script to create all required data structures Note See Create a New OpenEdge Repository 48 Stage Three Transfer the Data 1 Open Enterprise Architect click on the Cancel button on the Open Project screen to open with no project loaded 2 Select the Tools Data Management Project Transfer menu option The Project Transfer dialog displays Transfer Type O EAP to EAP DBMS to EAP O EAP to DBMS 5 DBMS to DBMS Source and Target Projects Source Project Target Project Logfile Tet Caution The Target Project will be erased prior to transfer Please ensure you have backed up target if necessary Transfer Close Help Progress 3 In the Transfer Type panel select EAP to DBMS UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 17 4 Inthe Source Project field type the name of the EAP file to upsize to OpenEdge 5 Atthe right of the Target Project field click on the Browse button The Datalink Pro
10. Transfer Type O EAP to EAP DBMS to EAP O EAP to DBMS 5 DBMS to DBMS Source and Target Projects Source Project mm Target Project s Logfile Fote Caution The Target Project will be erased prior to transfer Please ensure you have backed up target if necessary Transfer Close Help Progress 3 Inthe Transfer Type panel select EAP to DBMS 4 Inthe Source Project field type the name of the EAP file to upsize to MySQL 5 At the right of the Target Project field click on the Browse button The Datalink Properties dialog displays 6 Select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers from the list then click on the Next button 7 Inthe Use Data source name field click on the drop down arrow and select the ODBC Data Source you configured to point to your new database Note See Connect to a MySQL Data Repository 50 for more information 8 Click on the OK button 9 If required select the Logfile checkbox and type a path and filename for the data transfer log file 10 Click on the Transfer button to begin the data transfer process When the process is complete you have upsized your model to MySQL and can now open it from Enterprise Architect 1 4 9 Set Up an ODBC Driver for a Connection to a Repository This topic details how to set up the following ODBC drivers to enable connection to an Enterprise Architect data repository e MySQL ODBC Driver 257 e PostgreS
11. 7 e SQL Server 407 2000 2005 and 2008 e MySQL 3 e Oracle 9i 10g or 11gl 437 e PostgreSQL 43 e MSDE 487 e Adaptive Server Anywherel 46 e Progress OpenEdge 6 To create a new data repository you must first create a new database with the DBMS management software then run supplied scripts to create the logical structure You should then use Enterprise Architect data transfer functions to move a project from a EAP or DBMS model into the new project 1 1 What is a Project An Enterprise Architect project is a mechanism for storing and managing the components of one or more UML models A project can be a EAP file 6 in an MS Access database or in the Enterprise Architect Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions a structure of files in a database management system 6 such as MySQL or Oracle A project can contain a single model or a number of models each of which defines a particular system or process A model contains the diagrams elements relationships and associated metadata that define the structure and function of the system or process These components are organized into a hierarchy of packages which help to group and manage related components Different aspects of the process or system or their development are defined by Model Packages which you generate 107 from templates specifically structured to support the aspects that the Model Packages represent
12. Configure Version Control Set up version control options 135 for the current model Export XMI Export 105 model to XMI Generate Documents Generate RTF and HTML documents from model packages Generate Source Code and Generate source code and DDL from model element Synchronize code DDL against model elements if it already exists Import XMI Import 1061 model from XMI Lock Objects Lock an element 1s2 or package 193 Manage Diagrams Create new diagrams copy existing and delete diagrams Also save diagram as UML Pattern Manage Project Information Update and manage resources metrics risks Manage Reference Data Update and delete reference items 220 Update Manage Replicas Createl10 and synchronize h10 replicas Manage Tests Update and delete Test records Reverse Engineer from DDL Reverse engineer from source code or ODBC and synchronize model and Source Code elements against code Security Enable Disable Disable 173 user security in Enterprise Architect Security Manage Locks View and delete 185i element locks Security Manage Users Maintain users 175i groups 173 and assigned permissions 180 Spell Check Spell check package and set spell check language Transfer Data Transfer model 79 between different repositories Transform Package Perform transformations of packages and elements Update Diagrams Update diagram appearance properties and layout including the Page Setup dialog Update Element Save
13. Create and store the Baseline as Version 0 1a 2 As work continues on development managers and developers can check the current model branch against the Baseline for important modifications additions and deletions The Compare diff tool can be invoked from the Baseline dialog to check the current model branch against the stored version 3 As required minor Baselines can be created to check recent progress These temporary Baselines are useful for managing change when a lot of work is being done and it is important to only see what has changed in for example the last 24 hours 4 At sign off or the move to a new version phase a major Baseline can be created to capture the new state of the model Minor Baselines created earlier can be deleted if required to save space Important Considerations e Baselines are based on the GUID or unique ID of a particular package Enterprise Architect checks for that ID as the root element within the XML document being used as a Baseline When you export a package to XML the package you export is the root element Likewise when you create a Baseline the current package is the root package of the XML Baseline When you save information in a version control system the current version controlled package is again the root package of the document e tis not useful to create a Baseline by importing an XMI package file created by version controlling a package that itself contains version controlled child
14. Data Management Project Integrity Check 761 menu option on the base project to upsize to PostgreSQL This ensures your data is clean before uploading Note You cannot move a model from a source EAP file of a version earlier than 3 5 0 Warning Before proceeding ensure MDAC 2 6 or higher is installed on your system Upsizing Your Database You upsize your database for PostgreSQL in three stages as follows Stage One Install PostgreSQL Components 1 Install PostgreSQL version 7 3 2 or higher 2 Install psqlODBC version 7 03 01 00 or higher but do not use version 8 4 1 3 Create a suitable ODBC Data Source to point to your new database O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 18 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository Note See Set up a PostgreSQL ODBC Driver 27 gt Stage Two Configure the Database 1 From the PSQL command line or using a tool such as the PostgreSQL command line pgAdminIll or EMS PostgreSQL Manager load the Postgres_Basemodel sq file This is available to registered users on the Corporate edition Resources page of the Sparx Systems website 2 Run the script to create all required data structures Note See Create a New PostgreSQL Repository 437 You now have an empty database and can transfer an existing model into the server Stage Three Transfer the Data 1 Open Enterprise Architect click on the Cancel button on the Open Project screen to open
15. Lock a Package To lock a package follow the steps below 1 Deselect the Project Security Require User Lock to Edit menu option 2 Inthe Project Browser right click on the package to lock The context menu displays 3 Select the Lock Package menu option The Lock Unlock Package s dialog displays Lock Type 9 No lock general editing allowed Full lock no one may edit gt User lock locking user may still edit gt Group lock locking group may still edit Group D What to Process Y Lock Elements Y Lock Diagram V Process Child Packages _ox_ J Caca J _ Hep O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 194 User Security Lock Packages 4 Inthe Lock Type panel select the appropriate radio button for the lock to apply 5 As required select the checkboxes to lock elements and or diagrams and to process child packages that is lock the whole branch 6 Click on the OK button to apply the lock 12 18 Apply a User Lock In the Require User Lock to Editl17 security mode where a User Lock is required before any edit can occur you can set or release the lock in either a diagram or the Project Browser Enterprise Architect adjusts the lock for the element or for the diagram and any elements contained in the diagram In a diagram you right click on the element or diagram in the Project Browser you right click on the package diagram or element In each case select the Apply Release Use
16. People menu option and on the People dialog click on the Resources tab Complete the fields as described below Type the name of the person listed as a resource The resource name is available for use in Resource Management See Program Management with Enterprise Architect UML Model Management Reference Data People 233 Type the name of the organization employing the resource Role s Type the role the resource plays in the project for example Designer Analyst Architect Phone 1 Phone 2 Mobile Type the contact telephone numbers for the resource Fax Email Type the email address for the resource Notes Type any additional notes on the resource Available Resources Review resources that have already been defined Click on the Save button to add the new resource to the Available Resources list To add further resources click on the New button To delete a resource click on the name in the Available Resources list and click on the Delete button Note You can transport these resource definitions between models using the Export Reference Data 251 and Import Reference Data 253 options on the Tools menu 17 1 4 Project Clients Project clients are the eventual owners of the software system To capture client details associated with the current model select the Settings People menu option and on the People dialog click on the Project Clients ta
17. Types 247 Team Deployment And Version Control 133 Version Control Branching Team Development 98 Team Foundation Server Connect Enterprise Architect Model For Version Control 154 Version Control Option Testing Type Define TFS Connect Enterprise Architect Model For Version Control 154 Version Control Option 154 Working Folder For Enterprise Architect Version Control 154 Workspace For Enterprise Architect Version Control 154 TortoiseSVN In Version Control Traceability Diagrams 222 Element Grouping Introduction 217 Model Structure 218 Package Organization Themes 217 Tools 224 Window In Traceability 224 With Dependency Report 224 With Implementation Report 224 With Relationship Matrix 224 With Traceability Window 224 Transfer Project Data Between Repositories 79 133 154 243 153 218 218 Us UML 13 76 104 105 106 1 4 105 106 2 0 106 2 0 Migration 76 DTD 109 Models Under Single Root UML Model CSV Import And Export In Enterprise Architect 118 UML Syntax Compliance Turn Off 92 UML Types Cardinality Multiplicity Dialog 245 Stereotypes Tagged Values UML_EA DTD 109 File 106 UML2 File Import Unlock Connector Element Upgrade Model 74 75 Models Upgrade Wizard 74 Project 74 Replicas 75 102 Wizard 74 Upsize From Desktop and Professional Editions 11 To Access 2007 12 ToMySQL 22 To Oracle 19 To PostgreSQL 17 To Progress OpenEdge 15 To SQL Server 20 To S
18. e notify you if the results of the search change between two consecutive searches For information on the Model Views facility see the View Options section of Using Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool To create a view select a defined search and optionally enter a search term Name Search Simple Search Term Refresh this search Frequency 00 00 00 Notify me when new results found ox cance Hee You can therefore use the Model Views facility to monitor various events in the development project depending on how you set up the search in a View You could for example set up a search to detect e Change items or Issue items so that Enterprise Architect would notify you as new items were created e Element Status Type Phase Version Priority and or date of last update so that Enterprise Architect would notify you as items were progressed to fall in to the level of work represented by the search categories and to move out of the categories into the next level of work e Tagged Values so that again as items were changed to satisfy the criteria of a sequence of searches the progression of items through a set of stages could be checked and managed People responsible for different stages in a process could have their own Model View searches so that as a development validation or authorization task falls due the responsible person is automatically notified and when the work is complete both
19. select this checkbox to use the database server s timestamp instead of each user s local timestamp this improves security Note The Use Database Timestamp option is not available for projects stored in EAP Files 13 2 2 Audit Logs The Audit Settings dialog enables you to administer your audit records As the number of records increases the performance of the Audit View 20 reduces It is recommended that audit records that are not regularly required are saved to file then cleared from the project This helps ensure high performance e Clear Logs removes all log data from the current project all data is permanently deleted To keep the audit records outside the project click on the Save Logs button to save the records before clearing them from the project e Save Logs saves a copy of the log items currently held in the database these items remain in the database To remove the items after saving the copy click on the Clear Logs button e Load Logs enables you to load a previously saved set of logs back into the project The file is not deleted by this operation If duplicate logs exist in both the project and the file these are skipped 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 200 Auditing Auditing Settings Note Some of these functions can be accessed through the Automation Interface For more information see the Repository topic in SDK for Enterprise Architect If you save or clear the log items Enter
20. such as requirements or deployment see the Model Templates topic in Using Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool You can generate these templated packages at any level of the hierarchy but as they are created with their own content they are more useful at the top levels The top level packages in a model can also be Views 85 which represent partitions of the model that you define yourself You can start with standard Views such as Class or Component or create whatever partitions are appropriate to your model So a typical project could have a structure something like the following Recent Condor Project Browser x COREENE IME RAE ME E A 7 y Development Model a Requirements Model Requirements View Use Case Model Package 23 Use Case Diagram E CJ Actors ul Primary Use Cases 23 Primary UCDiagram E Customer Setup D Use Casel Use Case2 The project Condor contains two models e Development Model and 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 8 Enterprise Architect Project Files What is a Project e Requirements Model Requirements Model contains e Requirements View and e Use Case Model Package Each View or Model Package contains packages Use Case Model Package contains e Actors and e Primary Use Cases It also contains the diagram Use Case Diagram which could be an overview of the package structure or function Each package itself can contain one or more diagrams one or more packages
21. 1831 permission to lock an element You can lock a package element or diagram using the corresponding Lock context menu option in the Project Browser and you can lock an element or diagram using the corresponding Lock context menu option in the diagram Under the standard security policy Require User Lock to Edit deselected when you select the Lock option the Element Lock dialog displays Lock Type No lock general editing allowed gt Full lock no one may edit User lock locking user may still edit gt Group lock locking group may still edit 0K _ Cancel Help The four lock options available are e No lock do not lock this element clear any existing lock e Full lock lock this element so that no one can edit it e User lock lock this element so that only the locking user can make further edits e Group lock lock this element so that any member of the specified group in the GroupID field can update the element but others are excluded Select the appropriate lock and click on the OK button If the item is already locked only the appropriate lock option and No lock are available You have to release the lock in order to set a different type of lock Under the rigorous security policy a different dialog displays See the Apply a User Lock 1941 topic UML Model Management User Security Lock Model Elements 193 If a diagram is locked and you select an object
22. 46 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository File Edit Plugins View Tools Help os Servers 1 G jj dbserver02 dbserver02 5432 l 8 Databases 3 E 9 ea A gt Catalogs 2 H Q ANSI information_schg H Q PostgreSQL pg_catalo a e Schemas 1 Properties Table ES t_attribute E t_attributeconstr E t_attributetag H t_authors E t_cardinality E t_category COOL TES Statistics Dependencies Dependents Owner Comment postgres postgres postgres postgres postgres postgres B public H Domains 1 FTS Configurations II FTS Dictionaries 0 GQ FTS Parsers 0 5 FTS Templates 0 Functions 0 E Sequences 19 al Tables 98 Trigger Functions i B Views 0 Sy Replication 0 postgres 6 regschema E gt Tablespaces 2 Group Roles 0 E 4 Login Roles 1 E t_dients E t_complexitytypes E t_connector E t_connectorconst E t_connectortag E t_connectortypes E t_constants E t_constrainttypes E t_datatypes E t_diagram a os postgres postgres postgres postgres postgres postgres postgres postgres postgres postgres Retrieving Tables details Done 0 00 secs 1 4 10 6 Adaptive Server Anywhere Repository Note This feature is available in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions Before creating an ASA data repository
23. Example Comparison 213 Comparing package Business Process Model against baseline version 0 1 x Boe t Te fe te E 2 Model Elements Status Property Model Baseline E Business Process Model Abstract false false a EJ Rules Aias Author Suzanne Pearson Suzanne Pearson People must wear safety belts in all se Changed Date Created 16 01 2009 12 07 15 PM 16 01 2009 12 07 15 PM Z No more than 5 persons in a vehicle Changed Date Modified 5 06 2009 10 15 00 AM 16 01 2009 12 07 30 PM eS Complexity 1 1 S i eP ES MA Filename C Documents and Settings C Documents and Settings w Ej Customer Language CH CH E RuleAow IsLeaf false false r icibili IsSpec false false H a a IsRoot false false by address Changed Keywords Application Moved Muttplicity p Status Baseline only Application Application es El E Constraints Parent Package Business Rules Model Business Process Model E AllowableValues Accept Reje Baseline only Persistence Phase 1 0 1 0 Scope Public Public Status Proposed Proposed Stereotype Type Class Class Version 1 0 1 0 Classifier Visibility Concurrency Cardinality Style Locked false Locked false Advanced SXREFPROP SXID 475E54 Properties propertySTYP SVIS Public V The Compare Utility tab enables you to perform operations such as merging or rolling back changes on the reported information using the toolbar context menu and keyboard 213 Higher Level of Detail
24. It is possible to assign a color to each status type which gives a visual indication of the status of each diagram object Select a named status type from the Type list click on the Status Type Colordrop down list and select the color for that status Click on the Save button to keep your changes Note To ensure status colors display on your diagrams open the Options dialog at the Objects page and select the Show status colors on diagrams checkbox See the Defaults and User Settings topic in Using Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool Apply Colors to UML Elements By default status colors only apply to Requirement Issue and Change elements see the UML Dictionary You might decide to also apply these colors to other UML elements such as Use Cases or Classes To do this click on the Applies to button and select the checkbox against each required element type in the UML Model Management Reference Data General Types 237 Applied Status Colors list Applied Status Colors Note Requirement Feature Issue and Change elements have a status color compartment but other elements do not The status color for these elements is applied to the element shadow Therefore on the Options dialog Diagram Appearance page you must also select the Element Shadows on checkbox See the Defaults and User Settings topic in Using Enterpr
25. Notes on REQ3 Notes on REQ3 1 Notes on REQ3 2 Notes on REQ4 Notes on REQ4 1 Notes on REQ4 2 Notes on REQ4 3 PRIORITY STATUS High High High Med High High High High High High High High Approved Approved Approved Approved Approved Approved Approved Approved Approved Approved Approved Approved CSV_KEY Package REQ1 REQ2 REQ2 1 REQ2 2 REQ2 3 REQ3 REQ3 1 REQ3 2 REQ4 REQ4 1 REQ4 2 REQ4 3 CSV_PARENT_KEY Package Package REQ2 REQ2 REQ2 Package REQ3 REQ3 Package REQ4 REQ4 REQ4 It is highly recommended that you do not change these fields by hand if they have been automatically generated by Enterprise Architect s CSV exporter 9 2 CSV Export It is possible to export information about Enterprise Architect elements in CSV format Once you have defined a CSV export specification 11 it is possible to write out major element attributes to a CSV text file Note In the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect if security is enabled you must have both Export XMI 1837 and Import XMI 185 permissions to use the CSV Import Export option See User Security in UML Models Export Data in CSV Format To export data in CSV format follow the steps below 1 Inthe Project Browser right click on the package containing the elements to export 2 Select the Import Export CSV Import Export context menu option The CSV I
26. The automatic import is conditional on there UML Model Management Reference Data Import and Export Reference Data 251 being changes to the source file since the last import but you can also configure Enterprise Architect to display a prompt for you to allow or cancel the import Examples of where exporting and importing reference data can be useful include e Copying glossaries from one model to another Adding additional stereotype profiles by merging new stereotypes into the model Updating reference data from files supplied by Sparx Systems as a maintenance release Copying resources clients and so on from one model to another 17 7 1 Export Reference Data When reference and project data is exported Enterprise Architect writes it out to a custom XML file This includes table information filter information rows and columns Procedure To export data follow the steps below 1 Select the Tools Export Reference Data menu option The Data Exporter dialog displays Select one or more tables for export Name Automation Scripts BPM to WSDL_Transform_Template C _Code_Template Cardinality types Constraint Status Types Defined Metric Types Defined Problem Types Diagram Matrix Profiles Estimation ECF Values Estimation TCF Values General Constraint Types General Effort Types IDL Code Temolate _ Epot _ Cose Helo 2 From the Name list select the table to export You can
27. To save this configuration as the default click on the Save Settings button 4 Click on the Run Import button Enterprise Architect cycles through the packages and imports each selected package As Enterprise Architect processes each package it updates the Status column against each package name on the Batch XMI Import dialog e If the import is successful Enterprise Architect updates the package status to Imported e If the import is unsuccessful Enterprise Architect updates the package status to Not Imported Common reasons for an import to fail include e The package not being correctly configured e The last import file date matches the import date of the file currently on disk 8 6 8 Manual Version Control with XMI You can use XMI to support version control by writing model elements in XML text files suitable for use with standard version control software Using XMI in this manner enables you to manually connect to third party version control software outside the Enterprise Architect environment Enterprise Architect internally supports the configuration of version control through SCC and CVS configurations To use XMI for version control you must first UML Model Management XMI Import and Export Controlled Packages 117 1 Select suitable packages in the Project Browser window to be marked as controlled packages 2 Configure these with filenames that are visible to a version control system of your choic
28. and export 12h element data from Enterprise Architect using CSV files you must first set up one or more file specifications A file specification lists the fields from the spreadsheet in the order they are imported or exported the filename optional and the delimiter between columns Once you have defined one or more specifications one can be selected in the CSV Import Export dialog as the current specification to apply during an import or export action CSV only imports and exports elements within packages and their properties items such as Class attributes cannot be imported or exported through this mechanism XMI 104 provides a solution to this limitation as does use of the Automation Interface See the Enterprise Architect Object Model topic in SDK for Enterprise Architect To define a specification select the Project Import Export CSV Import Export Specifications menu option The CSV Import Export Specification dialog displays UML Model Management CSV Import and Export CSV Specifications 119 Default Filename Default Direction Import X Default Types V Preserve Hierachy Available Fields Available Element Field Select Element Field Stereotype GUID Alias Phase Modified Date Specify the character delimiter to use between record fields Note If a field contains an instance of the delimiter the field is exported wrapped in quotation marks
29. backups and restores To get started follow the steps below 1 Run MySQL Administrator and create a new database Create new Schema Ex Cll Please enter a name for the new schema Schema name eal 2 Run MySQL Query Browser and open and execute the MySQL repository script UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 39 File Edit View Query Script Tools Window Help om Qom O Oe Schemata Gookmaks History MySQL Backup Source Host localhost E ea Source Server Version 4 0 4 beta max nt Source Database basemodel gt 5 information_schema Date 2002 11 05 14 39 05 b 8 mysql H 8 test use basemodel WVOnNOnMWONMeE drop table if exists t_attribute create table t_attribute Object_ID int 11 not null default 9 Name varchar 255 not null Scope varchar 50 Stereotype varchar 50 Containment varchar 50 IsStatic int 11 default 0 IsCollection int 11 default 0 IsOrdered int 11 default 9 AllowDuplicates int 11 default 0 LowerBound varchar 50 UpperBound varchar 50 Container varchar 50 Notes text Derived char 1 1D int 11 not null auto_increment Pos int 11 ds Functions Params Tre GenOption text Length int 11 Data Definition Statements Precision int 11 E Data Manipulation Statements Scale int 11 MySQL Utility Statements Const int 1
30. elements is not valid for those elements The Generalization relationship cannot exist between parent and child elements because the parent element is defined as a leaf element The Generalization relationship cannot exist between parent and child elements because the child element is defined as a root element MVR050005 Element cannot generalize self The element cannot be self generalized MVROB0001 Statechart violation extended information 6 2 2 Element Composition The State diagram contains a UML violation see the extended information for more information about the detected violation This group of rules checks whether or not a UML element contains valid children whether it contains the right number of valid children and whether or not the element is missing any required children COTINNC TS CN MVRO20001 MVRO20002 MVRO20003 Element is missing required child element Child Element Invalid UML package child Invalid child Child Element name Child Element Type The element is missing a child element of type Child Element The element cannot be a direct package child and must be a child of another element for example Ports must be children of other elements and not direct UML package members The child element is invalid on the tested parent element O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 94 Model Validation Rules Reference 6 2 3 Property
31. if security is enabled you must have Manage Replicas 1831 permission to synchronize a replica See User Security in UML Models Synchronize a Replica To synchronize a replica and a design master follow the steps below 1 Open the design master project file 2 Select the Tools Manage EAP File Synchronize Replicas menu option 3 Locate and select the required replica to merge the open project and the replica Note When you synchronize both projects end up containing identical information Change Collisions Note that if two or more people work on the same element or package or diagram then the replication engine has problems in resolving which change is the master To avoid this always work on separate areas in the model when you are using replicas You can also use the Tools Manage EAP File Resolve Replication Conflicts 1037 menu option 7 4 4 Remove Replication Replication makes many changes to the database structure of your model As a consequence the model file becomes considerably larger with additional information If you no longer require a model to be replicable you can remove all replication features Remove Replication To remove replication follow the steps below 1 If a repository is not open the menu option for removing replication is not enabled A temporary repository not the one having replication removed must be open at the time Ensure you have a repository open at the time of creation 2 S
32. implement the UML 2 1 XMI 2 1 standard the UML1 4 XMI 1 2 standard or the UML 1 3 XMI 1 1 XMI 1 0 standard For more information regarding the limitations of XMI exporting read the Limitations of XMIl109 topic Notes e Inthe Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect if security is enabled you must have Export XMI 183 permission to export to XMI See User Security in UML Models e You can post process the XMI content before saving the package to file using a style sheet to convert the output to HTML XSL code or other versions of XMI If you want to do this you must import the required style sheet into the project through the Resources window See Using Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool Export a Package to XMI To export a package to XMI follow the steps below 1 Inthe Project Browser window select the package to export 2 Either e Right click and select the Import Export Export Package to XMI context menu option or e Select the Project Import Export Export Package to XMI menu option The Export Package to XMI dialog displays Filename C Documents ProjMan CommsReview xml Stylesheet Lo y Optional stylesheet to post process XMI content For Export to Other Tools V Enable full EA Roundtrip XMI Type XMI 1 1 x Unisys Rose Format eN Exclude EA Tagged Values Warning These
33. jy Import using single transaction Not recommended for large imports Treat Imported Datatypes Import EMX UML2 Files Guemes Gas 2 XMI Import Progress Note To import emx or uml2 files click on the Import EMX UML2 Files button Go to Import EMX UML2 Files 108 3 Inthe Filename field type the directory path and filename from which to import the XMI file 4 Select the Import diagrams checkbox to import diagrams 5 Select the Strip GUIDs checkbox to remove Universal Identifier information from the file on import This enables the import of a package twice into the same model the second import requires new GUIDs to avoid element collisions 6 Select the Write log file checkbox to write a log of import activity recommended the log file is saved in the directory from which the file is being imported 7 Import using single transaction defaults to selected if the import encounters locking issues or if you are importing a large XMI file deselect the checkbox to import the data items separately and identify 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 108 XMI Import and Export Import from XMI problem items without blocking the whole import 8 If you are importing from Rose XMI 1 1 click on the Treat Imported Datatypes drop down arrow and select the datatypes to add to the model 9 Click on the Import button 8 3 Import EMX UML2 Files Rational Software Architect RSA enables you to add many UM
34. 78 Project Data Transfer Perform a Project Data Transfer Why Compare Projects iii iii 80 Compare Projects a 81 Copy Packages Between Projects ssssssessecseeseesensseesseeseeesessenesenseneseeeseessesseneseeseneseesneeseeeaeenseesenenentenes 81 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd Il Contents Model Maintenance essscsssssssessssssesseseeessessesacesesueesesaeeesesuesaeeaeeesesueeaceeceesesuesaceaseastsass 84 Rename a Profecias ica ains E dan desees APN e PAKS d AARAA NEEN skia K eTA audae p atraia 84 Compacta Pro a 84 Repalra Project isticinisicriocoricnaca acosan casara a aaeeea EEA AA Araia i senasevanecbachaissasche sducdioansusenevbceveucdvaasis 85 AAA A NN 85 Add Views 86 RENAME VIEWS A aaa 87 A A E NON 88 Model Validation dis 90 Configure Model Validation 92 E OO ON 92 Well Formedng SSi ii tacdeddaceuies cuucdsoubevevtdaveneatecnusotensiersaseie A 93 Element Composition cronica ie 93 Property Validity cssiccstecccncess A td AL th adc dy one AAA AAA 94 OGLE Conformance cu An 94 Model Sharing and Team Deployment sssssssscssesssscssssessesssersssesssnsnsoestensrseeateceseserss 98 Share Enterprise Architect Projects 99 Share Projects on Network Drive cssssscsseeseeseeseecsesseeneeeseesenesenseneseneneeeseaseneeeeseneseesneesseeneeeseesenesensenes 99 Distributed Development ccsecsseeesneesseessseeeseeeesseesseeeesnesseneessneee
35. AeA EEA A TAES AAEE EEEE A 127 Export MOF TOM in ar 128 NeFSION CONO daa 130 Version Control Basics iii 132 Apply Version Control To Models viii denotan 132 Version Control amp Team Deployment ssssssessseeesseeeesseeseerseeseneneeeeneseeeseesseeseesseeseneneesseesseeneerseeseneneeees 133 Version Control MO iia 134 Version Control Setup omccmccnccnnnnnan we 134 Version Control Settings Dialog ec eeessesseseceeneeeceeeeeaeeeecaeceaecseeeaeeeaeeseeeaesaecseeeaeeeaeeaaeeaeeeeesneeeaees 135 Version Control Nested Packages ce seceesseceesreeneeseeeseeeeeeaeeeeeceesaeseaesaeeeaeenaesaeeeaeseeeeeeeaeeneeeaees 137 UML Model Management Contents III Version Control with S Clica iia a A AA his Main eee ER R 137 Upgrade at Enterprise Architect 4 5 140 Version Controkwith CVS serer a a A ada 141 CVS with Remote Repositories osisssa detiri riii 141 CVS with Local Repositories oooooconnnncinnnnncnononccnnnononnnnrnnnononnnnn data diode Eide aia e Taa ia ie aN 145 Version Control with SubversiON oonconconconinncnncnnncnoccnncnnncnn nn ran rc rr 148 Set p SUDVErSION cta ai AI Dia AL el ATN 148 Create a new Repository SUb t88 oooncocinnnnconnconcnncnnnononnnonncnoconnnnn nono non cnn ren cnn cancer cra rn narran 149 Create a Local Working Copyn aisiais inaa a adaa ae a Eii AR 150 Subversion Under WINE CrosSOVef ici ci 150 Version Gentrol Contiguration
36. D View Open Orders D Add To Shopping Basket D Go To Checkout AA D Remove From Shopping Basket D Search for Books D View Shopping Basket p a a a a a a a Add New Titles Create Orders Edit Titles AccountAdmin Administrator Client Shipping Company Storeroom Worker User List Stock Levels D Manage Publishers trace trace q Manage Titles D Receive Orders HOHOHOHOHOHO UML Model Management Traceability Packages and Elements 221 Use Cases in Manage Users Unit of Online Bookstore Process Client from Actors AccountAdmin Administrator from Actors The Use Case diagrams can also clarify what aspects of a process require or enable human intervention and which require or enable system intervention Implementation Stage For completeness you could also consider the next stage the implementation of some of these Use Cases as represented by Class elements associated with this functional unit O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 222 Traceability Packages and Elements DOB string Name string customer_address City string Country string Street1 street Street2 string 16 2 Create Traceability Diagrams Having structured the models of a project to indicate directions and theoretical relationships between the models and packages you can formalize these directions on a
37. Data Type Definition DTD The XML parser uses this document to validate the correctness of the model and to check that no syntactical errors have occurred It is always best to use a DTD when 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 110 XMI Import and Export The UML DTD moving packages between Enterprise Architect models as it ensures correctness of the XMI output and prevents attempted imports of incorrect XML Several DTDs for XMI UML exist The OMG defines a standard UML1 3 DTD for use in XMI 1 1 Enterprise Architect uses an extension of this with some additional element extensions for non standard UML types such as testing details Whenever you read an XML file the XML parser looks in the current directory for the DTD if specified using the DOCTYPE element in the XML file If the parser cannot find the DTD it records an error and aborts processing You must ensure the UML_EA DTD file is in the current XML output path generated by default 8 6 Controlled Packages Controlled packages are a powerful means of externalizing parts of an Enterprise Architect model Using controlled packages you can e Support widely distributed development by having team members submit packages in the form of XML for import into a central Enterprise Architect repository e Support version control 136 by writing model elements in XML text files suitable for version control using standard version control software Using XMI this
38. Database Repository 59 Select a driver for which you want to set up a data source Microsoft Visual FoxPro Treiber MySQL ODEC 5 1 Driver Oracle in OraDb11g_home1 PostgreSQL ANSI PostgreSQL Unicode Progress OpenEdge 10 1C Driver E SQL Anywhere 11 1 am n r 4 3 Select Oracle in OraDB11g_homel or similar depending on the ODBC installation 4 Click on the Finish button The Oracle ODBC Driver Configuration dialog displays Data Source Name Dracle_E4_DSN Description EA Model TNS Service Name ORA11 y User ID EA _USER Application Oracle Workarounds SQLServer Migration Enable Result Sets V Enable Query Timeout V Read Only Connection Enable Closing Cursors Enable Thread Safety V Batch Autocommit Mode Commit only i all statements succeed z Numeric Settings Use Oracle NLS settings z 5 Enter the following configuration details e A data source name for the connection e A description optional e The TNS Service Name click on the drop down arrow and select from the list e The User ID 6 Click on the Test Connection button and enter the Oracle user password to confirm that the details are correct 7 Click on the OK button to complete the ODBC connection 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 60 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository Connect To Repository 1 In
39. Desktop and Professional versions of Enterprise Architect use an MS JET database as the model repository If you purchase the Corporate Business and Software Engineering Systems Engineering or Ultimate edition you can create and use any of the following data repositories e SQL Server 401 2000 2005 or 2008 e MySQL 3844 or 5 e PostgreSQL 4347 or 8 e Adaptive Server Anywhere 8 or 9 or SQL Anywhere 10 or 11 46 e Access 2007 374 e Progress OpenEdge 48 e MSDE 485 or e Oracle 9i 10g or 119 43 You upsize the Enterprise Architect models either existing or template to use your selected DBMS The process of upsizing a model is straightforward and comprises the following steps 1 Install the DBMS software and create a database Ensure that the collation is set to the alphabet you use such as Latin or Cyrillic 2 Run a script supplied by Sparx Systems http www sparxsystems com resources corporate index htmlitsgl scripts to create the required tables 3 Open Enterprise Architect and use the Project Data Transfer 7 function select the Tools Data Management Project Transfer menu option to move a model from a EAP file to the DBMS repository Note You cannot move a model from a source EAP file of a version earlier than 3 5 0 Setting up a database repository is a two or three stage process firstly you set up an ODBC driver for your database secondly you create the repository tables using scripts downloaded from the
40. Differencing and Merges Baselines 14 1 Baselines Enterprise Architect Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions provides a facility to Baseline snapshot a model branch at a particular point in time for later comparison with the current package state This is most useful for determining changes made to the model during development compared to some Baseline saved at a crucial point for example the completion of a phase or version iteration Baselines are stored within the model in compressed XML format More than one Baseline can be stored against a single Enterprise Architect package You can also save a Baseline to an XML file for storage or archive or for distributing to other users working on models derived from a master project Baselines are particularly useful during requirements management to check for changes additions and deletions that have occurred since the start of the current work phase Knowing how a model has changed is an important part of managing change and the overall development process Baselines are generally used in conjunction with the Compare utility diffl210 which is built into the Professional Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect A typical scenario for using Baselines 2081 would be to 1 Createl210 the base model branch to a sufficient point to create a Baseline checkpoint
41. Files ViewxMI import cose Hep XMI Import Progress 3 Click on the Import EMX UML2 Files button The Import Package from XMI dialog redisplays formatted for EMX UML2 file imports UML Model Management XMI Import and Export Import EMX UML2 Files 109 Root Package Directory ClassLibrary2 Selected File s Y Write Log File Import Progess 4 Click on the Browse button next to the Directory field The Select Import EMX UML2 File s dialog displays which enables you to select multiple files 5 Select the file or files use Ctrl click or Shift click to select several files and click on the Open button The Import Package from XMI dialog redisplays the Selected File s panel lists the selected files 6 Select the Write Log File checkbox to write a log of import activity recommended the log file is saved in the directory from which the file is being imported with the name import log 7 Click on the Import button Enterprise Architect indicates the progress of the import in the Import Progress field 8 4 Limitations of XMI Whilst XMI is a valuable means of specifying a UML model in a common format it is relatively limited in the amount of additional information it can tolerate using the standard syntax A lot of information from an Enterprise Architect Model must be converted to Tagged Values which import into other m
42. Filter and Mode settings If you refresh the Audit View you must run the search again e The Audit Settings button opens the Audit Settings 19 dialog Sort by Panel The Sort By panel enables you to select one of three display settings e Type changes are grouped under element type such as Class or Requirement and then grouped under the changed element Class Elements MyClass f 2007 03 13 10 38 55 8 2007 03 13 10 39 01 X 2007 03 13 10 39 04 e User changes are grouped under user name The number of changes for each user is also displayed Under each user name changes are grouped as for the Type sort E admin 3 E Class Elements MyClass A 2007 03 13 10 46 06 2007 03 13 10 46 10 X 2007 03 13 10 46 15 e Deletions displays only deletions shown in chronological order If used with the Search button this can be useful for recovering information on missing elements 2007 05 03 09 49 41 2007 05 03 09 49 41 2007 05 03 09 49 41 2007 05 03 09 49 41 XX 2007 05 03 10 51 08 XX 2007 05 03 10 51 54 O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 204 Auditing The Audit View Filter by The Filter By Date Time checkbox enables filtering by time periods which you set using the Time Filter dialog click on the Filter Settings button to display this dialog ee atid 9 Today Previous Hour Cancel C Previous 24 Hours Help Previous Week Previous 30 Days C Previous Year
43. In the Open Project dialog 84 select the Connect to Server checkbox or on the Start Page click on the Connect to Server link Click on the Browse button as you normally would to browse for a project As you have selected the Connect to Server checkbox the Data Link Properties dialog displays instead of the Browse Directories dialog UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 63 Select the data you want to connect to OLE DB Provider s MediaCatalogDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogMergedDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogWebDB OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Outlook Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider MSDataShape OLE DB Provider for Microsoft Directory Services 3 Select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers from the list 4 Click on the Next button The Connection tab displays 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 64 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository Connection Advanced AL Specify the following to connect to ODBC data 1 Specify the source of data Use data source name Use connection string 2 Enter informatio
44. Optimizer that compresses the data returned from the repository reducing transfer time If you select this checkbox complete the next two fields see your administrator for the correct values Otherwise go to step 16 14 In the Server field type the network name or address of the optimizer server 15 In the Port field type the port on which the server is running on the remote machine 16 Click on the OK button to complete the configuration Using Oracle ODBC Driver This process has two stages e Create ODBC Driver connection in Windows e Connect to Repository in Enterprise Architect Create ODBC Driver Connection 1 Select the Windows Control Panel Administrative Tools Data Sources ODBC option The ODBC Data Source Administrator window displays User DSN System DSN File DSN Drivers Tracing Connection Pooling User Data Sources Name Driver dBASE Files Microsoft dBase Driver dbf Excel Files Microsoft Excel Driver xds MS Access Database Microsoft Access Driver mdb Regression MySQL ODBC 3 51 Driver An ODBC User data source stores information about how to connect to E the indicated data provider A User data source is only visible to you and can only be used on the current machine 2 Click on the Add button The Create New Data Source dialog displays enabling you to add a new DSN UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a
45. Progress OpenEdge ODBC DIivel e eeceesesceeseeeeeeeeeeseeeaececeeseeeaesseeeaeesaesaeeeaeeeeeaeeeaeseeeaeeeaeeaeees 35 Create a Repository vimos A 37 ACCESS DU ita AA A A AAA AAA 37 MySQL Repositorio a 38 SAL Server Reposo Vacio A AA 40 Oracle Server Repository imvivacoricii a Ao 43 PostgreSQL Repository 43 Adaptive Server Anywhere ReEpoOSitory ccecceeceeseeceeeeeeeeseeeeneeeaeeeeeaeeeeesaeesaeeeesaeesaeeeaeeaeseaeeeeeeateaas 46 MSDE Serer Repository ike den en cei aed id 48 Progress OpenEdge RepositOry ceessecsesseeceeseeeeeceeeeaeceaeceeeseseaeseeeaessaeeaeeeaeseeeaeseaeseeeeaeeeaeeeeees 48 Connect to a Data REpOSitOry ee eeeescescesseceeeeseeeseseeeeseesaessneeaeesaesseesaessaesaeeaesseesaeseaerseeeaeeeaesaeeeaeeaee 49 MySQL Data Repository so 50 SQL Server Data Repository cian di 52 Oracle Data Repository cacecsc niacin io 55 PostgreSQL Data Repository isis ninina a a iin a a an eatin 62 ASA Data Repository ics cn tte eine ta Oda 65 MSDE Server Data Repository n crni nnn a a aa A aa iE N NE E 68 Progress OpenEdge Rep sitory isssnis iseten daa 68 The WAN Optimizer A ia 72 COpy a Base Project a ae arae iee E a a e a anaa oar a EE E HaKe eE rE 73 Upgrade Models The Upgrade Wizard icioiccionoinain ii di 74 Upgrade Replicas zeia a a a a a 75 Project Data Integrity raigna a A a aeatatehasbenta Rasen 76 Check Project Data Integrity ooomnninnosia ins ena 76 Run SQL Patches ad
46. Project Version Control Validate Package Configurations The validation process scans the model database and verifies that the version control configuration associated with each version controlled package is fully specified in the current model It also queries the corresponding version control provider to find the status of the package file associated with each version controlled package The results of the validation process are sent to the Enterprise Architect Output window as shown below O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 162 Version Control Use Version Control Output Validating configuration settings for all version controlled packages Package Development Model VC Config SVN_config FileName Development Model xml VC Status checked out to User Package Logical View VC Config SVN_config FileName Logical View xml VC Status checked in Validation Completed M 4 gt gt System Script Model Validation Version Control lt T _ lL Depending on the results you can then complete the definition of any invalid or missing version control configurations or correct problems with individual packages or their associated package files Click on an error message to highlight in the Project Browser the package that is in error 11 6 5 Check In and Check Out Packages To work on a version controlled package you must have the package checked out When a pa
47. Project Files Set Up a Database Repository Provider Connection Advanced All Select the data you want to connect to OLE DB Provider s IBM OLE DB Provider for DB2 Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider MSDataShape OLE DB Provider for Microsoft Directory Services Oracle Provider for OLE DB SQL Anywhere OLE DB Provider 11 3 Select Oracle Provider for OLE DB from the list Note Do not select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Enterprise Architect might not work as expected 4 Click on the Next button The Connection tab displays UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 57 oo N Provider Connection Advanced Al Specify the following to connect to this data 1 Enter the data source and or location of the data Data Source ORA10 2 Enter information to log on to the server Use Windows NT Inte rated ear int tG SCCUIIRY ol 9 Use a specific user name and password Username EA USER Password eeeee E Blank password 9 JF Test Connection OK Cancel Help Enter the Data Source name the service name of the Oracle database the
48. Select e Today to display changes occurring today e Previous Hour to display changes occurring in the last 60 minutes e Previous 24 Hours to display changes occurring in the last 24 hours e Previous Week to display changes occurring in the last 7 days e Previous 30 Days to display changes occurring in the last 30 days e Previous Year to display changes occurring in the last 365 days e Custom to define your own time period using the From and To fields Note The six pre configured time periods automatically update when you click on the Refresh button Custom periods are static and do not automatically update Changes that occur outside the filter period you select are not shown in the Audit View Once you have set a filter period it remains set if you deselect the Filter By Date Time checkbox The Custom time period too is retained so that you can re use it or modify it later if required Status Text Beneath the Filter By Date Time checkbox status text displays to show which mode 204 has been selected and which time filter 204 is being applied to the data Mode Button The Mode button enables you to change the mode of the Audit View The button displays a drop down menu from which you can select e Standard to interact with the Project Browser e Advanced to load large sets of log items Note When in Advanced mode a special Audit Settings group can be displayed in the Audit Tree 20h This records whe
49. Select the Select All checkbox to select all packages in the list 3 To save this configuration as the default click on the Save Settings button 4 Click on the Run Export button Enterprise Architect cycles through each checked package and exports it using the options specified in the Controlled Package 1121 dialog As long as a valid filename exists Enterprise Architect exports the package to XML and proceeds to the next package 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 116 XMI Import and Export Controlled Packages 8 6 7 Batch XMI Import You can import a group of controlled packages in one step using the Batch XMI Import facility To import a group of controlled packages follow the steps below 1 Select the Project Import Export Batch XMI Import menu option The Batch XMI Import dialog displays Check Packages to Include in Import Package Status Path E ClassLibrary2 Development Model Class Model Phase 2 Work Development Model Work 4 F Select All Y Check file date before import Save Settings a 2 Select the checkbox against each package to include in the import Select the Select All checkbox to select all packages in the list Tip To avoid re importing the same module multiple times select the Check file date before import checkbox Enterprise Architect then does not import a file if the last import file date matches that of the one currently on disk 3
50. Software Engineering Systems Engineering or Ultimate edition instance of Enterprise Architect Auditing Quickstart To quickly enable auditing and see it in action see Auditing Quickstart 19 Audit Settings Once auditing is enabled within a project you have a variety of options available for customizing what is recorded by the audit See Audit Settings 1981 for more information on the different settings available The Audit View To view what has been recorded by the audit use the Audit View 20h which provides an interface to everything recorded by auditing Note If security is enabled you must have Audit View 183 permission to display data in the Audit View You can also obtain a snapshot of selected items in the model using the Model View facility In the Corporate Business and Software Engineering Systems Engineering or Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect this facility enables you to automatically generate this snapshot at intervals and if there are changes in the items collected by the defined search to trigger a notification to you of such changes This enables you to monitor work flow 2161 and other events of concern to you RTF Report You can generate an RTF report that includes the audit history information for the selected element or package by choosing the basic audit RTF template Audit History Using Auditing you can track changes to an element or connector over time However enabling Auditing also en
51. Sparx Systems web site and finally you connect to the repository Full instructions on all three stages are provided below Set Up an ODBC Driver Setting up an ODBC driver is only necessary for MySQL PostgreSQL Progress OpenEdge and Adaptive Server Anywhere These database management systems require specific set up in order to operate as a repository Other database management systems connect through OLE DB and do not require a driver so this stage can be skipped 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 12 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository Note For Oracle the Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle is not appropriate You use the Oracle Provider for OLE DB 5 gt instead To find out how to set up an ODBC driver go to e Set Up a MySQL ODBC Driver 257 e Set Up a PostgreSQL ODBC Driver 27 e Set Up an Adaptive Server Anywhere ODBC Driver 30 e Set Up a Progress OpenEdge ODBC Driver 35 Create a Repository To find out how to download the scripts and create the data repository tables go to e Create a MySQL Data Repository 38 e Create an Access 2007 Repository 37 e Create a SQL Server Data Repository 40 e Create an Oracle Data Repository 43 e Create a PostgreSQL Data Repository 43 e Create an Adaptive Server Anywhere Data Repository 48 e Create an MSDE Server Data Repository 48 e Create a Progress OpenEdge Data Repository 48 Connect to a Repos
52. The right panel of the Compare Utility tab might for some fields display only part of the value such as Advanced Properties above It might also not be immediately obvious what a change is In either case you can double click on the property to display full details and to highlight the exact differences The following example shows the highlighted changes to Parent Package 14 4 1 Compare Utility Tab Options The Compare Utility tab enables you to perform operations on the reported information using the toolbar context menu and certain keyboard keys Note If a package under version control forms part of a Baseline and that package is checked in to the model you cannot merge the original data from the Baseline into that package Toolbar The toolbar is at the top of the left hand panel The icons operate either on the comparison as a whole or on the currently selected item in the left hand panel O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 214 Baselines Differencing and Merges Example Comparison A A MAH 2 The toolbar icon names and functions are from left to right eto SS Expand To Changed Expand the selected item to show changed items only in the event that you have Items selected to also show 21 unchanged items in the comparison Find in Project Highlight the item in the Project Browser Browser Log To XML Log the changes to an XML file A browser displays on which you specify the file name a
53. Traceability diagram using Realize Trace and similar relationships see the UML Connectors topic in the UML Dictionary You initially create a Traceability diagram as a Custom diagram see the UML Diagrams topic in the UML Dictionary but if you are creating the diagram manually you can use elements and relationships from other Toolbox pages to develop the diagram as broadly as is necessary UML Model Management Traceability Create Traceability Diagrams 223 Use Cases Logical Sof S trace Address TEXT q uo ne Pans atrace Create Account oo nope a ce atraces hess Delete User getEmailAddress String oo getName string boolean setEmailAddress String void setName String void SS E Ed Pe trace Close Account W7 oo View Open Orders oo extend 1 1 iew Account detailg oo You can also generate the diagram using the Add Related Elements context menu option to automatically bring in elements linked to the selected element see the Work With Elements section of UML Modeling With Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Too lt is probably better to add the elements in stages one level at a time but you could add several levels in one go to see how far the hierarchy extends and to identify relationship and element types to exclude from the clean diagram You could perform a similar operation one element at a time using the Relationships window se
54. Using Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool to establish what objects and code have been generated from each PSM element or what the initial PSM element was for a generated object Whether you use transformations or develop the stages of the model in other ways you can build up a range of Traceability diagrams 222 Custom diagrams to identify the development pathway and the dependencies between entities such as Requirements Use Cases Classes Packages Test Cases and other model artefacts or possibly between these entities and the overall business process model see Extending UML With Enterprise Architect Maintaining Traceability The following Project Browser hierarchy represents a model that is structured to enable traceability Notice firstly that themes are developed in the structure the Requirements Model Use Case Model and Abstract Implementation Model each contain units with the same functional names such as Manage Users and Manage Inventory These units help you to quickly develop a Traceability Model within your project to trace development and implementation 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 218 Traceability a Model B B Formal Requirements Model dP Requirements Model E OJ Functional Requirements dP Functional Requirements Manage Users G Manage Inventory C Automated Purchasing Services E Take Orders 5 Fulfill Orders G Non Functional Requirements Model Use Case Model 23 Use Case M
55. Validity This group checks whether or not an element relationship or feature has the correct UML properties defined for it and whether they contain incorrect or conflicting values For more information about these properties see the Custom Properties topic in UML Modeling with Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool CON MVR030001 Element Property property The element property contains no value is undefined MVRO30002 Element Property property The element property contains an invalid value has invalid value Value MVR030003 Element isLeaf true and The element s isLeaf and isAbstract properties are cannot be abstract both set to true which is invalid MVRO060001 Relationship Property The relationship property contains no value property is undefined Relationship Property MVRO60002 property has invalid value The relationship property contains an invalid value Value MVRO90001 Attribute AssociationEnd The given attribute has an associationEnd of the same mismatch Attribute name but they differ in the listed details Mismatch description 6 2 4 OCL Conformance This group validates an element relationship or attribute against any defined constraints in the Object Constraint Language OCL OCL is used to describe expressions on UML models and to express side effect free constraints You can add OCL constraints to any element relationship or attribute in Enterprise Archi
56. You can then select packages in the displayed list to be submitted for check in See Version Control Within UML Models Using Enterprise Architect For the selected package check out the package and recursively check out all of its contained sub packages 1641 Retrieves the latest version of the packages from the central repository overwriting the current packages After check out the packages are available for editing See Version Control Within UML Models Using Enterprise Architect Save package to file Ctrl Alt S Save a controlled package 114 to an XMI file Load package from file Ctrl Alt Load 114 a previously saved XMI file L View package XMI Ctrl Alt X rd the package XMI after the package has been exported to Compare with XMI file Compare with Controlled Version Add Branch to Version Control Export as Model Branch Import a Model Branch Get package for version control Get All Latest for version control Re synch Status With VC Provider Package not under version control Compare 2161 the current package with a previously saved XMI file of the package See Baseline UML Models Version controlled package Comparel2101 the current package with the head revision of the version controlled package file See Baseline UML Models Apply version control to all packages within a selected model branchl165 in a single operation See Version Control Within UML Models Using Enterprise Archi
57. are beyond the scope of this manual Consult your OpenEdge documentation for guidance Sparx Systems provide SQL scripts to create the required tables how you create the database and execute that script is up to you e Registered users can obtain the scripts from the Registered Corporate edition Resources page of the Sparx Systems website at http www sparxsystems com registered reg ea openedge instructions html e Trial users can obtain the scripts from the Corporate edition Resources page of the Sparx Systems website at http www sparxsystems com resources corporate Create the Data Repository 1 4 11 OpenEdge repositories are created without any data so you must perform a project data transfer 7 in Enterprise Architect to copy a suitable starter project If you are starting from scratch EABase EAPI 9 is a good starting point If you want to use an existing EAP model you can upsize 15 tit Run proenv from the OpenEdge menu Start gt Programs gt OpenEdge gt proenv Create database prodb lt database_name gt empty Start database server proserve lt database_name gt S lt port_number gt PON a Open Data Administration to add a user prowin32 db lt database_name gt S lt port_number gt p _admin rx Open Admin gt Security gt Edit User List Close Data Administration Open SQL Explorer Tool connect as sysprogress Add user create user user password commit OND 9 Grant privileges grant db
58. column headings to display 10 When you have identified the IDs to import click on a required ID or press Ctrl or Shift while you click to select several and click on the OK button The Select Users dialog redisplays with the selected ID or IDs listed in the Enter the object names to select field 11 Click on the OK button to redisplay the Import Users dialog with the selected users names listed in the Users panel 12 Click on the Import button to add the user IDs to the Security Users dialog Click on a user ID to populate the dialog fields with the user ID details and set group permissions 182 as required 12 5 Assign User To Groups To set up user groups follow the steps below 1 Select the Project Security Manage Users menu option The Security Users dialog displays 2 Click on the Group Membership button The User Groups dialog displays O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 180 User Security Assign User To Groups 3 Select the checkbox against each group this user belongs to ok J Cancel _ Hee 4 Click on the OK button to assign the user to each group Notes e To create new user groups see the Maintain Groups 182 topic e You can transport these user groups between models using the Export Reference Datal25 and Import Reference Datal2531 options on the Tools menu 12 6 Set Up Single Permissions You can set specific user permissions from the User P
59. field type your new password this must be 12 characters or less in length In the Retype new field type your new password again for confirmation Click on the OK button 6 A Password Changed message displays Click on the OK button to clear the message Your new password is effective next time you log in aron Administrator Change To set or change any user s password follow the steps below 1 Select the Project Security Manage Users menu option The Security Users dialog displays Administrator 7 Accept Windows Authentication mn a E Sumame Firstname Login Administrator The admin 2 Click on the user name in the Users panel to display the user details in the dialog fields 3 Click on the Change Password button The Change Password dialog displays O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 192 User Security Change Password Enter old password New passoni Retype new 4 Inthe New password field type the user s password this must be 12 characters or less in length Note You do not have to enter the user s current password as they might have forgotten it and therefore it is possible that nobody can provide that value In the Retype new field type the user s password again for confirmation 6 Click on the OK button 7 A Password Changed message displays Click on the OK button 12 15 Lock Model Elements Note When security is enabled you must have Lock Objects
60. guidelines that govern model validation change management access controls and general development principles Enterprise Architect enables you to create workflow scripts 1881 that provide a more robust approach to applying company policy and strengthening project development guidelines by validating against the policy and procedures within the model itself Project administrators can write scripts to manage the way users interact with a model such as managing security staff compliance and model access and monitoring changes made by users Administrators can also use workflow scripts to control a user s capacity to change a model element taking into account factors such as access rights group membership and even the value of a proposed change When a model is launched the Workflow Engine is initialized with the current user and group memberships This information determines who can access and modify parts of a given model When a selected event occurs the script engine is initialized with values including the author s name and access rights and the element name and version details The workflow script implements rules governing change management access control and model validation If a user attempts to make changes in violation of company policy the script denies the update The user is notified why the validation failed and the activity is logged These reminders help to reinforce company policy reduce human error and provide management with
61. is locked e TIN UML Model Management MOF 125 10 MOF Enterprise Architect offers support for exporting packages to XMI under the Meta Object Facility MOF 1 3 and 1 4 standards MOF models are created by assigning the stereotype metamodel to the package MOF models can be exported to MOF 1 3 or MOF 1 4 XMI file specification Background Knowledge MOF is an Object Management Group OMG standard that originated in the UML when the OMG required a Meta Modeling architecture to define the UML MOF is designed as a four layered architecture as illustrated in the following diagram 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 126 MOF dependent 0 ordered Depends On p X annotation String provider 0 name String qualfedName String findRequiredElements isFrozen isRequiredBecsusel isVisible findElementsB lookupElement namelsVahd resolveQualfedName isAbstract Boolean islesf Boolean Root Boolean visibility visibiityKind supertype 0 ordered sllSupertypes findElementsByTypeExtended lookupElementExtended Because of the similarities between the MOF model and UML structure models MOF meta models are usually modeled as UML Class diagrams see The UML Dictionary You can also use the Metamodel page of the Enterprise Architect UML Toolbox to create MOF model elements and connectors see Using Enterprise Architect UML Mode
62. last name If required also provide the user s department name To set the user s password click on the Change Password button The Change Password dialog displays In the New password field type the user s password This must be 12 characters or less in length In the Retype new field type the user s password again for confirmation Click on the OK button A Password Changed message displays Click on the OK button When you have entered the details for the user click on the Save button Either click on the New button to add another user or the Close button to exit the Security Users dialog UML Model Management User Security Maintain Users 177 Notes e You can transport the user definitions between models using the Export Reference Data 25h and Import Reference Data 2531 options on the Tools menu e f you select the Accept Windows Authentication checkbox when a user opens the model Enterprise Architect checks the users database for their Windows ID and if it matches automatically logs the user in without prompting for a password e The Accept Windows Authentication checkbox enables the Import button which you can select to import user IDs from a Windows Active Directory e Asa security measure the Accept Windows Authentication checkbox is automatically deselected if the project eap file is moved to a different location Once the file has been relocated you can select the checkbox again t
63. marked for control it is displayed in the Project Browser with a red rectangle to the left of the package icon If you have previously saved a controlled package you can reload it using the Load package from file UML Model Management XMI Import and Export Controlled Packages 115 menu option To load a controlled package follow the steps below 1 Inthe Project Browser window right click on the package to load The context menu displays 2 Select the Package Control Load package from file menu option 3 If you have configured the package control details Enterprise Architect prompts you to confirm the import Warning Importing deletes the current package entirely from the model and the action cannot be undone You must be careful not to lose any current changes or information 4 Click on the Yes button to confirm the import The current package is deleted and the saved package is imported 8 6 6 Batch XMI Export You can export a group of controlled packages in one step using the Batch XMI Export facility To export a group of controlled packages follow the steps below 1 Select the Project Import Export Batch XMI Export menu option The Batch XMI Export dialog displays Check Packages to Include in Export Package Path F ClassLibrary2 Development ModelClass Model Phase 2 Work Development Model Work 2 Select the checkbox against each package to include in this export run
64. model changes including delete for elements packages and relationships Use Version Control Check files in and out 162 using version control UML Model Management User Security View and Manage Locks 185 12 11 View and Manage Locks From time to time it might be necessary to examine or delete locks placed on elements by users Enterprise Architect provides a function to view and manage active locks Notes e You must have Security Manage Locks 183 permission to view and delete user locks the initial Admin administrator automatically has this permission e If an element is locked connectors attached to it are also locked To unlock the connector you must unlock the element However under certain circumstances you can add new connectors to a locked element 193 Delete a Lock To view locks and if necessary delete them follow the steps below 1 Select the Project Security Manage Locks menu option The Active Locks dialog displays 2 Inthe View Locks For panel click on the radio button for the type of lock to view All Groups Only or Users Only Locks of the appropriate type are listed in the Active Locks panel If you want to display the resulting information in a more readable layout you can resize the dialog and its columns 3 To remove a lock click on it and click on the Unlock Selected button 4 When finished click on the Close button to close the dialog
65. not being used or is not available You can edit the package This package is version controlled and checked out 1621to you therefore you can edit the package Aca This package is version controlled and not checked out to you therefore you cannot edit the package unless you check the package out 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 132 Version Control This package is version controlled but you checked it out whilst not connected to the version control 169 server You can edit the package but there could be version conflicts when you check the package in again For example below CVSOO and CVSPackage are configured for version control CVSOO is checked out to you and CVSPackage is not 4 cv500 al C SPackage t See Also e Version Control Basics 13 e Apply Version Control To Models 13 e Version Control and Team Deployment 1337 e Version Control Menul134 e Version Control Setupl134 e Use Version Control 157 e Offline Version Control 16 11 1 Version Control Basics The Lock Modify Unlock Solution Many version control systems use a lock modify unlock model to address the problem of different authors in a shared source overwriting each other s work In this model the version control repository allows only one person to change a file at a time and access is managed using locks Harry must lock a file before he can begin making changes to it If Harry has locked a file Sally canno
66. of Enterprise Architect from release 6 0 onwards you can check out and edit a version controlled package even when your machine is disconnected from the version control server In the example below the colored figure 8 icon 132 for DFD indicates that you have checked it out whilst offline the gray figure 8 icon shown against Logical View indicates that you have checked out a version controlled package online MindMapping 3 88 DFD HE Logical View Important You should be aware that the version control system and therefore other users have no way of knowing that you have checked out a package whilst offline It is not possible to merge changes to an XMI file that result from two users editing the same package at the same time If an offline checkout leads to two people editing the same package at the same time when the changes are brought back online the first saved set of changes is lost Check in a Package That Was Checked Out Offline Once you reconnect your machine to the version control server if the package you checked out offline is not currently checked out by another user you can check in that package However before Enterprise Architect checks in such a package it compares the local working copy of the package file with the latest revision in the repository These package files remain unchanged in your work area until Enterprise Architect exports the package again before checking in If the repository vers
67. of the DBMS server e The Database Name on the selected server e The User ID See the example below UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 37 General Advanced Security About Data Source Name openedge_ea Description Host Name dbserver02 Port Number 20932 Database Name eal User ID oe_usel Gomas Gan 6 Click on the Test Connect button to confirm that the details are correct 7 If the test succeeds click on the OK button to complete the configuration 8 If the test does not succeed review your settings Your OpenEdge connection is now available to use in Enterprise Architect 1 4 10 Create a Repository This topic details how to create the following data repositories e Access 2007 374 e MySQL 387 e SQL Server 407 e Oracle 9i 10g or 11gl 437 e PostgreSQL 434 e Adaptive Server Anywhere ASA 46 e MSDE Server 487 1 4 10 1 Access 2007 Note This feature is available in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions Using Access 2007 open a EAP file and allow Access to convert it to a ACCDB file This forms the Access O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 38 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 2007 repository 1 4 10 2 MySQL Repository Note This feature is available in the Corporate Business
68. of the tree 3 Delete the directory tempDir and all its contents For further information see http www svnbook red bean com en 1 4 svn reposadmin basics html 11 5 4 3 Create a Local Working Copy Once you have created a sub tree in the repository for this model or if one already exists you are ready to create the local Working Copy for use with this model Follow the steps below 1 Choose a suitable directory on your system in which to create your Subversion Working Copy The directory that contains your model s EAP file is probably a good choice 2 Open a command line window navigate to the directory to hold your Working Copy directory and check out the model s sub tree from the repository with the following command svn checkout lt repositoryURL gt lt EA_Model_Name gt where lt EA_Model_Name gt is the directory name that you used in setting up the repository sub tree above After you have created your working copy you should verify everything is working correctly before you attempt to use it from within Enterprise Architect You must be able to commit files to the repository without being prompted for ID or passwords Enterprise Architect interacts with Subversion using its command line client Firstly create a file in your working copy folder then from a command prompt add and commit the file to the repository Use the following commands svn add lt fileName gt svn commit lt fileName gt m A meaningful com
69. on the Cardinality Values tab Stereotypes Tagged Value Types Cardinaity Values Cardinality Save Delete To add a new cardinality value click on the New button To modify an existing value click on it in the Cardinality list In the Cardinality field type the required cardinality value Click on the Save button Note You can transport these cardinality values between models using the Export Reference Data 25 and Import Reference Datal253 options on the Tools menu 17 6 Data Types Different programming languages support different inbuilt data types The Programming Languages Datatypes dialog enables you to extend and manage the set of inbuilt data types associated with a language as well as create new programming languages for use within Enterprise Architect Notes In the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect if security is enabled you must have Configure Datatypes 183i permission to update and delete data types See User Security in UML Models You can delete data types that you have defined but you cannot delete any of the predefined data types To access this dialog select the Settings Code Datatypes menu option 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 250 Reference Data Data Types Product Name Java y Add Product Datatype Size None Default Max C
70. packages That type of XMI package file contains stubs for the child packages not full information on the child packages and elements e XML files must be in the same format used by the Baseline engine currently the UML 1 3 XMI 1 1 format plus Enterprise Architect extensions which contains all the information necessary to reconstruct a UML model even a UML 2 x model 14 1 1 Manage Baselines Enterprise Architect provides a range of facilities for working with and managing Baselines through the Manage Baselines dialog To open this dialog right click on the package at the head of the appropriate model branch and select the Package Control Manage Baselines context menu option UML Model Management Baselines Differencing and Merges Baselines 209 Current Baselines For Package Class Model Versi Notes p 3 Class Model Baseline time 29 01 2008 3 10 43 PM Restore to Baseline Class Model 0 2 Baseline time 7 11 2007 2 32 59 PM Class Model 0 1 Baseline time 7 11 2007 2 26 28 PM New Baseline Delete Selected Load Other Baselines w Import File Export File Compare Model to File Connected To Project eap Current Baselines Review the baselines for the current model branch listed by version reference 210 with For Package the highest alphabetical numerical value at the top N A TERNER If an ent
71. process can be an internal model management process where you monitor work by asking questions such as what work has been done to realize this Requirement or Use Case or a business or system process that is being modeled where you ask questions such as what Requirements Use Cases Classes Components Test Cases and other elements define the implementation and deployment of this process Audit UML Models Auditing h9 is a project level feature available in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions that enables you to record model changes in Enterprise Architect By enabling this option model administrators can view a range of information regarding changes such as e Who changed an element e How many elements they changed e When they changed the data e Whatthe previous values were and e What type of elements they changed Auditing is documented in Auditing UML Models Baselines and Differences The Enterprise Architect Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions provide a facility to Baseline 2087 or snapshot a model branch in XMI format at a particular point in O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd time and store it within the model in compressed format More than one baseline can be stored against a single Enterprise Architect package Using Baselines you can compare packages at the current and earlier stages of developm
72. short description of the requirement type e Inthe Weight field type the weighting to apply to the requirement type e Inthe Note field type any additional information on the requirement type e Click on the Save button The requirement type displays in the Defined Requirement Types list Note You can transport these requirement types between models using the Export Reference Datal254 and Import Reference Data 253 options on the Tools menu 17 2 5 Scenario Types A drop down list of scenario types is available in the Scenario tab of an element Properties dialog see the Working with Elements section of UML Modeling With Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool with the standard types Basic Path Exception and Alternate Flow You can set additional scenario types using the Scenario tab the General Types dialog To access this dialog select the Settings General Types menu option Click on the Scenario tab UML Model Management Reference Data General Types 241 Status Constraint Constraint Status Requirement Scenario Type Description New Defined Scenario Types Scenario Type Description Altemate Altemate pathway Basic Path Basic execution path Exception Path if Basic Path fails To add a new scenario type click on the New button and e Inthe Scenario Type field type the name of the scenario type e Inthe Description field type a short descrip
73. that is controlling the selected package To export a model branch follow the steps below 1 Right click on the version controlled package to export as a model branch 2 Select the Package Control Export as Model Branch context menu option The Export as Model Branch dialog displays Version Control SVN_config SVN C VC Workspaces Subversion RoysTesting EAB Filename SVN_config Development Model EAB 3 In the EAB Filename field type a name for your Model Branch File Alternatively click on and browse for the file location Note that the package name is supplied as a default You can specify any file name including sub folder names as long as the file is contained in or below the working folder of your version control configuration Import Controlled Model Branch It might be necessary to either e Retrieve a model branch created by another user in a private copy of a model to import it into your own private copy of the same model or e Retrieve a model branch that is common in many models for inclusion in a new model Applying version control to an Enterprise Architect model can result in many XMI files placed under version control It could then be hard to locate and import the file corresponding to the root of a particular model branch Enterprise Architect s Model Branch files overcome this problem by simplifying the retrieval of model hierarchies for use in other models The Import a Mod
74. the next person in line and the overseeing manager are notified UML Model Management Traceability 217 16 Traceability Traceability identifies the way a given process has been or is to be developed in a system The process can be an internal model management process where you monitor work by asking questions such as what work has been done to realize this Requirement or Use Case or a business or system process that is being modeled where you ask questions such as what Requirements Use Cases Classes Components Test Cases and other elements define the implementation and deployment of this process Traceability also helps to clarify the aspects of a process that the model does not address A process typically includes a range of manual automated and external procedures A correctly structured model illustrates exactly what requirements and functionality service a particular process any missing functionality must come from other systems developments or procedures There are various tools in Enterprise Architect that enable you to trace the definition and implementation of a process from initial requirement to generated code or technical deployment or vice versa If you have performed any Transformations in developing your model and code see the MDA Transformations User Guide Enterprise Architect automatically creates Transformation Dependency connectors that you can trace with the Traceability window see
75. two critical non default settings required see Set up a MySQL ODBC Driver 257 and ensure you select the checkboxes in step 7 Stage Two Select Table Type 1 If you are using InnoDB tables set up the MySQL ini file as required and run the MySQL InnoDB BaseModel script 2 If you are using MyISAM tables set up the MySQL ini file as required and run the MySQL MyISAM BaseModel script Note If MyISAM table types are used default transactional support is disabled To enable transactions you must set up MySQL to use InnoDB tables and create the database tables as InnoDB type Sparx provide a suitable script to create InnoDB based repository tables as well as the more common MyISAM These are available to registered users on the Corporate edition Resources page of the Sparx website at www sparxsystems com registered reg ea corp ed html Stage Three Create the Database 1 Create an empty database Note See Create a New MySQL Repository 387 You now have an empty database and can transfer an existing model into the server as described below Stage Four Transfer the Data 1 Open Enterprise Architect click on the Cancel button on the Open Project screen to open with no project loaded Select the Tools Data Management Project Transfer menu option The Project Transfer dialog displays O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 24 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository
76. warning displays UML Model Management Model Maintenance Manage Views 89 O Do you wish to delete Use Case View Warning Any child elements will be removed as well 3 To delete the view and its contents click on the Yes button To cancel the deletion click on the No button O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 90 Model Validation 6 Model Validation You use Model Validation to check UML models against known UML rules 925 which you identify in configuring validation 9 as well as any constraints defined within the model using the Object Constraint Language OCL You can run Model Validation against a single UML element a diagram or an entire package Validating a UML e Element validates the element and its children features attributes and operations and relationships connectors e Diagram validates the diagram itself for correctness as well as any elements and connectors within the diagram e Package validates the package and all subpackages elements connectors and diagrams within it To use Model Validation follow the steps below 1 Select the package diagram or element either from the Project Browser or within an open diagram 2 Select the Project Model Validation Validate Selected menu option or press Ctrl Alt V Enterprise Architect performs the validation and displays the results in the Output window see Using Enterprise Architect UML Modeli
77. with no project loaded 2 Select the Tools Data Management Project Transfer menu option The Project Transfer dialog displays Transfer Type O EAP to EAP C DBMS to EAP C EAP to DBMS C DBMS to DBMS Source and Target Projects Source Project us Target Project m Logfile eg 3 Caution The Target Project will be erased prior to transfer Please ensure you have backed up target if necessary Transfer ose Hep Progress 3 Inthe Transfer Type panel select EAP to DBMS 4 Inthe Source Project field type or select the name of the EAP file to upsize to PostgreSQL 5 At the right of the Target Project field click on the Browse button The Datalink Properties dialog displays 6 Select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers from the list then click on the Next button 7 Inthe Use data source name field click on the drop down arrow and select the ODBC Data Source you configured to point to your new database UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 19 Note See Connect to a PostgreSQL Data Repository 627 for more information 8 Click on the OK button 9 If required select the Logfile checkbox and type a path and filename for the data transfer log file 10 Click on the Transfer button to begin the data transfer process Note If an error message displays reporting nonsta
78. would list all the requirements you could rapidly click on each element and immediately see in the Project Browser where it has been grouped and at the same time in the Traceability window how that element interacts with other elements in the model You can select any or all of the relationship types available in the Traceability window toolbox The single type selected below is Realizes Implements and the selected element is the Delete User Use Case The Traceability window then shows that Delete User implements REQO17 but this is also partially realized by the Close Account Use Case Traceability x z Y AP ue v PA ae R O 39 implements REQO17 Remove User 4 realized by D Close Account By moving the cursor around a diagram or the Project Browser and or changing the relationship type combinations in the Traceability window you can quickly see how elements are connected and how they influence each other For example you can see that REQO17 is realized by two Use Cases so you might then explore what else influences and is influenced by these two Use Cases The Traceability window takes you well beyond what is likely to be depicted on any single diagram If you have used transformations to develop your model the T icon displays the transformation dependencies that exist between an element in a PIM and elements in the PSMs Relationships Matrix Using the Relationships Matrix see UML Modeling With Enterpr
79. you create replicas that can be modified independently of the master project and re merged later Create a Design Master To create a design master follow the steps below 1 Take a back up of the required Enterprise Architect project 2 Select the project in the Project Browser 3 Select the Tools Manage EAP File Make Design Master menu option and follow the on screen instructions 7 4 2 Create Replicas Note In the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect if security is enabled you must have Manage Replicas 183 permission to create a replica See User Security in UML Models To create a replica follow the steps below 1 First create a design master toh then select the Tools Manage EAP File Create New Replica menu option and follow the on screen instructions 2 This process creates a replica of the current project which can then be modified independently and afterwards re merged with the main project O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 102 Model Sharing and Team Deployment Replication 7 4 3 Synchronize Replicas To copy changes from one member of the replica set to another use the Synchronize Replicas menu option Note that information is copied both ways including deletes updates and inserts Note In the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect
80. 1 MySQL Transactional and Locking Style varchar 255 nF E Classifier varchar 50 Database Administration Statements Default text Replication Statements Type varchar 255 SQL Syntax for Prepared Statements ea_guid varchar 40 not null StyleEx text primary key ID uniaoue ID 1D 3 Below is an example showing the tables created in the MySQL repository after running the script in MySQL Query Browser 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 40 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository Administrator Connection rootOlocalhost 3306 File Edit View Tools Window Help af Server Information on Schema Tables Schema Indices Views Stored procedures T Service Control x ea D Startup Variables All tables of the ea schema Aa User Administration g Server Connections Table Name Engine Rows Datalength Index length Update time i T t attribute InnoDB 16 kB 64 kB W3 Health w t_attributeconstraints InnoDB 16 kB 0B E T t attributetag InnoDB 16 kB 16 kB T t authors InnoDB 16 kB 08 m t_cardinality InnoDB 16 kB 0B m t_category InnoDB 16 kB OB InnoDB 16 kB 0B t_complexitytypes InnoDB 16 kB 16 kB t_connector InnoDB 16 kB 112 kB t_connectorconstraint InnoDB 16 kB 32 kB BEBEBEE Schemata t_connectortag InnoDB 16 kB 16 kB 4 t_connectortypes In
81. 1 6 9 4 Click on the OK button Enterprise Architect creates a number of sub folders within the version control working copy folder before exporting all of the packages within the selected model branch Enterprise Architect generates package filenames using the package GUIDs before adding the resulting files to version control If you have selected the Export as Model Branch checkbox once the version control operation is complete Enterprise Architect also creates a Model Branch file EAB file You can subsequently import the version controlled Model Branch 166 Export Controlled Model Branch You might want to export a newly created model branch from your own private copy of a model so that for example e Another user can import that branch into their own private copy of the same model or e It can be imported for inclusion as a common branch in a number of different models Applying version control to an Enterprise Architect model can result in many XMI files placed under version control It could then be hard to locate and import the file corresponding to the root of a particular model branch Enterprise Architect s Model Branch Files EAB files overcome this problem by simplifying the retrieval of model hierarchies for use in other models The facility is only enabled for packages that are already under version control The exported Model Branch File is also placed under version control using the same version control configuration
82. 1 FROM sysobjects WHERE name t_connector DROP TABLE t_connector The following example shows the tables created in the ASA repository after running the script in EMS ASA Manager 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 48 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository E Seer A Sybase Central File Edit View Tools Connections Mode Help e opa 8 8 P B ARA oo Context o Sybase Central SQL Anywhere Ll ea ea DBA Tables Broo gt x k 9 1 amp 1 mt TE tables Tables Tasks x gt Table Design Tasks Name Owner Type Comment E DBA Table o t_attributeconstraints DBA Table E t_attributetag DBA Table t_authors DBA Table E t cardinality DBA Table El tcategory DBA Table El tclients DBA Table E t_complexitytypes DBA Table o t_connector DBA Table o t_connectorconstraint DBA Table o t_connectortag DBA Table o t_connectortypes DBA Table El tconstants DBA Table a t_constrainttypes DBA Table o t_datatypes DBA Table A Create a table pas Create a global temporary table jas Create a proxy table gt Other Databases a Connect to another database gt Other Tasks O Work with database ea A Help on tables 2 Help on SQL Anywhere YA Home 1 4 10 7 MSDE Server Repository Note This feature is available in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editio
83. 10 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 44 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository One such tool is pgAdminl which is available at http www pgadmin org download It provides a convenient graphical user interface to enable creation of databases execution of scripts and restores To get started with pgAdminlll follow the steps below 1 Create a new database Es A _ ES File Edit Plugins View Tools Help A E Properti Refresh New Database 2 Open and execute the PostgreSQL SQL script UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 45 my File Edit Query Favourites Macros View Help CEL ILLAR E Database basemodel Date 5 3 2003 Reserved Words Default Constraint User SEQUENCE SEQUENCE propertyid seq SEQUENCE categoryid seg SEQUENCE connector_id seg SEQUENCE datatypeid seg SEQUENCE diagram_id seg SEQUENCE instance_id seg SEQUENCE glossaryid seg SEQUENCE imageid seg SEQUENCE issueid seg SEQUENCE object_id seg SEQUENCE reqid_seq SEQUENCE operationid_seq SEQUENCE package_id seq SEQUENCE paletteid_seq SEQUENCE scriptid_seq SEQUENCE taskid_ seg SEQUENCE trx_id seg SEQUENCE patternid seg 3 Below is an example showing the tables created in the PostgreSQL repository after running the script in pgAdminl 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd
84. 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 170 Version Control Offline Version Control that Enterprise Architect cannot connect to your version control system For example if you are working on a laptop computer that is disconnected from your network and you have an Enterprise Architect model that uses a large number of Version Control Configurations choosing to work offline before you load the model enables you to avoid all the error messages that Enterprise Architect would normally display as each version control connection attempt fails You can switch between working offline and working online at any time either before or after a model is loaded Toggle the Project Version Control Work Offline menu option Enterprise Architect disconnects or reconnects version control depending on connection availability according to your selection Use Version Control Whilst Disconnected From Your Version Control Server Enterprise Architect remembers the status of a model s version controlled packages Packages that were checked out 162i to you prior to disconnecting from the server are still shown as checked out to you even though you are no longer connected to the server You can still edit these packages as you normally would Packages that were not checked out to you prior to disconnecting from the server are shown as version controlled and locked You cannot edit these packages until you check them out Offline Check Out In releases
85. 201 e Issue e Change e Core Structural select this radio button to audit maintenance elements plus some structural elements that is e Package e Class e Interface e Signal e Node e Component e Artifact e Part e Port e Device e All select this radio button to audit all elements e Custom select this radio button to audit element types that you specify If you select the Custom option the Customize button is made available Click on this button to display a list of element types and select the checkbox against each element type to include in the audit or click on the Select All button to select every element type Click on the OK button to save the selection Note Connectors are audited when they are connected to an element that is included in the Audit Options 13 3 The Audit View The Audit View provides an interface to the information that has been recorded by auditing Open the Audit View by clicking on the e View Other Project Tools Audit View menu option The Audit View is divided into three main areas e View controls e Audit tree e Record display The data in the Audit tree and Record display is determined by the view controls and mode 204 and if synchronizing 205 with the Project Browser by the package diagram or element you have selected View Controls The view controls provide a variety of settings for controlling auditing and the display of audit records Filter Set
86. 226 POOP le icons ici 227 Rroject Authorsie k a i 227 Projecti Role S ON RT AT ON 230 Project RESOUICOS aseo uecudutes E a a E a NEAN E E 232 Project ClientS oonoonnccnnnicnnncnnnnnccnncnncnnncnnrn corn cnn rre 233 A A eens aS 235 DATS PI A dd Bebe Eat COLO odo dat le ONO attests 235 Constraint Types Sci 237 Constraint Status TYP S ccceeeseceesececeeeeeeneeeeeceeeeaeeeesaeeeaeseecaeseaeseesaeesseseeeseeeeaeeeeseeeaeseeeeeeseaeeneeeates 238 REGQUIFEMENE TY DOS iii dani 239 SCOMANIO O AT 240 Maintenance a pr e raia aae raa aaa Aaa a araa araa a ae SoSe a area eea Ea a pai Aara adaa iana de aaaea paa aap aniani aias 242 Problem TyP S ssscscstensecersecessrtensessceeeosenseesescepensensasquconeucassasaesenteneonsensausoccasaseneasenstasecessnestonseneonen 242 TOSUNG Ty POS ozs aa 243 Metrics and Estimation we 244 UMTS ee ae a tached Us 245 Stereotype Settings ee eeeescesecesecseeceeeeseeeneceeeaeeaeeaeesaesnecseceaesseeeseesaeeeeeaeseaeeseesaeeeaeeaeeaeseneeneeeaees 245 shape Edit nea eek aii tate ea ae ae a ene add 246 Tagged Valls TYPOS catar dineiats sie chdvosstash ieebtnsdettigeehvacesentevantteetedeatedaaetianiins 247 Cardinality 248 A O eddsainay E E 249 Import and Export Reference Data ccccssseesseessseeesneessessseeeseneeseneeseeessnesesuesssnesesnesseneessnesseneeseeeseneees 250 Export Reference D ts rs toriese a ta aa eaa sad eusnnpfeedesbibecnsetas cbhi encatsosdetaeagine site 251 Impor
87. 3 Refresh model view Refresh the model view to show any changes from other checked out packages Always apply above Apply the settings in the above three fields every time you check out a package settings that is found to be up to date and therefore do not display this dialog again Note To display the dialog if for example you want to change the settings press Ctrl while you select the Package Control Check Out menu option The package icon in the Project Browser should change When you check out a package this is represented by a figure 8 to the left of the package icon When you check in a package the package icon is overlaid with a colored rectangle and key In the example below the upper package is checked out whilst the lower package is checked in 4 cysoo E da CVSPackage Notes e If you check out a version controlled package whilst offline the package icon has a red figure 8 in front of it See Offline Version Control 165 e If the packages under version control contain any alternative images and those images are subject to frequent change you can set the Export alternate images option on the Options dialogto export the images to the version control repository when you check in the packages If the images are not subject to frequent change do not select this option and instead use Export Import Reference Datal2501 to manage alternative images Check In Branch 1 Inthe Project Browser rig
88. 3 whereas XMI 2 1 has support for UML 2 0 and UML 2 1 With XMI model details can be exchanged between different UML tools and other tools that are capable of using XMI Limited support for export to Rational Rose is provided using the Rose version of the XMI 1 1 specification as implemented by Unisys for Rational products Packages can be exported from and imported into Enterprise Architect models This greatly improves the flexibility and robustness of Enterprise Architect models by enabling Analysts and Modelers to externalize model elements in XMI for version control distributed development post processing and transferring packages between models When performing Enterprise Architect to Enterprise Architect transfers ensure that the XMI version selected is 1 1 or 2 1 XMI Tasks Tasks you might perform in importing and exporting XMI include e Setting XML Options XMI import export and package control all rely on saving and loading XML files you can set a number of options to streamline this process see the Defaults and User Settings topic in Using Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool e Exporting a package 103 to XMI in XMI 2 1 and earlier e Importing from XMI 1061 with support for XMI 2 1 and earlier e Setting up controlled packages 11h1 e Manually controlling a packagel1161 by linking it to an XMI file e Batch exporting 113 controlled packages e Batch importing los controlled packages e Factoring in the limitati
89. 55 Model Settings User Name Password Workstation Settings TFS Exe Path Defined Configurations Scc 7 This model is private for Shared models it is best to disable this check box Save nested version controlled packages to stubs only recommended TFS config F CVS Subversion 0 TFS C VC Workspaces TFS WorkFolder 1 SparxSystemsluserOne les Microsoft Visual Studio 8 Common7 IDE tf exe ne Unique ID Type Fies Location 4 Click on the Select Path button to the right of the Working Copy path field and select the local folder in which to keep local working copies of the XML files to be stored in the Version Control repository Note Enterprise Architect queries TFS to retrieve the Server and Workspace names associated with this folder when attempting to save the configuration data 5 Inthe User Name and Password fields type values that enable access to the TFS workspace associated with the Working Copy path specified above 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 156 Version Control Version Control Setup Note Users who automatically log in to TFS through means external to Enterprise Architect for example through MS Integrated Security can leave the User Name and Password fields blank If the Password field is blank Enterprise Architect retrieves the current user s Windows username and uses that value when determining wh
90. Base Project To copy an existing Base Project from the Start Page select the Copy a Base Project option see Using Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool The Create New Enterprise Architect Project dialog displays To create a new project first select a model project EABase eap by default then enter the name and directory of the new project that will be created in the space provided New Project Model Project C Program Files Span Systems EA EABase eap V Reset New Project GUIDs To create a new Enterprise Architect project you must select a project template to form the base model for the new project When you install Enterprise Architect a default model is installed called EABase eap e To select the file path for saving your project click on the Browse button after the New Project field If this is to be a shared project store the file on a shared network resource such as a Network Server or Workgroup Server e To replace all GUIDs in the source model with fresh GUIDs select the Reset New Projects GUIDs checkbox Note If the new project is based on one that is already under version control it is recommended that the Reset New Projects GUIDs checkbox be deselected This prevents duplication of packages when the Get Latest facility is used e To select the base model for your project 9 click on the Browse button after the Model Project field The field defaults to EABase eap however you can select a
91. Connection button as it can cause an error with encrypted passwords e For SQL Server repositories you must enter the Initial Catalog details from the All tab of the Data Link Properties dialog UML Model Management User Security Password Encryption 187 Provider Connection Advanced Al These are the initialization properties for this type of data To edit a value select a property then choose Edit Value below Name Value Connect Timeout Data Source Extended Properties General Timeout Locale Identifier 3081 Location Mode Password Persist Security Info User ID 12 13 Workflow Scripts Introduction Good corporate governance relies on well written and transparent project development guidelines and company policy A project might be compromised if the appropriate policies and procedures are poorly understood and not followed correctly effective governance can be hampered by human error and the costs of recovering from the inadequate compliance of developers Company policy and procedures can be integrated with the development process to manage work flows determine access rights extend role based security permissions and respond to property change events This approach reduces compliance costs enhances collaborative development and gives you confidence that projects are being developed correctly the first time around Development teams can adhere to best practice
92. Descripti ltem is approved Finished Required item has been proposed Approved and Checked 17 2 1 Status Types You can configure a basic list of status types used in Enterprise Architect Note that whilst most dialogs use this list not all do so To configure status types select the Settings General Types menu option The General Types dialog displays at the Status tab O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 236 Reference Data General Types Status Constraint Constraint Status Requirement Scenario Status Description Status Type Color Preview caza Type Description Approved ltem is approved Implemented Finished Mandatory Required Proposed ltem has been proposed Validated Approved and Checked Create New Status Type When you display the Status tab the fields default to the definition of the first type in the Type list To adda new type click on the New button and e Inthe Status field type the name of the status e Inthe Description field type a short description of the status e Click on the Save button The status type displays in the Type list Add the status definition as described in the following sections Note You can transport the status types and the colors assigned to status types between models using the Export Reference Data 251 and Import Reference Datal253 options on the Tools menu Status Type Color
93. Display the Compare Options 21 dialog Select Items to Merge _ Y Changed Cancel v In Baseline Only Y In Model Only V Moved Full Restore from XMI Select the appropriate checkbox against each type of difference to roll back in the model from the Baseline Changed Restore all changed items in the model branch to the Baseline state In Baseline Only Restore all deleted items to the model branch from the Baseline In Model Only Remove all recently created items from the model branch Moved Restore all moved items to their original locations as identified in the Baseline Full Restore from Completely restore the model branch to the version held in the Baseline XMI 1 1 XMI file using the XMI Import function Automatically selects all the other options Keyboard You can also use the following keyboard keys to move up and down the hierarchy or to roll back changes e Ctri expand and highlight the next changed item e Ctri expand and highlight the previous changed item e Ctrli undo the changes for a selected item roll back to the Baseline values O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 216 Monitor Events 15 Monitor Events In the Enterprise Architect Corporate Business and Software Engineering Systems Engineering and Ultimate editions the Model Views facility enables you to e automatically refresh the search in a View at an interval that you define
94. Enterprise Architect select the File Open Project menu option The Open Project dialog displays Enterprise Project to Open Connect to Server E Architect C Program Files Sparx Systems EA EAExample eap Cua Version 8 0 j New a Open Cancel Help 6 Recent Projects X Remove Selection from List Project Name Path l Project YADev Roy Project eap 2 Select the Connect to Server checkbox 3 Click on the Browse button as you normally would to browse for a project As you have selected the Connect to Server checkbox the Data Link Properties dialog displays instead of the Browse Directories dialog Provider Connection Advanced Al Select the data you want to connect to OLE DB Provider s MediaCatalogDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogMergedDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogWebDB OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Outlook Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider MSDataShape OLE DB Provider for Microsoft Directory Services 4 Select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers from the list 5 Click on the Next button The Connection tab displays UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up
95. Entry set to True or False to indicate whether a log item should be recorded Reason indicate what reason should be recorded in the log Action indicate how to display the log message valid values are MessageBox StatusBar Output default 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 190 User Security Workflow Scripts Introduction WorkflowSearches Provides an array of searches Use Redim WorkflowSearches x to specify the number of searches being provided Each search has the following attributes e Name the name of this search e Group the name of the group that this search should appear under in the Search combo box e ID the unique GUID for this search e Tasks the array of tasks that this search looks for an entry describes how to find all objects required to meet a particular task e Name the name of the task as displayed in the Search view workflow searches are grouped by this field by default e Conditions an array of conditions all of which must be matched for an object to be included in this task a condition is a comparison of a single field to a value e Column the name of the field e Operator operator types either provide matching values only or lt gt provide non matching values only e Value if this contains a comma the string is treated as a comma separated list of values to compare against otherwise the string is a single value to compare against Functions Enterpris
96. It provides control over who in a project can make changes to model elements User Security is documented in User Security in UML Models Further Information For more information regarding the use of Enterprise Architect with shared models and team deployment please see the Deployment of Enterprise Architect white paper available from www sparxsystems com downloads whitepapers EA Deployment pdf Note DBMS Repository support and User Security are available with the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect UML Model Management Model Sharing and Team Deployment Share Enterprise Architect Projects 99 7 1 Share Enterprise Architect Projects Note Project Sharing and Replication are only enabled in the Professional Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect Sharing a project among a team of designers developers and analysts is the most efficient way of using Enterprise Architect to manage a team development Many people can work on the model at the same time and contribute their particular skill Team members can always see what the latest changes are keeping the team informed and up to date with the project status You can share an Enterprise Architect project in three ways 1 Using a shared network directory 99 In this scenario you place the project file on a shared net
97. L models under a single root These models can have cross references between them However RSA cannot save the entire root as one file it saves each UML model as a separate EMX file This means that an EMX file with cross references is not self contained as it references elements in another EMX file In releases earlier than release 7 0 Enterprise Architect treats each EMX file as a separate model and hence does not allow for cross references between them From release 7 0 Enterprise Architect enables these cross references You therefore have the option of importing a single EMX UML2 file or a group of EMX UML2 files This option enables you to select a group of related files and import them together thereby retaining the cross references between the different files To import single or multiple emx uml2 files into Enterprise Architect follow the steps below 1 Inthe Project Browser window select the package into which to import the file 2 Either e Right click and select the Import Export Import Package from XMI context menu option or e Select the Project Import Export Import Package from XMI menu option The Import Package from XMI dialog displays Root p Requirements Model Filename C Requirements Req020509 m Options 4 Import Diagrams E Strip GUID s Y Write Log file wl Import using single transaction Not recommended for large imports Treat Imported Datatypes Import EMX UML2
98. Maintenance 847 Manage Views 85 XMI Import and Exporth10 Team Development 984 Spell Checking see Using Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool Reference Data 2261 The WAN Optimizer 7A 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 6 Enterprise Architect Project Files 1 Enterprise Architect Project Files _ a Ha An Enterprise Architect project 7 is stored in a data repository In Enterprise Architect Desktop and Professional editions you work with a single file having a EAP extension In Enterprise Architect Corporate Business and Software Engineering Systems Engineering and Ultimate editions you can use a suitable DBMS database for project files Project Files EAP Files In Enterprise Architect Desktop and Professional editions a single file with a EAP extension is used to store projects A EAP file is a Microsoft JET database so you can also open it using MS Access 97 2000 or 2003 or any other reporting tool that can work with JET databases DBMS Repositories In Enterprise Architect Corporate Business and Software Engineering Systems Engineering and Ultimate editions you can use a suitable DBMS database for project files DBMS project files have the same logical structure as EAP files but must be connected to using ADO ODBC See Connect to a Data Repository below Whenever you launch Enterprise Architect the first thing displayed is the Start Page From here you can create a new
99. Medium Medium FR29 The staff must n Requirement The system must use stan 1 1 Mandatory Low Medium FR30 The Interface mu Requirement Critical to the success of th 1 1 Approved High Medium 1 1 1 1 FR44 The interface sh Requirement An important aspect of the gt 1 Approved High Medium FR5 2000 hours mean Requirement The mean time between fai 1Proposed Medium Medium FR6 Must be recovera Requirement In the event of software or h 1 Approved Medium High _9 FR7 99 999 accuracvRequirement The system accuracy defin 1 Approved Medium Medium o o Sour e po Import Data in CSV Format To import data in CSV format follow the steps below 1 Inthe Project Browser right click on the package to import into 2 Select the Import Export CSV Import Export context menu option The CSV Import Export dialog displays O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 124 CSV Import and Export CSV Import Package System Model Specification Generate Edit New File C EA quicklink Map csv mm Types o Action O Import Export Progress Results Print Results ViewFle Run Close Hep 3 Set the required options as outlined below option fuse OOOO Specify the name of the import specification 11 to use a Select the Import radio button to import from the file Grayed out if the package or a child item in the package
100. Model Branch 166 File History 157 File Properties 157 Import Model Branch 166 In Team Deployment 133 Include Other Users Packages 164 Introduction 130 Locking Necessary 132 Lock Modify Unlock Policy 132 Manual With XMI 116 Menu 157 Nested Packages 132 Offline 169 Package Configuration Validate 161 Policies 132 Project Browser Indicators 130 Recommendations 157 Refresh View Of Shared Model 168 Resynchronize Package Version Control Status 169 Resynchronize Status Of All Packages 134 Review Version Control History 168 SCC Options 137 SCC Providers DialogSCC Providers Dialog 137 SCC Upgrade For Enterprise Architect 4 5 140 Set Up 134 Settings 134 135 Setup Menu 134 Subversion Options 148 Subversion Create Local Working Copy 150 Subversion Create New Repository Subtree 149 Subversion Setting Up 148 Subversion TortoiseSVN 153 Subversion Using With Enterprise Architect Under WINE Crossover 150 Tasks 157 TFS Option 154 Use Nested Version Control Packages 137 Using 157 Validate Package Configurations 134 UML Model Management Index 267 Version Control 110 Who Has Checked Out A Package 157 Work Offline 134 View Locks 185 Views Add 86 Class 85 Component 85 Delete 88 Deployment 85 Dynamic 85 Manage 85 86 Rename 87 Simple 85 Use Case 85 W WAN Optimization Enterprise Architect Performance 62 65 68 For ASA Data Repository 65 For MSDE Server Data
101. Model Script InnoDB 22 MyISAM 22 Batch XMI Export 115 Import 116 Blue Exclamation Mark 195 Border Red 195 Business Modeling Traceability 217 C Cardinality Multiplicity Define 248 Change Tracking 197 Change Conflicts Resolve 103 Check Data Integrity 76 Model Integrity 76 Project Integrity 76 Check In Branch 162 Explanation 157 Offline Packages 169 Packages Online 162 Project Browser Ilcon 162 Check Out Branch 162 Explanation 157 Packages Offline 162 169 Project Browser Icon 162 Class View 85 Clean Project 76 Client Define 233 Comma Separated Value Export 118 121 Import 118 123 Compact Project EAP File 84 Compare Data 81 Models 81 Projects Instructions 81 Projects Why 80 Utility 207 210 Compare Utility Context Menu 213 Keyboard Options 213 Merge Options 213 Options 211 Output 212 Tab 212 Toolbar 213 Component View 85 Configure Controlled Packages With XMI 112 Export To XMI Stubs 112 Model Validation 92 Package For Version Control 160 Packages 112 Version Control Subversion 152 Connect To ASA Data Repository 65 To Data Repository 49 To MSDE Server Data Repository 68 To MySQL Data Repository 50 To Oracle 10g Data Repository 55 To Oracle 11g Data Repository 55 To Oracle 9i Data Repository 55 To PostgreSQL Data Repository 62 To Progress OpenEdge Data Repository 68 To SQL Server Data Repository 52 Connector Add Between Locked Elements 193 UML Model Management I
102. N Drivers Tracing Connection Pooling About User Data Sources Name Driver Microsoft dBase Driver dbf Excel Files Microsoft Excel Driver xds MS Access Database Microsoft Access Driver mdb Regression MySQL ODBC 3 51 Driver An ODBC User data source stores information about how to connect to Eb the indicated data provider A User data source is only visible to you and can only be used on the current machine 2 Click on the Add button The Create New Data Source dialog displays enabling you to add a new DSN Select a driver for which you want to set up a data source Name Microsoft dBase Driver dbf Microsoft dBase Treiber dbf Microsoft Excel Driver 2ds Microsoft Excel Treiber xds s e _ n 1 n 4 1 Microsoft dBase VFP Driver dbf Microsoft FoxPro VFP Driver dbf Microsoft ODBC for Oracle omy 3 Select PostgreSQL from the list 4 Click on the Finish button 5 Enter the following configuration details e Aname for the connection e The actual name of the database e Description optional e The host address of the PostgreSQL server e User name and password UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 29 Data Source psql_base Database ea base Server dbserver UserName postgres Options Description SSL Mode disable y Port 5432 Password eeeee Save Cancel 6 Cl
103. OCL 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 96 Model Validation Rules Reference To perform an OCL Validation display the Model Validation Configuration dialog and select the Relationship OCL Conformance checkbox Any OCL violations are recorded in the Model Validation Output window Define OCL Constraints for an Attribute You can add OCL constraints to a feature using the Properties dialog Element Attributes Select the Constraints tab click on the Type drop down arrow and select OCL UML Model Management Model Validation Rules Reference 97 inv self ocllsKindOf DirectedRelationship To perform an OCL Validation display the Model Validation Configuration dialog and select the Feature OCL Conformance checkbox Any OCL violations are recorded in the Model Validation Output window O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 98 Model Sharing and Team Deployment 7 Model Sharing and Team Deployment O Introducing Team Development Enterprise Architect offers a diverse set of functionality designed specifically for sharing projects 99 gt in team based and distributed development 995 environments Project sharing can be achieved through network deployment of model repositories replication 10 XMI Import Export Aoh Version Control t30 Package Control and User Security 17 Network deplo
104. Package Package Name Pack 475 O Rename package to Elem 4 Inconsistently named Package Package Name Pack 476 O Rename package to Elem 4 Inconsistently named Package Package Name Pack 471 O Rename package to Elem 4 Inconsistently named Package Package Name Pack 466 O Rename package to Elem 4 Inconsistently named Package Package Name Pack 458 O Rename package to Elem 4 Inconsistently named Package Package Name Pack 460 O Rename package to Elem 4 Inconsistentlv named Packace _ Packace Name Pack 457 O Rename packaae to Elem 4 4 m BS Select the checks to run the basic checks available are e Package Structure e Object Structure e Object Features e All GUIDs e Cross References e Connectors e UML 2 0 Migration Select either e the Report Only option to just view a report on the state of your model or e the Recover Clean option to attempt to recover and clean your project Warning If you intend to select the Recover Clean option you should back up your project file first To write a log of the integrity check click on the Save Results button and select a log file Click on the Go button to run the check If you want to display the resulting information in a more readable layout you can resize the dialog and its columns 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 78 Project Data Integrity Check Project Data Integrity UML 2 0 M
105. Project 8 dialog select the Connect to Server checkbox 2 Click on the Browse button as you normally would to browse for a project As you have selected the Connect to Server checkbox the Data Link Properties dialog displays instead of the Browse Directories dialog Provider Connection Advanced All Select the data you want to connect to OLE DB Provider s MediaCatalogDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogMergedDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogWebDB OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Outlook Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider MSDataShape OLE DB Provider for Microsoft Directory Services 3 Select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers from the list 4 Click on the Next button The Connection tab displays UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 51 oN 9 Provider Connection Advanced All Specify the following to connect to ODEC data 1 Specify the source of data Use data source name Use connection string 2 Enter information to log on to the server User name Password E Blank password F Allow saving password 3 Enter the initial catalog to use
106. QL ODBC Driver 274 e Adaptive Server Anywhere ODBC Driver 307 e Progress OpenEdge ODBC Driver 354 MySQL PostgreSQL Sybase Adaptive Server Anywhere and Progress OpenEdge require specific set up in order to operate as a repository Other database management systems connect through OLE DB and do not require a driver UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 25 1 4 9 1 MySQL ODBC Driver Before you can connect to a MySQL data repository you must first set up a MySQL ODBC driver for which in turn you must first have installed Microsoft MDAC components a MySQL DBMS system and a MySQL ODBC driver Note The recommended MySQL ODBC driver version is 5 1 5 Version 3 51 14 creates problems in incorporating tests in elements To set up your MySQL ODBC Driver follow the steps below 1 Select the Windows Control Panel Administrative Tools Data Sources ODBC option The ODBC Data Source Administrator window displays User DSN System DSN Fie DSN Drivers Tracing Connection Pooling About User Data Sources Name Driver Add dBASE Files Microsoft dBase Driver dbf Excel Files Microsoft Excel Driver xls MS Access Database Microsoft Access Driver mdb Regression MySQL ODEC 3 51 Driver An ODBC User data source stores information about how to connect to o the indicated data provider A User data source is only vis
107. QL Server Desktop Engine MSDE 17 To Sybase Adaptive Server Anywhere ASA 14 Use Case View 85 User Directory 227 Groups 175 User ID Import From Active Directory User Lock 108 248 245 247 108 185 185 177 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 266 Index User Lock Identify Owner 196 Indicators 195 User Security Basics 172 Disable 173 Enable 173 Maintain Groups 182 Maintain Users 175 Policy 174 Re enable 173 Tasks 172 What Is User Security 172 User Security Groups Set Up 179 User Group Lock Release 192 Set 192 User Group Lock Policy 174 Utility Compare 207 Diff 207 V Validate Package Configuration For Version Control 161 Validation Of Diagram 90 Of Element 90 Of Model Configure 92 Of Package 90 Rules Model 92 Validation Properties Attribute 94 Element 94 Feature 94 Relationship 94 Validation Well Formedness Attribute 93 Diagram 93 Element 93 Feature 93 Relationship 93 Version Control 110 Apply To Enterprise Architect Model 132 Apply To Model Branch 165 Basics 132 Branching 133 Check In and Check Out Packages 162 Configuration 134 135 166 Configuration Team Deployment 133 Configuration Use Previously Defined 161 Configure Current Package 134 Configure In Subversion 152 Configure Package 160 Connect Model Using TFS 154 Copy Modify Merge Policy 132 CVS Options 141 145 CVS Remote Repository 141 Discussion Of File Control 132 Export
108. Repository 55 OCL Conformance Rule 94 Connect To Oracle 11g Data Repository 55 Property Validity Rule 94 Connect To Oracle 9i Data Repository 55 Rule Element Composition 93 Connect To PostgreSQL Data Repository 62 Rule OCL Conformance 94 Connect To Progress OpenEdge Data Repository Rule Property Validity 94 68 Rule Well Formedness 93 Connect To SQL Server Data Repository 52 Rules 92 Create Access 2007 Repository 37 Well Formedness Rule 93 Create Adaptive Server Anywhere Repository Model Views 46 Automatic Notification 216 Create Data Repository 37 Monitor Work Flow 216 Create Model 9 Model Violations Create MSDE Server Repository 48 Examples 90 Create MySQL Repository 38 Model Wizard UML Model Management Index 261 Model Wizard Add Model Package 10 Use To Create Model 9 MOF Export To XMI 128 Getting Started 127 Import From XMI 128 Introduction 125 Monitor Events 216 Progress 216 Work Flow 216 MS Jet Database As Model Repository 11 MSDE Server Data Repository Connect To 68 Server Repository Create New 48 Upsize To 17 Multiple Login Under One User ID 182 Multiplicity Of Connector 248 Of Element 248 MyISAM BaseModel Script 22 MySQL Create Repository 38 Data Repository Connect To 50 ODBC Driver Set Up 25 Upsize To 22 N Nested Version Control Packages O Object Constraint Language Model Validation 90 Model Validation Rules For Conformance 94 OCL Model Validation 90 OCL Constraint
109. Repository 68 For MySQL Data Repository 50 For Oracle Data Repository 55 For PostgreSQL Data Repository 62 For Progress OpenEdge Data Repository 68 For SQL Server Data Repository 52 WAN Optimizer Introduction 72 Performance Of Enterprise Architect 72 Transmission Diagram 72 Well Formedness Validation Attribute 93 Diagram 93 Element 93 Feature 93 Relationship 93 What Is A Model 2 A Project 7 User Security 172 XMI 104 Wide Area Network WAN Optimizer Introduction 72 Performance Of Enterprise Architect 72 Transmission Diagram 72 Windows Authentication 175 Windows Active Directory Import User Login ID From 177 50 52 55 Windows Authentication Accept 177 WINE Crossover Using Subversion With Enterprise Architect Under 150 Work Flow Monitor With Model Views 216 Workflow Data Structures 188 Functions 188 Objects 188 Scripts Introduction 187 X XMI Export 104 105 Export MOF To 128 Import 104 106 Import And Auditing 206 Import MOF From 128 Limitations 109 Manual Version Control 116 Specifications 104 UML DTD 109 XML Package 110 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd UML Model Management www sparxsystems com
110. Sparx Systems strongly urge you not to manipulate version controlled package files outside of Enterprise Architect It is possible to leave the package files in a state that Enterprise Architect cannot recognize e Visual Studio Integration MDG Integration for Visual Studio 2005 or 2008 enhances TFS support by providing access to for example work items and bugs within both Enterprise Architect and the MDG Integration product 11 6 Use Version Control The following topics describe the most common activities using the version control features of Enterprise Architect accessed through the Package Version Control Menu 157 e Configure Controlled Package 1661 e Use Existing Configuration 16h e Validate Package Configurations 16 Project Version Control menu e Check In and Check out Packages 162 e Include Other Users Packages 164 e Apply Version Control to Branches 165 e Export Controlled Model Branch 166 e Import Controlled Model Branch 16 e Review Package History 168 e Refresh View of Shared Project 168 General Notes e The export import facility is not fast and submitting packages containing many sub nodes to version control should be avoided It is recommended version control is applied to individual packages See the Version Control Nested Packages 37 topic for more information e Replication t00 should not be combined with version controlled packages e Sparx Systems strongly urge you not to manipulate
111. The Tagged Value Types tab of the UML Types dialog enables a Technology Developer to rapidly create Tagged Values using a range of predefined structured Tagged Values to create structured tags that adhere to a specific format For example for model features that use the predefined tag Boolean you can use the Tagged Values window to assign a value of True or False and no other value You can also add default Tagged Value names and create predefined reference data Tagged Value types and custom masked Tagged Value types Any Tagged Value names created display in the drop down lists of Tagged Value names in the Tagged Value dialogs for elements operations and attributes For more information regarding the use of Tagged Values see the Tagged Values Window topic in Using Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool To display the Tagged Value Types tab select the Settings UML menu option to display the UML Types dialog and click on the Tagged Value Types tab 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 248 Reference Data UML Types Stereotypes Tagged Value Types Cardin inality Val ses Tag Name Description Detail New Save Delete Defined Tag Types i 7 Type Description Completion Date Datafield Database field eXPIRY z Role Person role Software Software component For further information on adding and modifying Tagged Values see SDK for Enterprise Architect Note You can transpor
112. Trial users support sparxsystems com 11 4 Version Control Menu You access the Version Control menu through the Project Version Control menu option It provides the following options Menu Option amp Function Keys Configure Current Display the Package Control Options 1661 dialog which enables you to specify Package whether this package and its children is version controlled and which version Ctrl Alt P control configuration applies Version Control Settings Display the Version Control Settings dialog 1351 Validate Package Test the validity 16h of the version control settings associated with each version Configurations controlled package within your current model Re Synch Statuses of All Resynchronize the version control status of packages 1691 as recorded in your Packages Enterprise Architect project when they are out of synchronization with the version control status reported by your version control provider The function acts on all version controlled packages within the Enterprise Architect project updating the values recorded in the project to match the values reported by the version control provider without performing any XMI import or export Work independently of the version control server 16 if it is unavailable to you 11 5 Version Control Setup Before using Enterprise Architect s version control facility your version control product must be installed on each machine where it is intended to b
113. V protocol to a Subversion aware Apache server https Same as http but with SSL encryption svn Access via custom protocol to an svnserve server Same as svn but through an SSH tunnel For more information on how Subversion parses URLs see http Awww svnbook red bean com en 1 4 svn basic in action html svn advanced reposurls See Also e Configure Version Control with Subversion 152 11 5 4 2 Create a new Repository Sub tree If a repository sub tree has already been created for your Enterprise Architect model skip this topic and see the Create a Local Working Copy 150 topic If your Enterprise Architect model has not previously been added to version control create a sub tree for it in your SVN repository by following the steps below 1 Create a temporary directory structure to import into the SVN repository which initializes the repository sub tree for this Enterprise Architect model The directory structure should look like this tempDir lt EA_Model_Name gt trunk branches tags 2 Open a command prompt navigate to tempDir and issue the command 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 150 Version Control Version Control Setup svn import lt repositoryURL gt message A Comment of your choice Note After the import is finished the original tree is not converted into a working copy To start working you must still svn checkout a fresh working copy
114. a 251 and Import Reference Data 253 options on the Tools menu 12 9 Set Group Permissions Note You must have Security Manage Users 183 permission to assign permissions to user groups the initial Admin administrator automatically has this permission To set up permissions to apply to a security group follow the steps below 1 Select the Project Security Manage Groups menu option The Security Groups dialog displays UML Model Management User Security Set Group Permissions 183 2 Click on the Set Group Permissions button The Group Permissions dialog displays Baselines Manage Baselines Restore model Change Password Check Data Integrity Configure Datatypes Configure Images Configure Packages Configure Resources Configure Stereotypes 7 Configure Version Control E Export XMI v Select Al Deselect Al 3 Select the checkbox against each required permission Click on the Select All button to select all permissions for the user or click on the Deselect All button to clear all selected permissions 4 Click on the OK button to assign the permissions All of the users assigned to this group share in this set of permissions Note You can transport these group permission definitions between models using the Export Reference Datal25 and Import Reference Data 253 options on the Tools menu 12 10 List of Available Permi
115. a resource to lt user gt commit Tip Use the Project Data Transfer 797 function to upload a basic model into the repository Connect to a Data Repository In Enterprise Architect you connect to a data repository for one of two reasons e To access an existing Enterprise Architect model in the repository e To reverse engineer a database schema into a model using ODBC see Code Engineering Using UML Models Note To connect to a repository you must have the usual SELECT UPDATE INSERT and DELETE permissions This topic describes how to connect to the following data repositories to access an existing Enterprise Architect model e MySQL Data Repository 50 e SQL Server Data Repository 5 e Oracle Data Repository 55 e PostgreSQL Data Repository 6 e Adaptive Server Anywhere Data Repository 65 e MSDE Server Data Repository 68 e Progress OpenEdge ss O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 50 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 1 4 11 1 MySQL Data Repository Note This feature is available in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions In order to use a MySQL data repository you must connect to it in Enterprise Architect first Before connecting to the repository you must set up a MySQL ODBC driver 257 To connect to a MySQL data repository in Enterprise Architect follow the steps below 1 In the Open
116. a Database Repository 61 Provider Connection Advanced All Specify the following to connect to ODBC data 1 Specify the source of data 0 Use data source name Oracle_EA DSN Use connection string Build 2 Enter information to log on to the server Username EA_USER Password eeeeeeee Blank password V Allow saving password 3 Enter the initial catalog to use 6 Select the Data Source name from the drop down list and type in the database User Name and Password 7 Click on the Test Connection button to confirm that the details are correct 8 If your test succeeded click on the OK button if your test did not succeed revise your settings 9 After you have clicked on the OK button Oracle prompts you for the password Enter this The Connection Name and Type dialog displays Name E Encrypt Connection String Database Server Oracle Lazy Load F Use WAN Optimization Server Port DSN 10 Give the connection a suitable name so that you can recognize it in the Recent Projects panel on the Open Project dialog 8 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 62 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 11 12 13 14 15 16 If required select the Encrypt Connection String checkbox This encrypts and hides the connection details of the database from the users
117. a Je CVS_VCTest 647 d cvs de eal de eal de ea2 de ea3 de ead den ea5 a EEL m B Co a AAA AAA ITA m 15 Click on the OK button to return to the Version Control Settings dialog 16 The Current User 145 field should display the user name used to log into the remote CVS repository If this does not happen it indicates that Enterprise Architect cannot extract the user name from the file WorkingCopyPath CVS Root and the configuration does not work correctly 17 If necessary set the CVS Exe Path 1451 by clicking on the Select Path button and browsing to the file path for the for file cvs exe the CVS executable 18 Click on the Save button to save the configuration you have defined The new configuration is added to the list of Defined Configurations Note A new entry is also created in the Local Paths list with the same ID as the new version control configuration The Local Path entry records the Local Project path for use in subsequent path substitutions This model is Private Specify whether all users connect to a single shared copy of the model such as a DBMS or each user connects to their own private copy of the model When unselected for shared models the option disables the File History Retrieve functionality when the selected package is checked out by another user This prevents modifications that might have been made by the other user from being discarded through importing a p
118. a User Lock to the diagram preventing any other user from modifying it It is creating difference between the database and buffer versions of the diagram that triggers the temporary lock and elimination of difference that releases the lock Therefore Enterprise Architect releases the lock when e The user saves the changes to the diagram with the Save icon or keyboard keys e The user undoes the last remaining action in the Undo list e The user saves or discards changes via the system prompt when they close the diagram If the diagram already has a User Lock or Group Lock that does not exclude the current user this lock is set aside and saved when the temporary User Lock is applied When the temporary User Lock is released the pre existing lock is restored The option is ignored in Require User Lock security mode 5 Click on the OK button Security is enabled and an Admin user and user group are created with full permissions all access rights listed in List of Available Permissions 183 and a password of password 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 174 User Security Enable Security Security has been enabled on the current model You can now login as A admin with the password password and create and administer users groups and permissions 6 Select the Project Security Login as Another User menu option and log in as Admin with the initial password of password Note To change the Admin passw
119. a local proxy to execute queries and return the results in a compressed format to the client The WAN Optimizer significantly improves Enterprise Architect s performance in a WAN by reducing the amount of data transmitted and in turn the number of network calls made In the following diagram transmission between Enterprise Architect and a DBMS is depicted first without and then with the WAN Optimizer Legend E Database Query Requests O Query Results Database Server Local Area Network Legend E Database Query Requests O Query Results Uncompressed E Query Results Compressed Database Server You can download the WAN Optimizer installer from the Downloads page of the Registered Users section of the Sparx Systems website The Wan Optimizer Service installer package provides two installable features for the target machine e WAN Optimizer Service the installer also helps register and start the service on the target machine and add it to the Windows Startup folder e WAN Optimizer Admin Client to enable an administrator to administer and configure the service from a remote client UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files The WAN Optimizer 73 The Optimizer has its own Sparx WAN Optimizer User Guide See that User Guide for more information on WAN Optimizer Components Installing and Starting the WAN Optimizer Service Configuring the Service Troubleshooting 1 6 Copy a
120. ables an Audit History 205 tab in the Output window which summarizes all changes made to the selected element or connector O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 198 Auditing Performance Issues By enabling auditing on a project you increase the time taken for most actions For most modeling tasks this increase is insignificant However there are some instances where the difference is more substantial See Performance Issues 2061 for more information 13 1 Auditing Quickstart To quickly enable auditing and see it in action follow the instructions below Enable Auditing To enable Auditing 1 Select the View Other Project Tools Audit View menu option to open the Audit View 20 2 Click on the Audit Settings button The Audit Settings 19 dialog displays 3 Select the Enable Auditing checkbox 4 Click on the OK button to close the Audit Settings dialog 5 Close the Audit View dialog Make Changes Change and save your project for example e Add a new package e Add a new Class e Add a new connector e Change the name of an element e Delete an element View Changes in the Audit View Open the Audit View again View Other Project Tools Audit View and click on the Refresh or Load button to display a record of the changes you made 13 2 Auditing Settings The Audit Settings dialog enables you to change what is recorded by the Auditing facility Note If security is enabled you must ha
121. advanced properties defaults to selected If the Compare Utility tab shows the results of a Baseline comparison when you click on the OK button the display refreshes to refine the information according to the options you have selected 14 4 Example Comparison The diagram below shows the result of a comparison between a package Business Process Model in the current project and that package in a Baseline version 0 1 captured at an earlier date Notice that e The results are displayed on the Compare Utility tab e A hierarchy of model elements is displayed in the left hand pane It is clearly visible from the Status column and from the triangular icons which items in the hierarchy have been changed Status Changed deleted from the model Baseline only added to the model Model only and switched to different packages Moved since the Baseline was captured e If you click on an item with a Status entry in the left hand pane the right hand pane displays a table of properties showing the values of those properties in the current model and in the Baseline For each property where there is a difference between the model and the Baseline the row is highlighted This example shows that the Class element named Application was moved from the Business Process Model package as shown in the Baseline to the Business Rules Model package on 5 June 2009 as shown in the Model UML Model Management Baselines Differencing and Merges
122. agated through to the replicas Trying to update a replica first at best does nothing and at worst causes the update of the master to fail One other strategy is to remove 102 replication from a copy of the replica set upgrade that project and convert itinto a new design master from which new replicas are created 7 4 6 Resolve Conflicts When two or more people have changed the same element between synchronization points Enterprise Architect has trouble resolving which change to accept and which to discard The choice is made based on some rules within the JET replication manager but the discarded changes are also stored so you can manually override that choice After synchronizing replicas open the Resolve Conflicts dialog and check that there were any conflicts Select whether to accept each change or use one of the discarded changes instead Tables with conflicts Conflicting Records Table with Conflicts Description Row ID t_operation Operations guid 8F4AC17D 4C3F 4B21 B454 A751335 t_object Object Details eee Keep Curent Overwrite with Conflict Field Curent Value Conflicting Value Concurrency Guarded Synchronous Type double boolean Name oplook op1 Close Help Recommendations for Resolving Conflicts Enterprise Architect stores model information in database records When two records have been modified in different ways by different users they appear in this dialog Normally it
123. al drive never on a network drive UML Model Management Model Maintenance Repair a Project 85 5 3 Repair a Project If a project has not been closed properly such as during system or network outages on rare occasions the EAP file does not open correctly In this case a message displays informing you the project is of an unknown database format or is not a database file Warning Never attempt to repair a project over a network connection copy it to a local drive first Notes e Poor network connections can also cause this symptom e Inthe Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect if security is enabled you must have Administer Database 183 permission to repair a project See User Security in UML Models Repair a Project That Has Not Closed Correctly To repair a project that was not closed properly follow the steps below Note All users must be logged off the project you are attempting to repair 1 Copy the project file to a local drive on your PC 2 In Enterprise Architect select the Tools Options menu option and on the General page deselect the Use Jet 4 0 requires restart checkbox 3 Close and restart Enterprise Architect and open a place holder project to enable access to the Repair EAP File facility Note This is NOT the project you intend to repair it is a copy of it 4 Select the Tools Manage EAP File R
124. al working folder on their own machine that is mapped to a Source Control folder on the server When initializing the connection to TFS Enterprise Architect issues the command tf get If the Local Working Copy path specified in Enterprise Architect s version control configuration is mapped through a TFS workspace that also maps many other working folders to their corresponding Source Control folders TFS can take a long time as it proceeds to update the files in all of those folders Enterprise Architect might appear to freeze when it initializes the connection to TFS whilst it waits for TFS to complete the tf_get command and hand back program control Note To see a video demonstration of setting up a TFS project for version control go to http www sparxsystems com au resources demos settinguptfs T FS 20Project Workspace 20Setup htm 11 5 5 1 Connect an Enterprise Architect Model to Version Control using TFS Having set up TFS and created or otherwise opened your model you can configure the model for version control under TFS To do this follow the steps below Open or create the Enterprise Architect model to place under version control 2 Select the Project Version Control Version Control Settings menu option The Version Control Settings dialog displays 3 Click on the New button in the Unique ID field enter a suitable name then select the TFS radio button UML Model Management Version Control Version Control Setup 1
125. and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions Before creating a MySQL data repository in Enterprise Architect you must set up the MySQL and MySQL ODBC drivers For further information on setting these up see MySQL ODBC Driver 25 To create a new MySQL repository you must first create a database into which to import the table definitions for Enterprise Architect Sparx Systems provide SQL scripts to create the required tables how you create the database and execute that script are up to you e Registered users can obtain the scripts from the Registered Corporate edition Resources page of the Sparx Systems website at http www sparxsystems com registered reg ea corp ed html e Trial users can obtain the scripts from the Corporate edition Resources page of the Sparx Systems website at http www sparxsystems com resources corporate Create the Data Repository Once you have created the database and executed the script you should have an empty Enterprise Architect project to begin working with You can transfer data from an existing EAP file or simply start from scratch Third Party Tools If you are unfamiliar with MySQL and DBMS systems in general you might want to consider a suitable front end tool MySQL Administrator available from http dev mysal com downloads qui tools 5 0 html is one such tool lt provides a convenient graphical user interface to enable the creation of databases execution of scripts
126. and all instances of in the field are doubled that is becomes wy Record a brief description of the specification Select the default filename Set the default action Import or Export A specification can be used in either direction but this enables you to set the default type Default Types Limit the element types being exported by entering a comma separated list for example class requirement component node object 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 120 CSV Import and Export CSV Specifications If you specify element types ONLY elements of those types are exported or imported Therefore in order to enable the Preserve Hierarchy option to operate if selected you must include Package as an element type Otherwise there are no packages in which to preserve the hierarchy If you do not specify any default element types all elements including Packages are exported or imported and the hierarchy can be preserved Preserve Hierarchy Include fields generated by Enterprise Architect to embed reconstruct the package hierarchy See the Using Preserve Hierarchyl120 section for more details Available Fields Select from a list of possible record fields not yet allocated File Specification List the record fields in the order they are plotted across the spreadsheet already assigned CUA CECTT TN sew Seeger one cnn adereaeseaon COX EEN Note In Available Fields and File Specification the rec
127. and several elements The Primary Use Cases package contains the Primary UCDiagram Customer Setup package Use Case 1 element Use Case 2 element Each subordinate package also contains diagrams elements and if necessary further packages The elements are related by connectors created in the diagrams and each element and connector has properties attributes operations and extensions defined in the respective Properties dialogs 1 2 Open a Project Enterprise Architect supports several different methods of opening an Enterprise Architect project file From the Main Menu Select the File Open Project menu option From the Open Project dialog select the path for the file to open and click on the Open button Project to Open Connect to Server E C Program Files Sparx Systems EA EAExample eap mas J New Open gt Cancel Y Help Recent Projects X Remove Selection from List Project Name Path Project Y Dev Roy Project eap regression regression DBType 0 Connect Provider MSDAS C Program Files Sparx Systems EA EAExample eap From the Default Tools Toolbar See Using Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool Click on the folder icon to display the Open Project dialog or the drop down arrow to display a list of recently opened projects From the Start Page See Using Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool 1 Click on Open a Project File The Open Project dialog displays UML Model Manage
128. and users can begin work sooner but at the expense of later small delays as Enterprise Architect loads specific portions of the model 15 If required select the Use WAN Optimization 72 gt checkbox To improve performance over a Wide Area Network remote database calls can be routed through a WAN Optimizer that compresses the data returned from the repository reducing transfer time If you select this checkbox complete the next three fields see your administrator for the correct values Otherwise go to step 19 16 In the Server field type the network name or address of the optimizer server 17 In the Port field type the port on which the server is running on the remote machine 18 In the DSN field type the data source name of the database as it appears on the remote machine 19 Click on the OK button to complete the configuration 1 4 11 2 SQL Server Data Repository Note This feature is available in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions Before you can use a SQL Server data repository you must connect to it in Enterprise Architect To connect to your SQL Server data repository in Enterprise Architect follow the steps below 1 In the Open Project dialog 84 select the Connect to Server checkbox 2 Click on the Browse button as you normally would to browse for a project As you have selected the Connect to Server checkbox the Data Link Properties dialog dis
129. andard security mode all elements are unlocked and as necessary a user can set a user or group lock on any element or set of elements in order to make changes and protect those changes e Under the rigorous security mode an Enterprise Architect model is read only and nothing in the model can be edited until explicitly checked out with a user lock For more detailed information on the security policies see the Security Policyl174 topic User Security Tasks A number of security tasks can only be performed by users with Administrative rights to the model These tasks include e Security Policy 174 e Enable Security 173 e Maintain Users 175i e Import User IDs From Active Directory 17 e Change User Passwords 190 e Assign User To Groups 17 e View All User Permissions 18 e Maintain Groups 182 e View and Manage Locks 185 e Password Encryption 186i for the third party DBMS connection password only available for Oracle and SQL Server Repositories for Enterprise Architect releases prior to 7 1 e Create Workflow Scripts 187 Other Security tasks can be performed by users who do not have Administrative rights These tasks include e Lock Model Elements 192 e Lock Packages 193 e Apply a User Lock 1941 e Identify Who Has Locked An Object 1967 e Locked Element Indicators 19 e Manage Your Own Locks 19 e Change Your Own Password 196 UML Model Management User Security 173 Notes e User secu
130. are importing an XMI 1 1 file that was previously exported with a UML_EA DTD file the UML_EA DTD file must be present in the directory into which the XMI file is being written An error occurs if the UML_EA DTD file is absent 8 6 1 Controlled Package Menu The Package Control sub menu is available from the Project Browser Package context menu This menu is for a package that itself is not under version control but that might contain child packages that are under version control For a package that is directly under version control see the Package Version Control Menu 15 topic in Version Control Within UML Models Using Enterprise Architect UML Model Management XMI Import and Export Controlled Packages 111 Menu Option amp Function Keys Configure various settings for the package Ctrl Alt P Manage Baselines Ctrl Alt B Check In Branch Check Out Branch Display the Package Control Options h1 dialog which enables you to specify whether this package and its child packages is controlled and which file it is controlled through Create a Baseline 208 of the current package or compare the current package with a previous Baseline See Baseline UML Models For the selected branch of the model that is the selected package and all of its child packages display the Select Packages to Check In 163 dialog listing all version controlled packages within that branch that are checked out to you
131. ase ensure you have backed up target if necessary Transfer Cose Hep Progress Click on the option for the required transfer type You can choose from e EAP to EAP e DBMS to EAP EAP to DBMS e DBMS to DBMS In the Source Project and Target Project fields type or select the name or connection string for the Source and Target projects If you want to capture the transfer in a log file select the Logfile checkbox and browse for the appropriate log file location Click on the Transfer button It is good practise to do a Project Compare 80 after this process to verify that all records are written 4 2 Why Compare Projects It is sometimes useful to compare the size and row counts of two projects for example after a database crash after import from XMI or after performing a deletion of model elements You can compare EAP files to other EAP files or to DBMS based repositories or compare two DBMS repositories Enterprise Architect examines the number of rows in each database and produces a report indicating the total records in each and the difference between the two No examination is made of the data in the table just the record count Comparing projects this way is a convenient sanity check after restoring a backup or doing a project data transfer If discrepancies are found you must investigate further manually See the Compare Projects 815 topic for instructions UML Model Manage
132. at ae a e re en eee 197 A diting QUICK Start A sense tances dipdincvececocs ad ccte sbeddousceduaesudeetuedpoegexetieecectuvsncaze 198 Auditing Settings ws 198 AUS COP ia A a ede ie he et ee 199 AUQUIELOOS cional 199 Auditing Level isss A ai 200 Audit Options ARA A a A Sans 200 O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd IV Contents AM AAA debe Aa ar E aa cise dss aa ae teat met A oa arad teens anda aaya daara Audit View Controls CA AAA PEPA Auditing Performance ISSUES 0nmnnnincccnnncnnnninccnnnnnarnrnnrn cena 206 Audit View Performance ISSUES cccseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeesneneeeesaneeeenneneesensneeeensenaeeensnaesesseaeeessnaaeesneeeeeeseneaes 206 Baselines Differencing and Merges Baselines EA tintin k AnkAtEAEAAEANENENEANEANEAENEANEANENENEENENNEA EAEEREN EEEE E nnana 208 Great Baselides iii ena Sie ad aetna aa aAa a aa ATE ARa ee 210 The Gompare Utility Diff 00 e a eaaa Aa a r aE 210 Compare Options 211 Example Compa ii ia 212 Compare Utility Tab Options dui aa 213 Monitor CS a i ee alts co a aa eae a 216 Tas 217 Packages and Element ccscccsscsssessneesseeeseneesneesseeessneeesneseseeeseneesenesseesenessanessenesesnesaeneesseesseneesseeseneess 218 Create Traceability Diagrams 222 Traceability TOONS scccscsessistasccscissstesecdsadsesdecsonsscaacvasudeuvenibccaneasavoaisavesvusuinsubercuctedstaradieesaderestucvucrdveusdentesencsseee 224 A stein aetna ee ana
133. ation Settings CVS Exe Path C Program Files CVSNT cvs exe 6 Click on the Select Path button to the right of the Working Copy path field and browse for and select the local folder in which to keep local working copies of the XML files to be stored in the Version Control repository 7 If necessary click on the Select Path button to the right of the CVS Exe Path field and browse to the file path for the file cvs exe the CVS executable UML Model Management Version Control Version Control Setup 147 Y Browse For Folder The local path used to transfer package files must be specified a CSV Checkouts a 4 je 08063273 d cvs a Je CVS_VCTest 647 d cvs Je eal de eal de ea2 de ea3 de ead den ea5 a EEL B 9 a AAA A m 8 Click on the Save button to save the configuration you have defined 9 The new configuration is added to the list in the Defined Configurations panel Note A new entry is also created in the Local Paths list with the same ID as the new version control configuration The Local Path entry records the Local Project path for use in subsequent path substitutions For further information on the fields in the Version Control Settings dialog see the following table This model is Private Specify whether all users connect to a single shared copy of the model e g a DBMS or each user connects to their own private cop
134. b O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 234 Reference Data People Project Author s Project Roles Resources Project Clients Name Organization Role s Phone 1 Phone 2 Mobile Fax Email Notes Defined Clients Name Role s Ralph Spencer Client Project Manager Complete the fields as described below Type the name of the organization that employs the client Role s lie the role the client plays in the project for example Manager ponsor ma Se O po TT Click on the Save button to add the new client to the Defined Clients list To add details of further clients click on the New button To delete a client record click on the name in the Defined Clients list and click on the Delete button UML Model Management Reference Data People 235 Note You can transport these client definitions between models using the Export Reference Data 25 1 and Import Reference Datal2531 options on the Tools menu 17 2 General Types The General Types dialog enables you to configure e Status types 235 e Constraint types 2371 e Constraint Status types 23 e Requirement types 2391 e Scenario types 240 To display the General Types dialog select the Settings General Types menu option Status Constraint Constraint Status Requirement Scenario Status App roved Description Status Type Color Preview a y sa
135. below 1 Inthe Project Browser right click on the package to place under version control The context menu displays 2 Click on the Package Control Configure menu option The Package Control Options dialog displays Control Package X Version Control None XMI Filename Resources xml as UML XMI Type Enterprise Architect XMI UML 1 3 v Other Options Version ID 10 F Use DTD Last Load Date _ Batch Export Y Include sub packac Last Save Date Lok Cancel Hep 3 Select the Control Package checkbox to indicate that this is a controlled package 4 Click on the Version Control drop down arrow and select the version control repository this connects the package to a specific version control configuration The XMI Filename field then displays the version control configuration default path 5 The Version ID field defaults to 1 0 if necessary change this to the appropriate reference 6 The Owner field defaults to your user name if necessary type or select the name of the user who owns the package 7 Click on the OK button to set the version control options The Add Package to Version Control dialog displays UML Model Management Version Control Use Version Control 161 You are about to add this package to version control Y Keep checked out Cox cms 8 If you do not want to check out the package immediately clear the Keep checked out c
136. between models using the Export Reference Data 25h and Import Reference Datal253 options on the Tools menu Select from User Directory If your company is using a Windows Active Directory you can select the Project Author names from the local or corporate wide directory To do this follow the steps below 1 On the Project Author s tab click on the button The Select Users dialog displays Select this object type Users Object Types From this location Enter the object names to select examples I 2 Click on the Object Types button and select the checkbox for the object type User 3 Click on the OK button to return to the Select Users dialog 4 Click on the Locations button The Locations dialog displays 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 230 Reference Data People 17 1 2 Select the location you want to search Location AdminSDHolder 13 ComPartitions l ComPartitionSets Domain Updates l Meetings l Policies l WinsockServices WMIPolicy l Users aca ga ca ga c ga ca aa ca ga ea 5 Click on the appropriate area or level of the directory and click on the OK button The Select Users dialog redisplays 6 Inthe Enter the object names to search field type the first letter of the user name to search for 7 Click on the Check Names button The Multiple Names Found dialog displays listing the names starting with the s
137. cal order This enables you to see a progression of changes which can be especially useful in determining date time inconsistencies Search and filters can still be applied enabling you to view all of today s changes in order or all changes for a particular element in order or both Note Some information displayed in Raw mode might be insignificant or only in machine readable format 13 4 Audit History Tab When Auditing is turned on an Auditing History tab is enabled in the Output window To see this tab you must have one or both of the Auditing 197 and Element List views open Note If security is enabled you must have Audit View 183 permission to display data on the Audit History tab Output x User Timestamp Property Original Change T rchester Frederick 2009 06 04 16 23 58 version 1 0 1 1 E stereotype agent status Proposed Validated phase 1 0 11 scope Public Protected M 4 gt gt System Script Audit History 4 The information in the Audit History tab provides a history of changes to whichever element or connector you have selected in the e current diagram Project Browser Audit View or Element List 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 206 Auditing Audit History Tab As you select different elements or connectors the Audit History automatically updates to reflect your current selection The information shows for each change made to the element or connector e Wh
138. checkbox to mark the package as a Batch Import package If required click on the Batch Export checkbox to mark the package as a Batch Export package If required click on the Include sub package checkbox to deselect it to include only the immediate contents of the package in an XMI export XMI stubs this is available only for an XMI 1 1 UML 1 3 export If you leave the checkbox selected the entire sub package hierarchy of this branch is included in the export 4 Click on the OK button to set the Package Control options Note For batch import the file date of the XMI file is stored You can bypass the batch import if the file date of the last import matches that of the current file that is there is no change 8 6 3 Remove Package from Control If required you can remove the control from a package Before removing the package control you must check in 162 the package if it is being used for version control See Version Control Within UML Models Using Enterprise Architect 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 114 XMI Import and Export Controlled Packages To remove control from a package In the Project Browser window right click on the controlled package The context menu displays 2 Select the Package Control Configure menu option or press Ctrl Alt P The Package Control Options dialog displays 3 Deselect the Control Package checkbox If the package is under version control this sets the Ver
139. ckage is checked out to a specific user a write lock is set on the package and other users cannot make changes to it until it has been checked in again Note In the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect if security is enabled you must have Use Version Conirol 183 permission to check files in and out using version control Check In Check Out 1 Inthe Project Browser right click on the package icon 2 Select the Package Control Check In Check Out or Undo Checkout context menu options as appropriate 3 If required enter a comment when prompted to do so If you are working in a private 13 model and you select the Check Out menu option the Import Package dialog displays in shared models this dialog only has default values and therefore does not display Development Model is up to date and does not need to be imported Action gt Force reload from XMI Y Refresh model view O Accept current package Always use these settings Ms Help Force reload from XMI Reload the package content from the XMI file in the central repository even though the package and XMI file are synchronized This ensures that links and dependencies that might not have been refreshed are updated as well Accept current The default Leave the package content in its current state package UML Model Management Version Control Use Version Control 16
140. ckage versions for different purposes such as customer visible internal release only 4 You can roll back parts of a model as required 5 There is less chance of collisions between developers if each works on a discrete package 6 The process is controllable using a version control 1307 system See Version Control Within UML Models Using Enterprise Architect Use the Import Export menu options below to access this feature they are available through the Project Import Export submenu Also see the XM 10 topic for further information on XMI based import and export Import Package from XML Ctrl Alt 1 Ev Export Package to XML Ctri Alt E CSV Import Export Ctri Alt C CSV Import Export Specifications Batch XMI Export Batch XMI Import The Controlled Packagel1101 feature can also be used to assist in the process Note XMI based import export is UML1 3 XMI1 1 compliant You can also write XML based tools to manipulate and extract information from XML files to enhance the development process 7 4 Replication In addition to sharing Enterprise Architect projects in real time over a network you can also share projects using Replication options for which are available through the Tools Manage EAP File menu Replication enables different users to work independently of one another and to merge their changes at a later time To avoid difficulties in this inevitably hazardous process please read all sect
141. com WhitePapers Version Control pdf e http www sparxsystems com downloads whitepapers EA Deployment pdf A brief summary of the process is provided below 1 Install your version control product 2 Create a version control repository 3 Create a version control project to be used with your Enterprise Architect project and check out a working copy of the project into a local folder You must do this for every team member that is accessing the version controlled packages whether you are using a single shared model or each team member stores his own private copy of the model 4 Within Enterprise Architect define a version control configuration 134 to provide access to the working copy files Again each user must do this on their own workstation as the details are stored within the Windows registry 5 Configure packages 1661 within the Enterprise Architect model for version control That is apply version control to individual packages 6 Check out and check in packages 162 as required Note The name of the version control configuration must be the same across all machines That is all version control access to a given Enterprise Architect package must be through version control configurations with the same name across all models and all users It is possible to use multiple version control configurations within the same model so different packages can still use different version control configurations within the same model a
142. configuration associated with the package to retrieve The file list is populated with the names of files available through that configuration for retrieval and import into your model 5 Select the package file to import into your model and click on the OK button 11 6 7 Apply Version Control To Branches Enterprise Architect enables you to apply version control to all packages within a selected model branch in a single operation In this context a model branch is a package that is currently selected in the Project Browser and all of the packages contained within it The Version Control Configuration 1351 to be used in this operation must be defined within the model before selecting this command To apply version control to a model branch follow the steps below 1 Right click on the required package and select the Add Branch to Version Control 157 context menu option The Apply VC to Branch dialog displays Select a Version Control Configuration SVN_config SVN C VC Workspaces Subversion RoysTesting v Y Export as Model Branch 2 Inthe Select a Version Control Configuration field click on the drop down arrow and select the Version Control Configuration to use 3 If required select the Export as Model Branch checkbox to export the selected package and sub packages as a Model Branchl166 O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 166 Version Control Use Version Control 11 6 8 1
143. cy 174 Requirement Type Define 239 Resolve Change Conflicts Between Replicas 103 Resources Define 232 Resynchronize Package Version Control Status 169 Reverse Engineering And Auditing 206 Review Package Version Control History 168 Rigorous Security Mode Apply User Lock 194 Release User Lock 194 Role Define 230 Rollback Change Options 213 RSA Models 108 XMI 106 RSM Import emx Files 106 Import uml2 Files 106 Run SQL Patches 78 S Save Controlled Package 114 Package with XMI 114 SCC 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 264 Index SCC Providers Dialog 137 Version Control Options 137 Version Control Upgrade For Enterprise Architect 4 5 140 Scenario Type Define 240 Script Workflow Functions 188 Workflow Introduction 187 Security Basics 172 Change Password Disable 173 Enable 173 Maintain Groups 182 Maintain Users 175 Policy 174 Re enable 173 Require User Lock Mode 174 Reset Password 190 Rigorous Security 174 Set Password 190 Standard Security 174 Tasks 172 User Permission List 183 User Group Lock Mode 174 What Is User Security 172 Security Group Permissions 182 Server Repository Create for Oracle 10g 43 Create for Oracle 9 43 Set Group Permissions 182 Set Up Adaptive Server Anywhere ODBC Driver 30 Database Model Files 11 MySQL ODBC Driver 25 ODBC Driver 24 PostgreSQL ODBC Driver 27 Progress OpenEdge ODBC Driver 35 Single Permissions 180 User Groups 179 Se
144. d rows instead of affected rows V Allow big result sets F Use compression F Treat BIGINT columns as INT columns Enable safe options see documentation Enable automatic reconnect Enable SQL_AUTO_IS_NULL Always handle binary function results as character data 7 Select the Return matched rows instead of affected rows and Allow big result sets checkboxes 8 Click on the Test button to confirm that the details are correct 9 If the test succeeds click on the OK button to complete the configuration 10 If the test does not succeed review your settings Your MySQL connection is now available to use in Enterprise Architect 1 4 9 2 PostgreSQL ODBC Driver Before you can connect to a PostgreSQL data repository you must first set up a PostgreSQL ODBC driver To do this you must have Microsoft MDAC components a PostgreSQL DBMS system and a PostgreSQL ODBC driver version 7 03 01 00 minimum installed Note Do not use version 8 4 1 of the PostgreSQL ODBC Driver it presents difficulties in transferring a project to a PostgreSQL repository To set up your PostgreSQL ODBC driver follow the steps below 1 Select the Windows Control Panel Administrative Tools Data Sources ODBC option The ODBC Data Sources Administrator window displays 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 28 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository User DSN System DSN File DS
145. database User Name and the Password The Location field is not required Click on the Test Connection button to confirm that the details are correct If your test succeeded click on the OK button If your test did not succeed revise your settings After you have clicked on the OK button the Connection Name and Type dialog displays Name E Encrypt Connection String Database Server Oracle Lazy Load F Use WAN Optimization Server Port DSN 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 58 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 10 Give the connection a suitable name so that you can recognize it in the Recent Projects panel on the Open Project dialog 8 11 If required select the Encrypt Connection String checkbox This encrypts and hides the connection details of the database from the users that the connection string is given to 12 If required select the Lazy Load checkbox to not load the full project view when the model is loaded Instead only the parts that are necessary to display the visible portion of the tree are loaded This means that a model loads faster and users can begin work sooner but at the expense of later small delays as Enterprise Architect loads specific portions of the model 13 If required select the Use WAN Optimization 7 checkbox To improve performance over a Wide Area Network remote database calls can be routed through a WAN
146. dit View e Save log items outside the project with the Save Logs button If you then clear the logs you have just saved the load time of the Audit View is reduced You can reload logs into the project at any time using the Load Logs button Navigating the Audit Tree is Slow e Close the Audit History 205 tab in the Output window The Audit View is Slow in Loading and Changing Modes e Try setting the time filter 204 to a period in the immediate past such as Today Previous 24 Hours or Previous Week This time period updates each time you open or refresh the Audit View e Save log items 19 outside the project with the Save Logs button If you then clear the logs you have just saved the load time of the Audit View is reduced You can reload logs into the project at any time using the Load Logs button UML Model Management Baselines Differencing and Merges 207 14 Baselines Differencing and Merges Enterprise Architect Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions includes tools to help you manage and review changes to your models over time These tools apply the concepts of Baselines Differencing and Merges You can also obtain a snapshot of selected items in the model using the Model View facility In the Corporate Business and Software Engineering Systems Engineering or Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect this facility enables you to automatically generat
147. e 3 Save the controlled packages to establish a model base and check these into the version control system When Versioning is Required Continue working on a package until versioning is required then follow the steps below 1 Check out the package XMI file from the version control system 2 Save the relevant package using the controlled package support 3 Check the package back into the version control system Recover an Earlier Version To recover an earlier version follow the steps below 1 Save the current version first important because the package is completely deleted during the import process and manually update the version control system if necessary 2 Get the required package version from the version control system 3 Select the package to reload 4 Select the Package Control Load package from file menu option to import the previous version Enterprise Architect deletes the controlled package and restores the previous version O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 118 CSV Import and Export 9 CSV Import and Export CSV You can import 1231 and export 12h information about Enterprise Architect elements in CSV format You must define CSV specifications 11 amp to do this because the specification defines what types of value from the spreadsheet are to be imported and how the information is translated between the spreadsheet and Enterprise Architect 9 1 CSV Specifications To import 123
148. e Network Advanced Server name asa_server Start line Database name ez Database file Encryption key ca tamaticalk se automatically 0I start datab cu V Stop database after last disconnect _ox_J caca Hep e The network protocol on the Network tab if the database is on a network location UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 35 opec Login Database Network Advanced Select the network protocols and options Y TCP IP FP SPX V Shared memory Liveness timeout 120 seconds Idle timeout 240 al minutes Buffer size 1460 bytes Compress network packets Select the method for encryption of network packets 0 None Simple y TLS E dit Cancel Help 6 You can now return to the ODBC tab and test the connection 7 Click on the OK button to complete the configuration Your Adaptive Server Anywhere connection is now available to use in Enterprise Architect 1 4 9 4 Progress OpenEdge ODBC Driver Before you can connect to an OpenEdge data repository you must first set up an OpenEdge ODBC driver To do this you must have Microsoft MDAC components OpenEdge DBMS system and DataDirect ODBC driver for OpenEdge version 4 20 minimum installed To set up the ODBC Driver follow the steps below 1 Select the Windows Control Panel Administrativ
149. e 190 Repair Project EAP File 85 Administrator Set 190 Resources 232 Security Change 175 Roles 230 User Change 190 Password Encryption Prior To Release 7 1 Of Enterprise Architect 186 Patches SQL Run 78 People As Project Resources 232 Dialog 227 Settings 227 Performance Of Enterprise Architect 50 52 55 62 65 68 72 197 Permission List User Security PostgreSQL Data Repository Connect To 62 ODBC Driver Set Up 27 Repository Create 43 Upsize To 17 Preserve Hierarchy CSV Specification Private Model And Version Control Using TFS Problem Type Define 242 Professional Edition Upsize From 11 Progress OpenEdge Data Repository Connect To 68 ODBC Driver Set Up 35 Server Repository Create 48 Upsize To 15 Project Administration Security Permissions Author 227 Clean 76 Clients 233 Compact EAP File 84 Comparison Why 80 Configure 9 Data Integrity 76 Data Transfer 79 File EABase 9 Integrity Check 76 183 118 154 173 Share DBMS Repository 99 Share Network Drive 99 Share Replication 99 Transfer 22 WhatIs A 7 Project Branch Check In 162 Check Out 162 Project Browser Exclamation Marks 195 Version Control Indicators Project File Create 6 Example 8 Open 8 Property Validation Attribute 94 Element 94 Feature 94 Relationship 94 Q Quick Start Auditing R Rational Rose And XMI 104 Export To 109 Rational Software Architect Models 108 Rational Software Modeler Import
150. e Architect The project you have selected to open was created with an older version of Enterprise Architect To work correctly it must now be upgraded to the latest version This wizard will guide you through the upgrade procedure The Upgrade Wizard e Advises you of the necessity to upgrade e Advises you to back up the current project it is essential to back up before any changes are made e Checks which upgrade path is required e Guides you through the steps to perform the upgrade e Opens the newly converted project UML Model Management Upgrade Models The Upgrade Wizard 75 Notes e For replicated models If the wizard detects the project you are opening is a replica and not a Design Master a different upgrade path 757 is required e Once upgraded the project cannot be opened with the version of Enterprise Architect in which it was created 2 2 Upgrade Replicas Models that have replication features added might have to be upgraded differently from regular projects If the model is a Design Master 10 the root model of all other replicas then you can upgrade the model to suit the current version of Enterprise Architect After upgrading a Design Master you should re create the replicas rather than synchronizing If the model is not a Design Master Enterprise Architect must first remove the replication features then upgrade the project in the normal manner The Upgrade Wizard 74 guides you thro
151. e Architect if security is enabled you must have both Export XMI 183 and Import XMI 185 permissions to use the CSV Import Export option See User Security in UML Models e You import the CSV file into a selected package if this package or any element within the package has a lock on it you cannot import the CSV file into it The Import option on the dialog is grayed out When importing Enterprise Architect checks the specification to see if there is an EAGUID field included If there is Enterprise Architect attempts to locate the element identified by the EAGUID and if successful updates the current element rather than creating a new one If no EAGUID field is defined or Enterprise Architect cannot locate the identified element a new element is created and placed in the current package Note that during import Type is a mandatory field in the source file and must match one or more of the legal Enterprise Architect element types For example requirement or class See the Enterprise Architect Object Model section in SDK For Enterprise Architect The format and content of the source data file should resemble the following fy requds OpenOffice org Calc File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help a5 al Kk A B D E F G H Name Type Notes Phase Version Status Priority Difficulty FR27 Retrieval of histo Requirement The system must be able t 1 1Approved Medium Medium FR28 Transmission of Requirement 1 1 Approved
152. e Architect Provides For You to Call Enterprise Architect provides the subfunction SetLastError message outputMethod for you to call to log and or report the provided message to the user You can also call the following functions NewSearch name group Create a new search object to The created search guid taskcount be included in WorkflowSearches Initializes each member NewTask name Create a new task object to be The created task conditioncount included in a search Initializes each member NewCondition column Create a new condition object The created condition operator value to be included in a task Initializes each member 12 14 Change Password There are two ways in which a user s password can be changed when security is set e A user can select the Change Password menu option and change their own password e The Administrator can set or change any user s password on the Maintain Users dialog Note A user must have Change Password 183i permission to change a password the initial Admin administrator automatically has this permission User Change If security is set and you want to change your own password follow the steps below 1 Select the Project Security Change Password menu option The Change Password dialog displays UML Model Management User Security Change Password 191 In the Enter old password field type your current password In the New password
153. e Tools Data Sources ODBC option The ODBC Data Sources Administrator window displays 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 36 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository User DSN System DSN File DSN Drivers Tracing Connection Pooling About User Data Sources Name Driver Microsoft dBase Driver dbf a Excel Files Microsoft Excel Driver xls MS Access Database Microsoft Access Driver mdb Regression MySQL ODBC 3 51 Driver An ODBC User data source stores information about how to connect to E the indicated data provider A User data source is only visible to you and can only be used on the current machine 2 Click on the Add button The Create New Data Source dialog displays enabling you to add a new DSN Select a driver for which you want to set up a data source gt Name Microsoft dBase Driver dbf Microsoft dBase VFP Driver dbf Microsoft dBase Treiber dbf Microsoft Excel Driver 2ds Microsoft Excel Treiber xds m Microsoft FoxPro VFP Driver dbf Microsoft ODBC for Oracle 4 omy FIM HA opon apleg ss _ n 1 2n 4 m 3 Select the DataDirect OpenEdge SQL driver from the list 4 Click on the Finish button The DSN Configuration dialog displays 5 Enter the following configuration details e The Data Source Name e The Description optional e The Host Name and Port Number
154. e Use data source name field click on the drop down arrow and select the ODBC driver you set up to connect to your ASA repository Click on the Test Connection button to confirm that the details are correct If your test succeeded click on the OK button If your test did not succeed revise your settings After you have clicked on the OK button the Connection Name amp Type dialog displays 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 68 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Connection Name amp Type 5 Pl Encrypt Connection String Database Server ODBC Connection Adaptive Server Anywhere E Lazy Load Server Port DSN Give the connection a suitable name so you can recognize it in the Recent Projects panel on the Open Project dialog 8 If required select the Encrypt Connection String checkbox This encrypts and hides the connection details of the database from the users that the connection string is given to If required select the Lazy Load checkbox to not load the full project view when the model is loaded Instead only the parts that are necessary to display the visible portion of the tree are loaded This means that a model loads faster and users can begin work sooner but at the expense of later small delays as Enterprise Architect loads specific portions of the model If required select the Us
155. e WAN Optimization 7 checkbox To improve performance over a Wide Area Network remote database calls can be routed through a WAN Optimizer that compresses the data returned from the repository reducing transfer time If you select this checkbox complete the next three fields see your administrator for the correct values Otherwise go to step 17 In the Server field type the network name or address of the optimizer server In the Port field type the port on which the server is running on the remote machine In the DSN field type the data source name of the database as it appears on the remote machine Click on the OK button to complete the configuration 1 4 11 6 MSDE Server Data Repository Follow the steps in Connect to an SQL Server Repository 5 1 4 11 7 Progress OpenEdge Repository Note 1 This feature is available in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions In order to use an OpenEdge data repository you must connect to it in Enterprise Architect first follow the steps below In the Open Project dialog 84 select the Connect to Server checkbox UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 69 2 Click on the Browse button as you normally would to browse for a project As you have selected Connect to Server the Data Link Properties dialog displays instead of the Browse Directories dialo
156. e consists of e The Windows username of the user that made the change Note If security is enabled the name is of the format WindowsUsername SecurityUser e When the change was made e The path of the change for example Class Class Attribute Att Attribute Constraint Constraint Changes The changes are displayed in a table format showing the Property or data item name its original value before the change and its value after the change If you double click on an item in the list of changes or right click and select the Show Differences context menu option the Difference dialog displays This shows the specific changes that have been made highlighting the edited created or deleted characters UML Model Management Auditing The Audit View 203 13 3 1 Audit View Controls The Audit View controls provide a variety of settings for controlling auditing and the display of audit records Filter Settings Refresh etd J Fitter By Date Time 2 lype Audit Settings Search User Display synchronized with Project Browser Mod Help Deletions Viewing log items recorded today e The Load Advanced or Raw 20 modes or Refresh Standard 2041 mode button reloads the Audit Tree updated with any new audit results e The Search button enables you to search through log items for a particular area Log Items can be searched by Name Type or GUID The items are loaded and filtered with the current Sort By Time
157. e current user is a member of the current user the group with the specified name WorkflowContext This object provides information about the object currently in context It is filled by Enterprise Architect before any searches except GetWorkflowTasks 1851 are run It has the following properties MetaType the type of the current object either an Enterprise Architect core type or a profile specified metatype Name as found in the object Properties dialog Status as found in the object Properties dialog Phase as found in the object Properties dialog Version as found in the object Properties dialog GUID the GUID of the object Stereotypes an array of strings for the stereotypes applied to this object Tags an array of Tagged Values providing e Name the Tagged Value name e Value the Tagged Value value Tests an array of tests only filled during an A low call after the PreAllow call has specified that tests are required Provides the following details as found in the Testing window e Name e Status e RunBy e CheckedBy e TestClass e TestType The WorkflowContext object also calls the following function TagValue TagName Get the value from a named Returns the value of the first Tagged tag Value with that name or an empty string if no Tagged Value with that name exists Workflow Data Structures Objects You Can Fill WorkflowStatus Use this to provide information on the status of the object Log
158. e data repository you must have the appropriate version of Oracle 9i 10g or 11g and MDAC 2 6 or higher installed and access permission to create a new database Please note that setting up Oracle and the issues involved are beyond the scope of this manual Consult your program documentation for guidance Sparx Systems provide SQL scripts to create the required tables how you create the database and execute that script are up to you e Registered users can obtain the scripts from the Registered Corporate edition Resources page of the Sparx Systems website at http www sparxsystems com registered reg ea oracle instructions html e Trial users can obtain the scripts from the Corporate edition Resources page of the Sparx Systems website at http www sparxsystems com resources corporate Create the Data Repository Oracle repositories are created without any data so you must perform a project data transfer 7 in Enterprise Architect to copy a suitable starter project If you are starting from scratch EABase EAP misa good starting point If you want to use an existing EAP model you can upsize 19 it follow the steps below 1 Create a new database on the Oracle server 2 Connect to the newly created database with a program such as Oracle SQL Plus or SQL Plus Worksheet 3 Execute the script Oracle_BaseModel sql which creates the base model tables and indexes for an Enterprise Architect Project Note Use the Project Data Tra
159. e menu option The Export Package to XMI dialog displays UML Model Management MOF Export MOF to XMI 129 Root P PackageMOF Filename C ProjMan MOFPackages zf xml Stylesheet Lo y Optional stylesheet to post process XMI content General Options For Export to Other Tools Export Diagrams E Enable full EA Roundtrip Export Altemate Images XMI Type Format XMI Output ype MOF 1 4 XMI 1 2 E Write Log file Unisys Rose Format cid Exclude EA Tagged Values Generate Diagram Images Waming These options are for exporting ormat EA mode elements to other tools only Epot cose Hee In the Filename field type a name for the XMI file De select the Enable full EA Roundtrip checkbox In the XMI Type field click on the drop down arrow and select MOF 1 3 or MOF 1 4 Click on the Export button and wait until the Progress bar reads 100 7 Once your file has been created you can view it by clicking on the View XMI button MOF diagrams exported to XMI can be imported using the regular import XMI features of Enterprise Architect See Import from XMI 106 oa ew 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 130 Version Control 11 Version Control Enterprise Architect supports version control of packages and their component sub packages to a central version control repository You can place any individual packages View nodes or model root nodes under vers
160. e modell2101 at a later time see Baseline UML Models e XMI 2 1 to generate output in XMI 2 1 format 10 Select the Unisys Rose Format checkbox to export in Rose UML 1 3 XMI 1 1 format 11 Select the Exclude EA Tagged Values checkbox to exclude Enterprise Architect specific information from the export to other tools 12 Click on the Export button Notes XMI 2 1 exported by Enterprise Architect 7 0 or later might not be correctly imported into earlier versions of Enterprise Architect When you select to apply a Data Type Definition DTD during an XMI 1 1 export the UML_EA DTD file is written to the output directory into which the XML files are written unless the UML_EA DTD file is already present in the directory No error is generated if the UML_EA DTD file is not present in this directory during the XMI export Important When exporting and importing with XMI 1 0 with Enterprise Architect some loss of data occurs due to the limitations of XMI 1 0 8 2 Import from XMI You can import a package from an XMI XML based file This enables you to move Enterprise Architect Model elements between models for distributed development manual version control 161 and other benefits Important Note When you import an XML file over an existing package ALL information in the current package is deleted first Before you import the XML file please make sure you do not have important changes that you do not want to lose If y
161. e not required for models stored in a DBMS e Rename a Project 8 e Compact a Project 8 e Repair a Project 85 5 1 Rename a Project Important The only way to rename an Enterprise Architect project is at the Windows file system level To rename an Enterprise Architect project EAP file follow these steps If you have the project open shut it down Ensure no other users have the file open Open Windows Explorer and navigate to the project Rename the project file using Windows Explorer You should keep the EAP extension the same to preserve compatibility with the default project type as installed in the registry at installation time SAO 5 2 Compact a Project After some time a project EAP file might benefit from compacting to conserve space Notes e Compacting shuffles the contents of the model around eliminating unused space and generally reducing the size of your model file e Inthe Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect if security is enabled you must have Administer Databasel1831 permission to compact a project See User Security in UML Models To compact a project follow the steps below 1 Ensure that no users have the target project open 2 Select the Tools Manage EAP File Compact EAP File menu option 3 Follow the on screen instructions to complete the process Warning Always compact and repair projects on a loc
162. e on your machine dating back to the last time you updated your local copy of each version controlled package So if you are planning to work on a model whilst disconnected from version control it is a very good idea to make sure that you have the latest versions of all packages before you disconnect The Get All Latestl157 option makes this a simple task O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 172 User Security 12 User Security What is User Security in Enterprise Architect User security in Enterprise Architect can be used to limit the access to update functions within the model Elements can be locked per user or per group Where user security is enabled a password is required to log in to the model Security in Enterprise Architect is not designed to prevent unauthorized access rather it is intended as a means of improving collaborative design and development by preventing concurrent editing and limiting the possibility of inadvertent model changes by users not designated as model authors With workflow administration permissions 183 you can also develop workflow scripts 187 using the Scripter window Workflow scripts validate and control 1881 user input User Security Basics User security is available in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect It offers two policies the standard security mode and the rigorous security mode e Inthe st
163. e opened the design master and then synchronized the replicas with the master You cannot directly upgrade a replica 102 Avoid Change Collisions If two or more people make changes to the same element for example a Class Enterprise Architect arbitrarily overwrites one person s change with another s To avoid this different users should work on different packages However since Enterprise Architect does not enforce this rule it is possible for users work to conflict To minimize the difficulties this causes please note the following guidelines e f users are likely to have worked in the same area of the model they should both witness the synchronization and confirm that they are happy with the net result e f small pieces of information have been lost they should be typed into one of the merged models after synchronization e If alarge piece of information has been lost for example a large Class note that was overwritten by another user who had made a minor change to the same Class use the Resolve Replication Conflicts 10 dialog Disable or Remove Replication Features If you have converted a project to a design master but now want to disable the replication 10 features use the Tools Manage EAP File Remove Replication menu option Make sure you back up all your files first 7 4 1 Design Masters A design master is the first converted Enterprise Architect project that supports replication From the design master
164. e the Dockable Windows section in Using Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Too The above diagram instantly shows how two levels of Requirements are realized by Use Cases and which Requirement is realized by which Use Case s It also shows how some of the Use Cases are implemented by Class elements Further you can drill down on the Use Cases or in other Traceability diagrams any other composite elements to display more detailed diagrams showing how the Use Case meets the Requirement The Close Account Use Case for example contains a Communication diagram and a Sequence diagram You can tailor your Traceability diagrams to depict any level of granularity and any stages of development that are appropriate You might narrow the above diagram for example to show development from just the Remove User Requirement and extend it to include Interfaces Components Test Case elements or any other facet of the system or process Whilst the Traceability diagram itself provides information on the definition design and implementation of a business process feature much more information can be obtained using tools 224 such as the Relationships Matrix and relationships Traceability window O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 224 Traceability Traceability Tools 16 3 Traceability Tools The model structure 21 and Traceability diagram 222 act as starting points for tracing the definition design and implementation of a feat
165. e this snapshot at intervals and if there are changes in the items collected by the defined search to trigger a notification to you of such changes This enables you to monitor work flow 216 and other events of concern to you Baselines Enterprise Architect Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions provides a facility to create a Baseline 208 or snapshot of the contents of a selected package and its child packages at a particular point in time enabling you to later compare that branch of the model at that time with the current state of the branch Baselines are stored in the same XML format as is used for version control but are stored within the project in compressed format You can also have parallel copies of parts of your model for team development and create Baselines within each copy to merge changes into the project master Differencing Differencing Diff or Comparel210 enables you to explore the differences between the current state of a specific part of your project and previous or parallel versions captured in a Baseline or an XMI 1 1 file on disk Merges Once Differencing is complete you can merge information from the Baseline into the current project it is not possible to go the other way You can merge information manually change by change or automatically by electing to merge in all changes in one batch procedure You can also revert completely to the original Baseline b
166. e used Version Control products supported by Enterprise Architect include MS Team Foundation Server Subversion CVS or any other version control product that provides an MS SCC compliant interface e Subversion is available from http www subversion tigris ora e CVS is available from http www wincvs org UML Model Management Version Control Version Control Setup 135 Note If you are using the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering or Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect with security enabled you must also set up permissions to configure and use version control See the List of Available Permissions 184 topic for further information Typically there should be e A server component that manages a version control repository e Client components on the workstations that Enterprise Architect uses to communicate with the server A version control client must be installed on every machine where you run Enterprise Architect and want to access your version control system Once the version control software has been installed and configured to use your installed version control product you must define a Version Control Configuration within Enterprise Architect Version control can be assigned to individual packages view nodes or root nodes in Enterprise Architect Each package can only be linked to one Version Control Configuration at a time although it is possible to connect multiple contr
167. eate a New Project Enterprise Architect projects can be created via the File New Project menu option which displays the Save New Enterprise Architect Project dialog Select a directory and enter a file name for your project then click on the Save button Once the project has been saved the Select Model s 10 dialog displays which makes a selection of Model Packages available Select the Model Packages to include and click on the OK button Enterprise Architect adds a model containing the selected Model Packages to the Project Browser You can also add Model Packages to the project using the New Model From Pattern icon in the Project Browser toolbar Alternatively new projects can be created from the Start Page select the Create a New Project option See Using Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool The Model Wizard The Model Wizard is used to add a selection of Model Packages to the project through the Select Model s dialog The EABase Project File The default project file EABase EAP is supplied when you install Enterprise Architect By default the example project file is stored in your Enterprise Architect installation directory The default installation directories depending on which version you have installed are e Registered version C Program Files Sparx Systems EA e Trial version C Program Files Sparx Systems EA Trial e Lite version C Program Files Sparx Systems EA Lite Design a Custom Template You can cu
168. ect does not work with Subversion releases earlier than Subversion 1 2 Before Enterprise Architect can be used with Subversion the appropriate software must be installed by a Subversion administrator Ask your system administrator to obtain and install the Subversion server and client applications Enterprise Architect must use the Subversion command line client to communicate with the Subversion server it cannot use other clients such as TortoiseSVN 1531 Important Before you attempt to use Subversion through Enterprise Architect you must first verify that you can use the Subversion command line client to access and operate on files within the working copy folder that Enterprise Architect will use Your environment must be set up such that you can perform these operations without ever being prompted for user ID or password For further information please see the topic Caching Client Credentials in the official Subversion documentation The official Subversion documentation can be found at http www svnbook red bean com en 1 4 index htmi while executable files for Subversion can be obtained from http Awww subversion tigris org project_packages html binary packages UML Model Management Version Control Version Control Setup 149 You require the Windows executables for your client machines running Enterprise Architect in the windows environment If you plan to run your Subversion server on a non windows platfor
169. ed users on the Corporate edition Resources page of the Sparx website at http www sparxsystems com registered reg ea corp ed html 3 Run the script to create all required data structures Note See Create a New Adaptive Server Anywhere Repository 467 You now have an empty database and can transfer an existing model into the server Stage Three Transfer the Data 1 Open Enterprise Architect click on the Cancel button on the Open Project screen to open with no project loaded Select the Tools Data Management Project Transfer menu option The Project Transfer dialog displays UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 15 8 9 Transfer Type EAPto EAP DBMSto EAP EAP to DBMS gt DBMS to DBMS Source and Target Projects Source Project Target Project Logfile V Logfile C Temp asa_base_transfer log Caution The Target Project will be erased prior to transfer Please ensure you have backed up target if necessary Transfer Close Progress In the Transfer Type panel select EAP to DBMS In the Source Project field type the name of the EAP file to upsize to ASA At the right of the Target Project field click on the Browse button The Datalink Properties dialog displays Select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers from the list then click on the Next button In the Use Data source name fi
170. egin the export process When the export is complete open the recipient Enterprise Architect project In the Project Browser navigate to the location to import the package into Right click to display the context menu and select the Import Export Import package from XMI file menu option The Import Package from XMI dialog displays UML Model Management 83 Project Data Transfer Copy Packages Between Projects Root Pad Requirements Model Filename C Requirements Reg020509 Options Import Diagrams E Strip GUID s Write Log file Import using single transaction Not recommended for large imports treat mporzd Datatypes a 8 Select the appropriate options and filename see the Import from XMI 106 topic for further information 9 Click on the Import button The package is copied from the source project to the destination project Note If the package you are importing already exists in the target project that is it has been imported previously you must either import over the existing package or select the Strip GUIDs option in which case Enterprise Architect creates a replica of the original package O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 84 Model Maintenance 5 Model Maintenance N This topic highlights some administrative functions you might have to carry out to maintain your model Note that this maintenance applied to models created as EAP files The processes ar
171. el See Also e Version Control Nested Packages 137 11 5 1 1 Version Control Nested Packages In releases of Enterprise Architect later than version 4 5 when you save a package to the version control system only stub information is exported for any nested packages This ensures that information in a nested package is not inadvertently over written by a top level package When checking out a package Enterprise Architect does not modify or delete nested packages only the top level package is modified As a consequence of this behavior if you check out or get a version controlled package with nested packages not already in your model you see stubs in the model for the nested packages only If you select the Get All Latest option from the version control menu Enterprise Architect populates these new stubs from the version control system Using the above technique you can populate a large and complex model from only the root packages using Get All Latest to recursively iterate through the attached and nested packages This is a powerful and efficient means of managing your project and simplifies handling very large models even in a distributed environment It is recommended you do not mix versions of Enterprise Architect later than version 4 5 with earlier versions when sharing a version controlled model If this is necessary it is best to go to the Version Control Settings 1351 dialog and deselect the Save nested version controlled packa
172. el Branch context menu option uses Enterprise Architect s Model Branch Files of which there are few to retrieve information about the root package file and import the model branch The Model UML Model Management Version Control Use Version Control 167 Branch File records information such as the name and type of the version control configuration for the selected package and the relative filename of the version controlled XMI file associated with the package Before attempting to import a model branch you must have access to the version controlled XMI files that represent the model branch to be imported That is there must be a working copy folder accessible from the machine on which Enterprise Architect is running that is associated with the Version Control repository containing those XMI files It is not necessary to have the relevant Version Control Configuration set up within Enterprise Architect before issuing this command Enterprise Architect prompts you to complete specification of the configuration if necessary The Import a Model Branch context menu option is only enabled for packages that you the current user are able to edit as the imported model branch is inserted into the model under the selected package To import a model branch follow the steps below 1 Right click on the package into which the model branch is to be imported 2 Select the Package Control Import a Model Branch context menu opt
173. eld click on the drop down arrow and select the ODBC Data Source you configured to point to your new database Note See Connect to an Adaptive Server Anywhere Data Repository 657 for more information Click on the OK button If required select the Logfile checkbox and enter a path for the data transfer log file 10 Click on the Transfer button to begin the data transfer process When the process is complete you have upsized your model to Adaptive Server Anywhere and can now open it from Enterprise Architect 1 4 3 Upsize to Progress OpenEdge Before you set up Enterprise Architect for use with OpenEdge it is recommended that you run the project integrity check tool select the Tools Data Management Project Integrity Check 761 menu option on the base project to upsize to OpenEdge This ensures the data is clean before uploading Note You cannot move a model from a source EAP file of a version earlier than 3 5 0 Warning Before proceeding ensure MDAC 2 6 or higher is installed on your system O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 16 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository Upsizing Your Database You upsize your database for OpenEdge in three stages as follows Stage One Install OpenEdge Components 1 Install OpenEdge version 10 0B3 or higher 2 Install OpenEdge ODBC 10 0B or higher driver 3 Create a suitable ODBC Data Source to point to your new database Note
174. elect the Tools Manage EAP File Remove Replication menu option to open the Remove Replication Wizard 3 Enter the full path and file name of the project to have replication removed Click on the Next button 4 Enter the full path and file name of the base Enterprise Architect model with no replication to act as template Click on the Next button 5 Enter the full path and required file name for the output file Click on the Next button 6 Select whether to have a log file created and enter a file name for the log file 7 Click on the Run button to begin removing replication Enterprise Architect creates a new project containing all the model information Your model has now had replication removed and should be considerably smaller 7 4 5 Upgrade Replicas With new releases of Enterprise Architect there could be changes to the underlying project structure such as more tables or changed queries If you are using replicas to share and work with Enterprise Architect projects it is very important that you open the design master 10h before opening any of the replicas with an updated version of Enterprise Architect UML Model Management Model Sharing and Team Deployment Replication 103 Warning Upgrading Replicas takes special care Changes to the database design in a replica set can ONLY be done to the design master Next time the replicas are synchronized 102 with the master the design changes are prop
175. emplates RTF Tag and Language Options exports RTF word substitution templates see Report UML Model Management Reference Data Import and Export Reference Data 253 Creation in UML Models Test Types 243 17 7 2 Import Reference Data Itis possible to import reference data into your model in Enterprise Architect from a reference data xml file exported from another model or an iteration of the current model either e Manually 253 as required whenever you know there is new or changed data to apply or e Automatically 253 whenever the model is reloaded into Enterprise Architect if the file has changed since the previous import When you import data into Enterprise Architect the system merges the incoming data with the existing data If a record already exists it is updated to the new values If the record does not exist Enterprise Architect adds a new record Enterprise Architect never deletes records For a list and explanation of the data types you could import see the Export Reference Datal25 topic Import Data Manually To import data manually follow the steps below 1 Select the Tools Import Reference Data menu option The Import Reference Data dialog displays import File Shared File Filename Select Fie Select Datasets to Import Name impor Cose Help 2 Click on the Import File tab and on the Select File button then select the filename to imp
176. emx Files 106 Import uml2 Files 106 Recover Controlled Package Project 76 Red Border 195 Exclamation Mark Object Outline 195 Reference Data 226 130 198 116 195 UML Model Management Index 263 Reference Data 226 Cardinality Multiplicity 248 Clients 233 Constraint Status Types 238 Constraint Types 237 Estimation 244 Export 251 Export Introduction 250 General Types 235 Import Automatically 253 Import Manually 253 Import Introduction 250 Maintenance 242 Metrics 244 People 227 Problem Types 242 Project Author 227 Requirement Types 239 Resources 232 Roles 230 Scenario Types 240 Status Types 235 Stereotypes 245 Tagged Value Types 247 Testing Types 243 UML Types 245 Refresh Diagram 168 Project 168 View Of Shared Model 168 Relationship Matrix In Traceability 224 Reload Diagram 168 Model Shared 168 Project 168 View 168 Remove Package Control 113 Replication 102 Rename Project EAP File 84 Views 87 Repair Project EAP File 85 Replica Create 101 Synchronize 102 Upgrade 102 Replication Change Collisions 100 Disable 100 Introduction 100 Merge Rules 100 Remove 102 Using 100 Repository Access Permissions For 11 Adaptive Server Anywhere Create 46 Connect To 11 Create 11 MSDE Server Create 48 Progress OpenEdge Create 48 Set Up Database 11 Transfer Data Between 79 Require User Lock Apply User Lock 194 Release User Lock 194 Require User Lock Poli
177. ent using the Compare Diff 210utility The Compare utility is available in the Professional Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect It enables you to compare the current model with either an exported or a version controlled Enterprise Architect XMI file on disk as well as with a Baseline Baselines and Differencing are documented in Baseline UML Models Project Data Transfer Note This feature is available in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering Systems Engineering and Ultimate editions Enterprise Architect enables you to transfer project data 737 between project data repositories row by row table by table The Automation Interface The Enterprise Architect Automation Interface provides a way of accessing the internals of Enterprise Architect models to for example perform repetitive tasks or produce custom reports All development environments capable of generating ActiveX Com clients such as Microsoft C or Java should be able to connect to the Automation Interface The Automation Interface is documented in the Enterprise Architect Object Model topic of the SDK for Enterprise Architect Add Ins Add Ins are ActiveX COM objects that expose public Dispatch methods The Enterprise Architect Add In model builds on the features provided by the Automation Interface to enable you to extend the Enterprise Architect user interface and add functio
178. eotypes see SDK for Enterprise Architect Stereotypes can be modified to make use of metafiles image files or customized colors or to make use of the Enterprise Architect Shape Scripts 2461 to make new element shapes to determine the shape and dimensions of the element Note In the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect if security is enabled you must have Configure Stereotypes 1831 permission to add modify or delete stereotypes See User Security in UML Models To display the Stereotypes tab select the Settings UML menu option The UML Types dialog displays showing the Stereotypes tab O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 246 Reference Data UML Types Stereotypes Tagged Value Types Cardinaity Values Stereotype Stereotype Apples To Notes E Group name access dependency Public contents of target are _ Cha j generalization Activator E class Notes Activity callbehavior Activity Contains analysis classes e Arrow UML Profile Notes artifact artifact New Save Delete A Microsoft active server page aspect aspect UML Profile Notes Ovenide Appearance become Target is same as source but None bind Source instantiates target te Assign Remove Book Book boundary boundary boundary boundary boundary j boundary boundary boundary boundary business business business entity busin
179. epair EAP File menu option 5 Follow the on screen instructions Ensure Integrity of the Repaired Project An additional step you can use to ensure the integrity of your project is to use the Remove Replication feature Open Enterprise Architect but when you are prompted to open a project click on the Cancel button 2 Select the Tools Manage EAP File Remove Replication menu option Follow the prompts When you are prompted for the Replica Project Browser window for your problem project you might be given a warning about the project not being the Design Master accept this warning Click on the Next button w Browse for the clean project for example EABase eap Click on the Next button Enter the path and name of the new project to be created then click on the Next button Click on the Run button to run the removal process oO gt Once the removal process has been completed open the project and do a check of the project contents If the data is intact backup the old project and replace it with the new version 5 4 Manage Views The top level packages in a model below the project root nodes can be created as Views Views are used simply to subdivide the model into partitions such as Business Process Logical View or Dynamic View Unlike Model Packages they do not have automatically generated components and can be created only under a root node O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 86 Model Maintenance Mana
180. ermissions dialog Specific user permissions are added to permissions from group membership to provide an overall permission set Note You must have Security Manage Users 183 permission to assign permissions to users the initial Admin administrator automatically has this permission To set up single permissions for a user follow the steps below 1 Select the Project Security Manage Users menu option The Security Users dialog displays 2 Click on the Single Permissions button The User Permissions dialog displays UML Model Management User Security Set Up Single Permissions 181 Change Password Check Data Integrity 3 Select the checkbox against each specific permission to apply to this user Click on the Select All button to select all permissions for the user or click on the Deselect All button to clear all selected permissions 4 Click on the OK button to assign the selected permissions to the user Notes e A user s total permissions are those granted by Group Membership plus those granted by specific permission assignment e You can transport these user permissions between models using the Export Reference Data 25h and Import Reference Datal253 options on the Tools menu 12 7 View All User Permissions The All user permissions dialog shows a list of all permissions a user has derived from their individual profile and from their membership of security groups To d
181. ers dialog 5 Click on the Locations button and on the Locations dialog browse for and select the checkbox for the location to import from within the Active Directory Click on the OK button to return to the Select Users dialog 6 Inthe Enter the object names to select field either e type in the user IDs individually click on the examples link to see examples of the correct formats or e click on the Advance button to search for IDs the Select Users dialog redisplays with a Common Queries tab UML Model Management User Security Import User IDs From Active Directory 179 Select this object type Users From this location Entire Directory Common Queries Name Starts with v Desrten Bae wth Disabled accounts Non expiring password MA Search results Name RDN 7 Inthe Name and Description fields type any characters or text that helps identify the IDs you are searching for Click on the drop down arrow of the Starts with field and select the appropriate qualifier 8 If required select the Disabled accounts or Non expiring password checkboxes and or select a value in the Days since last logon field to further filter the IDs to search for 9 Click on the Find Now button to initiate the search and to display a list of IDs in the bottom panel of the dialog You can vary the types of information shown here by clicking on the Columns button and selecting the
182. erson registered as a Project Author If you are using a Windows Active Directory you can select names from the directory Click on the Browse button to display the Select Users 229 dialog You can also type a list of names separated by semi colons This enables you to define a group of people sharing a role such as a team of Developers Testers or Analysts Do not leave any spaces between the names and the semicolon Note If you enter multiple names Enterprise Architect adds them separately and in alphabetical order to the Defined Authors list If you then click on one of these names Enterprise Architect displays that name only in the Name field Specify the role the Project Author plays in the project such as Designer Analyst or Architect You can type a role name or click on the drop down arrow and select a role defined through the Project Roles 230 tab UML Model Management Reference Data People 229 If you type a role this is not added to the roles on the Project Roles tab Notes O Type any additional notes concerning the Project Author Defined Authors Review the Project Authors already defined Click on the Save button to add the new names to the Defined Authors list To add further Authors click on the New button To delete a Project Author click on the name in the Defined Authors list and click on the Delete button Note You can transport these author definitions
183. ess Database Engine from http www microsoft com downloads details aspx FamilyID 7554F536 8C28 4598 9B72 EF94E038C891 amp displaylang en Stage Two Transfer the Data 1 8 9 Open Enterprise Architect Click on the Cancel button on the Open Project screen to open with no project loaded Select the Tools Data Management Project Transfer menu option The Project Transfer dialog displays Transfer Type O EAP to EAP DBMS to EAP 5 EAP to DBMS 5 DBMS to DBMS Source and Target Projects Source Project mm Target Project a Logfile Foste Caution The Target Project will be erased prior to transfer Please ensure you have backed up target if necessary Transfer Close Help Progress In the Transfer Type panel select EAP to DBMS In the Source Project field type the name of the EAP file to upsize to Access 2007 At the right of the Target Project field click on the Browse button The Datalink Properties dialog displays Select Microsoft Office 12 0 Access Database Engine OLE DB Provider from the list then click on the Next button On the Data Source Details page of the Connection dialog type in the full path to the Access 2007 ACCDB file Click on the OK button to return to the Project Transfer dialog If required select the Logfile checkbox and type in a path and filename for the data transfer log file 10 Click on the Transfer button t
184. ess Order LJ REQ017 Remove User REQ029 Ship Order REQ018 Report on User Account REQ030 Package Order LJ REQO24 Secure Access REQO31 List Current Orders REQ025 Store User Details REQO33 Retrieve Books REQ026 Validate User REQO19 Manage Inventory REQ020 Receive Books REQ021 List Stock Levels REQ022 Order Books REQ023 Store and Manage Books REQ027 Add Books LA REQO32 Update Inventory Automated Purchasing Services REQO34 Add Cart Item E REQO35 Create Shopping Cart LJ REQO36 Search Inventory REQ037 Checkout Cart REQO38 Request Stock List LJ REQO039 Get Item Price LA REQ040 Get Item Availability Requirements in Manage Users Unit of Online Bookstore Process REQ017 Remove E User REQ025 Store User Detsils REQO11 Manage ELO REQ018 Repot E on User Account REQO26 Validate E REQ024 Secure E Access The Requirements diagram also makes it clear what Requirements form subsets of others or are components of more than one other Requirement 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 220 Traceability Packages and Elements Use Case Packages For Online Bookstore Process Use Case D Close Account D Create Account Delete User D List Current Orders Package Order D Process Order D Ship Order O Login D View Account details D View History
185. ess entity 17 5 1 1 Shape Editor The Shape Editor enables a Technology Developer to specify custom shapes via a scripting language that is to create Shape Scripts These custom shapes are drawn instead of the standard UML notation Each script is associated with a particular Stereotype and is drawn for every element of that stereotype UML Model Management Reference Data UML Types 247 Format EAShapeScript 1 0 import Export ok cancel Help Preview of main BASIC SHAPES shape main setfillcolor 255 0 0 R G B rectangle 0 0 90 30 x1 y1 x2 y2 setfillcolor 0 255 0 R G B ellipse 0 30 90 60 x1 y1 x2 y2 setfillcolor 0 0 255 R G B rectangle 0 60 90 90 x1 y1 x2 y2 EES Notes e Shape Scripts adopt the same color gradient settings as normal elements as defined in the Standard Colors page of the Options dialog e f an element s appearance is modified by a Shape Script many of the Advanced context menu options for that element are disabled see the Working With Elements section in UML Modeling With Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool For information on creating Shape Scripts see SDK for Enterprise Architect 17 5 2 Tagged Value Types Tagged Values are used in a variety of places within Enterprise Architect to specify additional information about an element or connector
186. ether a package is checked out to them or to some other user 6 The TFS Exe Path field displays the default installation path Click on the Select Path button if it is necessary to modify this field 7 Click on the Save button to save the configuration you have defined 8 The new configuration is added to the list in the Defined Configurations panel Note A new entry is also created in the Local Paths list with the same ID as the new version control configuration The Local Path entry records the Local Project path for use in subsequent path substitutions 9 When you have finished defining your version control configurations click on the Close button Additional Information on the Dialog Fields This model is private Specify whether all users connect to a single shared copy of the model such as a DBMS or each user connects to their own private copy of the model When unselected for shared models the option disables the File History Retrieve functionality when the selected package is checked out by another user This prevents modifications that might have been made by the other user from being discarded through importing a prior revision from version control Save nested version Set nested version controlled packages to stubs or fully expanded trees controlled packages to Defaults to selected Stubs only For a full halal of this option see Use Nested Version Control Packages Specify a configuration name that read
187. ewer See Using Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool From the perspective of model management or project management you could also use the Audit View 197 as a means of tracing the change history of a package or element See Auditing UML Models The Relationship Matrix also assists in this respect indicating the impact of changes in one element on others A Use Case exists because it defines how a Requirement is met if the Requirement is changed the Use Case and its dependent diagrams and elements should probably be changed if not deleted O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 226 Reference Data 17 Reference Data ev Reference data is used in many places to provide content for drop down list boxes Setting up a project often involves setting up the base set of reference types to use Reference data options can be set up from the Settings menu including e People 2271 e General Types 235 e Maintenance 24 e Metrics and Estimation 244 e UML 245 e Data Types 249 Having set up the reference data in a project you can also export and importl25 it between projects Note In the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect if security is enabled you must have Manage Reference Data Update 183 permission to update and delete reference items See User Security in UML Models eh People General Types Maintenance Pro
188. exity Factor Values see Project Management with Enterprise Architect e Estimation Technical Complexity Factor Values see Project Management with Enterprise Architect e General Constraint Types 2371 e General Effort Types see Project Management with Enterprise Architect e Import Component Types see the Code Engineering Settings topic in Code Engineering Using UML Models e Linked Document Templates see the Create Linked Document Templates topic in UML Modeling with Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool e Macro List Preprocessor macros see the Language Macros topic in Code Engineering Using UML Models e Maintenance Typesl242 both Problem Types and Test Types Model Authors 22A Model Data Types Codel24 and DDL see the Generate DDL topic in Code Engineering Using UML Models e Model Images see the Using the Image Manager topic in UML Modeling with Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool e Project Clients 285 e Project Glossary see Project Management with Enterprise Architect e Project Issues see Project Management with Enterprise Architect e Project Resources 2321 e Project Roles 230 e Project Tasks see Project Management with Enterprise Architect e Property Types Tagged Value Types see SDK for Enterprise Architect e Requirement Types 239 e Risk Types see Project Management with Enterprise Architect e Scenario Types 240 e Security Group Permission 183 see User Security in UML M
189. follows the filename Enterprise Architect must find and use this user ID when you create your version control configuration See the example dialog below 11 Launch Enterprise Architect and open or create the model containing the packages to place under version control 12 Select the Project Version Control Version Control Settings menu option The Version Control Settings dialog displays 13 Click on the New button enter a suitable name in the Unique ID 1441 field then click on the CVS radio button in the Type field UML Model Management Version Control Version Control Setup 143 Veion ona sings 4 This model is private for Shared models it is best to disable this check box Y Save nested version controlled packages to stubs only recommended Configuration Details Unique ID CVS_TEST Type scc cys Subversion TFS C stuff CSV Checkouts MRF_Test neil Workstation Settings CVS Exe Path C Program Files CVSNT cvs exe 14 To specify the Working Copy path 14 value click on the Select Path button Select the local folder in which to keep local working copies of the XML files to be stored in the Version Control repository 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 144 Version Control Version Control Setup Y Browse For Folder The local path used to transfer package files must be specified a CSV Checkouts a 4 je 08063273 d cvs
190. from within Windows Explorer using simple menu commands 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 154 Version Control Version Control Setup Note e Sparx Systems recommend that you test your local working copies by adding and committing a dummy file from the command prompt window e Manipulating Enterprise Architect s package files using tools that are external to Enterprise Architect could leave those files in a state that Enterprise Architect cannot use You can download TortoiseSVN from http www tortoisesvn tigris org 11 5 5 Version Control with TFS In order to use Team Foundation Server TFS for version control with Enterprise Architect all users must have either the TFS command line client tf exe or Microsoft s Team Foundation Server MSSCCI installed on their local machine Each intended user must also have an account that provides read write access to a workspace on the server This topic covers configuring version control using the TFS command line client To configure version control with the TFS MSSCCI client please follow the instructions in the Version Control with SCCh3 topic The following preliminary steps should be performed within TFS on each PC and for each user before making any attempt to define a Version Control Configuration within Enterprise Architect 154 that uses TFS Each user must set up a separate workspace for use in version control in Enterprise Architect containing a single loc
191. g Select the data you want to connect to OLE DB Provider s MediaCatalogDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogMergedDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogWebDB OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Outlook Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Search Microsoft OLE DB Providerfor SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider MSDataShape OLE DB Provider for Microsoft Directory Services 3 Select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers from the list 4 Click on the Next button The Connection tab displays O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 70 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository Provider Connection Advanced Al Specify the following to connect to ODBC data 1 Specify the source of data Use data source name openedge_ea Use connection string 2 Enter information to log on to the server User name oe_user Password eeeeseee E Blank password V Allow saving password 3 Enter the initial catalog to use al 5 In the Use data source name field click on the drop down arrow and select the ODBC driver you have set up to connect to your OpenEdge repository In the setup example 25 the driver title is openedge_users Enter the User name and Password Enter
192. ge Views They are a good way to extend the model depending on specific requirements and modeling techniques There are 6 main types of View each with their own package icon e Use Case View containing for example Use Case diagrams Analysis diagrams e Dynamic View containing for example Activity diagrams Communication diagrams Sequence diagrams State diagrams e Class View containing for example Class Models Code Engineering Data Models e Component View containing for example Component diagrams e Deployment View containing for example Deployment diagrams e Simple View For information on these diagram types see the UML Dictionary SG Views Use Case View Dynamic View Class View a Component View Deployment View Simple View You can use the first five categories or devise your own based on the Simple View You can create 867 Views rename 87 them move them into a different order or delete 887 them Do this by right clicking the mouse on the selected View to open the context menu and choose the appropriate option 5 4 1 Add Views The example below shows an additional view called Java Code View which has been appended to the end of the Views list a Views Eclipse Plugin Use Case View Dynamic View Class View Component View Deployment view Simple view Java Code View Create a View To create a View follow the steps below 1 Right click on the model root node in the P
193. ges to stubs only checkbox setting Enterprise Architect to the pre version 4 5 behavior for the current model only Model Settings This model is private for Shared models it is best to disable this check box V Save nested version controlled packages to stubs only recommended 11 5 2 Version Control with SCC To set up an SCC version control configuration you must e Set up the source code control provider with SCC and e Connect the Enterprise Architect model to version control with SCC See also the topic on version control with SCC when Upgrading at Enterprise Architect 4 51140 Set Up the Source Code Control Provider with SCC To set up the third party source code control provider see the documentation provided with that application A repository must be set up using the SCC provider and access to that repository must be available to all intended users Connect an Enterprise Architect Model to Version Control with SCC To connect an Enterprise Architect model to version control follow the steps below 1 Open or create the Enterprise Architect model to place under version control 2 Select the Project Version Control Version Control Settings menu option The Version Control Settings dialog displays 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 138 Version Control Version Control Setup Model Settings This model is private for Shared models it is best to disable this check box V Save nested ve
194. get started with Sybase Central follow the steps below 1 Create a new database e ile Edit View Tools Connections Help Log Viewer 8 E GlYXRA Plug ins Options SQL Anywhere 1 Create Database o MobiLink 11 gt Upgrade Database QAnywhere 11 gt Backup Database i g UltraLite 11 gt Restore Database D View and ed Create Backup Images maintenance on a database Unload Database ik Debug a stored procedure functio event or trigger in a database Extract Database Validate Database Profile a database application Translate Log File 2 Open Interactive SQL and execute the AS SQL script File Edit SQL Data Favorites Tools Window Help 4 IF EXISTS SELECT 1 FROM sysobjects WHERE name t_attribute DROP TABLE t_attribute 5 60 6 IF EXISTS SELECT 1 FROM sysobjects WHERE name t_attributetag DROP TABLE t_attributetag 7 G0 8 IF EXISTS SELECT 1 FROM sysobjects WHERE name t_authors DROP TABLE t_authors 3 60 10 IF EXISTS SELECT 1 FROM sysobjects WHERE name t_cardinality DROP TABLE t_cardinality 11 co 12 IF EXISTS SELECT 1 FROM sysobjects WHERE name t_category DROP TABLE t_category 13 60 14 IF EXISTS SELECT 1 FROM sysobjects WHERE name t_clients DROP TABLE t_clients 15 co 16 IF EXISTS SELECT 1 FROM sysobjects WHERE name t_complexitytypes DROP TABLE t_complexitytypes 17 60 18 IF EXISTS SELECT
195. greSQL Repository 43 Options Compare Utility 213 Create Progress OpenEdge Repository 48 Meta Object Facility Create SQL Server Repository 40 Introduction 125 Enterprise Architect Project Files 6 Metrics 244 Set Up Adaptive Server Anywhere ODBC Driver Migration 30 From UML 1 3 76 Set Up Database Model Files 11 To UML2 0 76 Set Up MySQL ODBC Driver 25 Model Set Up ODBC Driver 24 Add To Project 6 Set Up PostgreSQL ODBC Driver 27 Connect To Version Control Using TFS 154 Set Up Progress OpenEdge ODBC Driver 35 Data Integrity 76 Model Maintenance EAP Integrity Check 76 Compact Project 84 Integrity Run SQL Patches 78 Introduction 84 Manage 2 Rename Project 84 Package Create Using Model Wizard 10 Repair Project 85 Pattern 10 Model Management Sharing 98 Add Ins 2 What Is A 2 Auditing 2 Model Branch Automation Interface 2 EAB File 166 Baselines And Differences 2 Apply Version Control 165 In Enterprise Architect 2 Check In 162 Introduction 2 Check Out 162 Model Files 2 Export 166 Project Data Transfer 2 File 166 Project Sharing 2 Import 166 Project Team Review 2 Model Changes Replication 2 Auditing 197 User Security 2 Record 197 Version Control 2 Model File Model Validation Connect To ASA Data Repository 65 Configure 92 Connect To Data Repository 49 Element Composition Rule 93 Connect To MSDE Server Data Repository 68 Object Constraint Language 90 Connect To MySQL Data Repository 50 OCL 90 Connect To Oracle 10g Data
196. hanges e The Traceability 34 of model development e Use of the Automation Interface 44 and Add Ins 4 to automate and extend Enterprise Architect functionality e The transfer of data 41 between projects in similar or different databases e Replication 4 of models for remote sharing of development e A Team Review 4 for distributing and discussing information concerning a model or project Project Files and Data Repositories An Enterprise Architect project is stored in a data repository Enterprise Architect enables you to work with EAP files 6 a Microsoft JET database In the Enterprise Architect Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions you can also work with DBMS repositories 6 such as e SQL Server 407 e Access 2007 37 e MySQL 38 e Oracle 9i 10g or 11gl 437 e PostgreSQL 434 e Adaptive Server Anywherel 467 e MSDE Server 48 e Progress OpenEdge 48 Information on how to get started with projects can be found in the Quick Start Create a Projecttopic in Getting Started with Enterprise Architect UML Model Management Project Sharing Note This functionality is available in the Corporate Professional Business and Software Engineering Systems Engineering and Ultimate editions The Desktop edition is intended for single users so does not support shared files Enterprise Architect enables project sharing 994 for efficient manageme
197. he model 13 If required select the Use WAN Optimization 724 checkbox To improve performance over a Wide Area Network remote database calls can be routed through a WAN Optimizer that compresses the data returned from the repository reducing transfer time If you select this checkbox complete the next two fields see your administrator for the correct values Otherwise go to step 16 14 In the Server field type the network name or address of the optimizer server 15 In the Port field type the port on which the server is running on the remote machine 16 Click on the OK button to complete the configuration 1 4 11 3 Oracle Data Repository Note This feature is available in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions In order to use an Oracle 9i 10g or 11g data repository you must connect to it in Enterprise Architect first You can connect using either OLE DB 557 or ODBC 587 Using Oracle OLE DB Provider To connect to your Oracle data repository using the Oracle OLE DB Provider follow the steps below In the Open Project dialog 8 select the Connect to Server checkbox 2 Click on the Browse button as you normally would to browse for a project As you have selected the Connect to Server checkbox the Data Link Properties dialog displays instead of the Browse Directories dialog 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 56 Enterprise Architect
198. he selected package and all of its child packages display the Select Packages to Check Inl163 dialog listing all version controlled packages within that branch that are checked out to you You can then select packages in the displayed list to be submitted for check in Check Out Branch For the selected package check out the package and recursively check out all of its contained sub packages 1641 Retrieves the latest version of the packages from the central repository overwriting the current packages After check out the packages are available for editing Check In Submit the currently selected package to the central repository Enterprise Architect prompts you to enter optional comments describing changes to the packages Check Out Retrieve the latest version of the currently selected package from the central repository overwriting the current packages After check out the UML Model Management Version Control Use Version Control 159 Menu Option amp Function Keys Po packages are available for editing Undo Check Out Cancel all changes you have made to the currently selected package This restores the model to the state it was in before the package was checked out leaving the select package and sub packages locked Get Latest Retrieve the latest revision of the package from the repository Available only for packages that are checked in Get All Latest Retrieve the latest revision of all version contro
199. he utility can only compare with an XMI 1 1 file Enterprise Architect has a comprehensive and powerful differencing utility built in This utility enables you to compare a model branch in Enterprise Architect with e A Baseline created using the Baseline functionality Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions e A Baseline stored in a different model e An XML 1 1 file on disk created previously using the Enterprise Architect XML export facility user selects UML Model Management Baselines Differencing and Merges The Compare Utility Diff 211 file or e The current version controlled XMI 1 1 file on disk as created when using Version Control in Enterprise Architect file automatically selected Compare diff lets you explore what has changed within a model over time and how previous versions of a model branch differ from what is currently in the model It is even possible to do a full model comparison by exporting all of Model A to XMI then using Compare Model to File from within the current model Model B Comparing and checking model development at various points in the process is an important aspect of managing change and development keeping track of what is being modified and ensuring the development and design process is on track Access to the Compare utility is available from 1 The Baseline 2081 dialog 2087 from the Project Browser context menu selec
200. heckbox 9 Click on the OK button The Add Comment window displays Please enter a comment for Package Addition EA Package addition 1 06 2009 3 48 10 PM This window displays the date and time at which the package was put under version control 10 If required type any further comments in the window Click on the OK button Enterprise Architect places the package under the version control configuration you selected and marks the package in the Project Browser with the version controlled checked out or not checked outl1321 icons as appropriate 11 6 3 Use Existing Configuration Once a version control configuration has been defined in one model it is possible to add the configuration to other models To use this feature follow the steps below Open the model that is to have the predefined version control configuration added to it 2 Right click on any package in the Project Browser and select the Package Control Version Control Settings context menu option The Version Control Settings 135 dialog displays 3 Click on the New button 4 Inthe Unique ID field click on the drop down arrow and select one of the previously defined version control configurations 5 Click on the Save button to confirm the version control configuration 11 6 4 Validate Package Configurations You can test the validity of the version control settings associated with each version controlled package within your current model To do this select
201. her users packages without explicitly having to check them out but by simply refreshing your view of the model e Version control regulates access to packages and maintains package revision history Multiple Private An Enterprise Architect model is created by a single user who configures it for models version control The model file is then distributed to other users with each user storing their own private copy of the model e Users update their model s packages through version control e Version control regulates access to packages and maintains package revision history e Other users new packages are retrieved using the Get Package menu option Shared packages Individual users create separate Enterprise Architect models but share one or more packages e Users share packages through version control Standard packages A company might have a standard set of packages which are broadly shared on a read only basis e Individual users retrieve packages with the Get Package menu option For a discussion of how each of these arrangements might be used see the Version Control white paper htto www sparxsystems com resources whitepapers index html Version Control Indicators Packages under version control are identified in the Project Browser by icons that indicate the current status of the package leon Indicates that This package is controlled 110 and is represented by an XMI file on disk Version control either is
202. ht click on the package icon at the root of the model branch that is to be checked in and select the Package Control Check In Branch context menu option The Select Packages to Check in dialog displays listing all version controlled packages within the branch that you have checked out 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 164 Version Control Use Version Control 4 5 Click on the package to check in or use e Cirl click to add or remove several individual packages e Shift click to select a range of packages e All to select all packages listed e None to clear all selected packages Click on the OK button to check in the selected packages If required enter a comment when prompted to do so This comment applies to all packages that you have checked in Each package icon changes to indicate that the packages have been checked in Check Out Branch 1 2 3 In the Project Browser right click on the name of the root package of the model branch to be checked out and select the Package Control Check Out Branch context menu option The selected package and all of its contained sub packages are recursively checked out Any packages that cannot be checked out are listed in a message box with a brief description of the problem For example The package is already checked out by user Fred When Project Security is enabled in Lock to Edit mode Enterprise Architect prompts you t
203. ible to you and can only be used on the current machine Aoo 2 Click on the Add button The Create New Data Source dialog displays enabling you to add a new DSN 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 26 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository Select a driver for which you want to set up a data source Name Microsoft dBase Driver dbf Microsoft dBase VFP Driver dbf Microsoft dBase Treiber dbf Microsoft Excel Driver xds Microsoft Excel Treiber xis Microsoft FoxPro VFP Driver dbf Microsoft ODBC for Oracle s an 1 n menos m 3 Select MySQL ODBC 5 1 Driver from the list 4 Click on the Finish button The MySQL Connector ODBC dialog displays 5 Enter the following configuration details e A data source name for the connection e A description optional e The host address of the DBMS server e User name and password e The database name on the selected server See the example below WN Myst Connector ODBC Connection Parameters Data Source Name Changes Development Data 192 342 0 1 Port 3306 PDO vo EABase loc cancel j ep UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 27 6 Click on the Details gt gt button and Flags 1 tab to set the advanced options Flags 1 Flags 2 Flags 3 Debug SSL Settings Y Return matche
204. ick on the Datasource button and set the options on Page 1 and Page 2 as shown on the examples below Disable Genetic Optimizer Y KSQO Keyset Query Optimization V Recognize Unique Indexes v Use Declare Fetch Unknown Sizes Maximum Don t Know Data Type Options V Text as Long arChar Miscellaneous CommLog C psqlodbc_xxxx log Parse Statements Cancel as FreeStmt Exp F MyLog C mylog_xxxx log C Longest Bools as Char Max Warchar 1000000 Max LongW arChar 1024 Cache Size 100 SysT able Prefixes dd_ Apel 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 30 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository Page 1 Page 2 Read Only Show System Tables Y LF lt gt CR LF conversion V Updatable Cursors Vlibytea as LO Int8 As default J bigint J numeric Protocol 074 Ob M63 062 DID Options Show Column Fake Index Qu Connect Settings Cancel Note D varchar Row Versioning 4 Disallow Premature True is 1 Server side prepare Extra Opts double int4 0x0 Level of rollback on errors D Nop Transaction gt Statement Apply On Page 2 For PostgreSQL version 8 select the Disallow Premature checkbox and in the Protocol panel select the 7 4 radio button 7 Click on the OK button to complete the configuration Your P
205. ient s executable file Note Sparx Systems strongly urge you not to manipulate version controlled package files outside of Enterprise Architect It is possible to leave the package files in a state that Enterprise Architect cannot recognize 11 5 3 2 CVS with Local Repositories Before you can set up Enterprise Architect you must have a working directory that points to a local repository that is one that is installed on your local machine See your version control software help files for more information To set up CVS version control follow the steps below 1 Launch Enterprise Architect and open or create the Enterprise Architect model for which packages are to be placed under version control 2 Select the Project Version Control Version Control Settings menu option The Version Control Settings dialog displays 3 Click on the New button 4 In the Unique ID field type a suitable name for the configuration 5 Against the Type field click on the CVS radio button O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 146 Version Control Version Control Setup T Version Control Settings A Model Settings 4 This model is private for Shared models it is best to disable this check box 4 Save nested version controlled packages to stubs only recommended Configuration Details Unique ID CVS_TEST scc cvs Subversion Working Copy path C istuffiCSV Checkouts MRF_Test Current User neil Workst
206. igration The UML 2 0 Migration check enables you to migrate the project from UML 1 3 semantics to UML 2 0 semantics The migration process currently converts activities that are invocations of operations into called operation actions as per the UML 2 0 specification The UML 2 0 Migration option is an exclusive process that does not enable any of the other checks to be selected To perform the UML 2 0 migration follow the steps below 1 Select the Tools Data Management Project Integrity Check menu option The Project Integrity Check dialog displays 2 Select the UML 2 0 Migration checkbox and click on the Go button The following message box displays This check migrates superceded modeling semantics to their UML 2 x A counterparts and is run exclusively to the other checks in this process Refer to the Help for additional information 3 To proceed click on the OK button or to cancel the migration click on the Cancel button 4 If you are proceeding click on the Go button on the Project Integrity Check dialog to perform the migration 3 2 Run SQL Patches Occasionally Sparx Systems might release a patch to correct a model fault To load such patches and run them select the Tools Run Patch menu option The patch generally checks how many records are to be updated and reports on what is to be done This dialog is solely for the purpose of executing patches and model updates on an ad hoc basis as supplied from Sparx System
207. ile Import 108 Enable Exclusive Diagram Edit Lock 173 Security 173 Encrypt Password Prior To Release 7 1 Of Enterprise Architect 186 Enterprise Architect Example Project File 8 Export Data In CSV Format 121 Import Data In CSV Format 123 Model Management 2 Performance DBMS Connections 50 52 55 62 65 68 Performance In Auditing 197 Performance WAN Optimizer 72 Project Files Open A Project 8 Project What Is A 7 Replication Merge Rules 100 Estimation 244 Exclamation Mark Blue 195 Red 195 Exclusive Edit Lock Automatic 173 Disable 173 Enable 173 Toggle 173 Export EAB File 166 Data 251 MOF To XMI 128 Reference Data 251 Reference Data Introduction 250 To Rational Rose 104 105 109 To XMI 105 Version Controlled Model Branch 166 XMI Batch 115 oe File EAB 166 UML Model Management Index 259 G General Types Dialog 235 Getting Started With MOF 127 Group Lock Identify Owner 196 Group Login 182 Implementation Report In Traceability 224 Import EAB File 166 Data 253 EMX files 108 From XMI 106 MOF From XMI 128 Reference Data Automatically 253 Reference Data Introduction 250 Reference Data Manually 253 UML2 files 108 User ID From Active Directory 177 Version Controlled Model Branch 166 XMI 116 Indicator Locked Element 195 InnoDB BaseModel Script 22 Integrity Of Model Data 76 Of Project Data 76 Integrity Check 76 L Lazy Loading E
208. ily distinguishes it from other configurations The Unique ID is added to the list of Version Control configurations a package can connect to In addition it is possible to select a previous version control configuration from this drop down menu providing the configuration is not in the current model Working Copy Path Specify the folder where the XML files representing the packages are stored This folder should already exist before it is specified Every PC using TFS version control should have its own TFS Local Folder in which to store working copies of the XMI package files this should not be a shared network folder Particularly bear this in mind if you are creating a EAP file which is to be shared for example a SQL database Specify the name of the Team Foundation Server to connect to Workspace Name Specify the name of a pre defined TFS workspace that you are using Specify the user name that you use to connect to the Team Foundation Server The user name that you specify should give you read write permissions in the specified workspace Password Specify the password associated with the user name you specify Enterprise Architect stores this password in encrypted form as part of the version control configuration data UML Model Management Version Control Version Control Setup 157 TFS Exe Path Browse to and select the full path name of the TFS command line client s executable file Notes e
209. in Enterprise Architect you must set up ASA and ASA ODBC drivers For further information on setting these up see Setup an Adaptive Server Anywhere ODBC Driver 30 To create a new ASA repository you must first create a database into which to import the table definitions for Enterprise Architect Sparx Systems provide SQL scripts to create the required tables how you create the database and execute that script are up to you e Registered users can obtain the scripts from the Registered Corporate edition Resources page of the Sparx Systems website at http www sparxsystems com registered reg ea corp ed html e Trial users can obtain the scripts from the Corporate edition Resources page of the Sparx Systems website at http www sparxsystems com resources corporate Create the Data Repository After you create the database and execute the script the result should be an empty Enterprise Architect project to begin working with You can transfer data from an existing EAP file or simply start from scratch Third Party Tools If you are unfamiliar with ASA and DBMS systems in general you might want to consider a suitable front end tool Sybase Central is one such tool that can be installed along with the DBMS It provides a convenient graphical UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 47 user interface to enable creation of databases execution of scripts and restores To
210. ion The Import VC Model Branch dialog displays Find a Model Branch EAB file OR Select a Version Control Configuration Select a Model Branch EAB file 3 Either e Click on the Find a Model Branch EAB file button and browse for the Model Branch File If the version control configuration used by the file has not been fully set up Enterprise Architect prompts you to complete and save the configuration The model branch import then proceeds OR e f the version control configuration used by the file has been fully set up in the current model click on the drop down arrow in the Select a Version Control Configuration field and select the configuration then select the Model Branch File from the Select a Model Branch EAB file list Click on the OK button to import the model branch Enterprise Architect imports the root package specified in the Model Branch File and recursively imports and populates all the sub packages contained in the root package 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 168 Version Control Use Version Control 11 6 10 Review Package History Reviewing package history enables you to view the history of checked in package revisions It also enables you to import selected prior revisions of the package into your model The package revision is retrieved in read only form enabling you to view the package contents but not make any changes to the package T
211. ion Settings panel click on the Select Path button to specify the path for your Subversion client executable 6 Click on the Save button to save the configuration you have defined the new configuration is added to the Defined Configurations list Note A new entry is also created in the Local Paths list with the same ID as the new version control configuration The Local Path entry records the Local Project path for use in subsequent path substitutions 7 When you have finished defining your version control configurations click on the Close button Additional Information on the dialog fields This model is private Specify whether all users connect to a single shared copy of the model such as a DBMS or each user connects to their own private copy of the model When unselected for shared models the option disables the File History Retrieve functionality when the selected package is checked out by another user This prevents modifications that might have been made by the other user from being discarded through importing a prior revision from version control Save nested version Set nested version controlled packages to stubs or fully expanded trees Defaults controlled packages to selected to stubs only For a full explanation of this option see the Using Nested Version Control Packages 137 topic Specify a configuration name that readily distinguish this configuration from other configurations The Unique ID displa
212. ion control Features Version Control provides two key facilities Coordinating sharing of packages between users Saving a history of changes to Enterprise Architect packages including the ability to retrieve previous versions System Requirements Version controlled packages are packages that have been configured for use with version control software To use version control in Enterprise Architect a third party source code control application is required that controls access to and stores revisions of the controlled packages Enterprise Architect supports the following version control applications Subversion which is available from http www subversion tigris org CVS which is available from http www march hare com cvspro Microsoft Team Foundation Server SCC compatible products all version control products that provide a client that complies with the Microsoft Common Source Code Control standard version 1 1 or higher The following products are SCC compatible and are known to successfully integrate with Enterprise Architect Accurev Tested by Sparx Borland Star Teams Users report success ClearCase Users report success MS Visual Source Safe Tested by Sparx MS TFS SCC Tested by Sparx MKS Source Integrity Tested by Sparx Perforce Tested by Sparx Serena Dimensions Users report success Serena Change Manager Users report success Snapshot CM Tested by Sparx SourceGear Vault Tested by Sparx Source Offsi
213. ion remains unchanged from when you last updated your local copy Enterprise Architect exports and checks in your package without further prompting On the other hand if the repository now contains a file that has changed since you last updated your local copy checking in your package overwrites whatever those changes might be Enterprise Architect displays a message warning you of the pending data loss and giving you the opportunity to abort the check in At this point you must decide whether to discard your own changes using the Undo Check Out command or continue with your check in and overwrite the changes that have been committed to the repository since you last updated your local copy from the repository You can use the File Properties command to determine who checked in the last changes to this package This might help you to discover what changes have been uploaded and decide whose changes take precedence Update Before You Disconnect Whenever you are connected to the version control server you are always working with the latest version of a package This is because you cannot modify a package until you check it out from version control and checking it out loads the latest revision from the repository into your model These rules do not apply when you are disconnected from the version control server You are working on UML Model Management Version Control Offline Version Control 171 whatever versions you hav
214. ions of this topic carefully Enterprise Architect Merge Rules Enterprise Architect follows these rules in merging e Additions are cumulative that is two replicas each creating three new Classes result in six new Classes after merging e Deletions prevail over modifications if one replica changes a Class name and other deletes the Class performing a merge results in both files losing the Class Conflicting modifications appear in the Resolve Replication Conflicts dialog Tools Manage EAP File Resolve Replication Conflicts menu option See Resolve Conflicts 103 for details on how to deal with conflicting modifications Use Replication To use replication follow the steps below 1 Convert the base project to a design master 10h using the Tools Manage EAP File Make Design Master menu option UML Model Management Model Sharing and Team Deployment Replication 101 2 Create replicas 10h from the design master using the Tools Manage EAP File Create New Replica menu option 3 Take the replica away and work on it as required then bring it back for synchronization with the design master 4 Synchronize the replicas 1021 During synchronization all changes to both the master and the replica are propagated in both directions so at the end they both contain the same information Upgrades and Replicas When you upgrade your version of Enterprise Architect you must not open a replica until you hav
215. is not necessary or desirable to examine conflicts since they represent relatively inconsequential pieces of information that can very easily be modified through the normal Enterprise Architect interface for example by moving a diagram element The only case in which this dialog should be used is where a substantial piece of information has been overridden by another user and you want to retrieve it Follow the steps below 1 Inthe Table with Conflicts list click on the entry that is likely to contain the lost information 2 Click on each entry in the Conflicting Records list 3 When the lost information appears in the Conflict Details list click on the Overwrite with Conflict button 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 104 XMI Import and Export 8 XMI Import and Export heh Y What is XMI XML Metadata Interchange XMI is an open standard file format that enables the interchange of model information between models and tools XMI is based on XML and is defined by the OMG Enterprise Architect uses XMI as a method of importing and exporting model specifications between different UML packages Enterprise Architect projects and other tools that support XMI Enterprise Architect supports the XMI 1 1 1 2 and 2 1 specifications but does not fully support the older 1 0 specification When importing or exporting to XMI 1 0 some loss of data occurs due to the limitations of XMI 1 0 XMI 1 1 has support for UML 1
216. ise Architect UML Modeling Tool 17 2 2 Constraint Types The Constraint tab of the General Types dialog enables you to define constraints These are picked up ina variety of places where constraints might fall into more categories than the basic default Pre Post and Invariant conditions To access this dialog select the Settings General Types menu option Click on the Constraint tab 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 238 Reference Data General Types Constraint Description Note A state the object must always be in An ending state that must be met A starting state that must be met A process that must occur To add a new constraint click on the New button and e Inthe Constraint field type the name of the constraint for example Assumption e Inthe Description field type a brief description of the constraint e Inthe Note field type any additional information required e Click on the Save button The constraint displays in the Defined Constraint Types list Note You can transport these constraints between models using the Export Reference Datal25 and Import Reference Datal2531 options on the Tools menu 17 2 3 Constraint Status Types You can configure the basic list of constraint status types used in Enterprise Architect using the Constraint Status tab of the General Types dialog To access this dialog select the Settings General Types menu opti
217. ise Architect UML Modeling Tool you can both create and study the relationships between for example the Requirements and Use Cases for a module You might identify the theme package in this case Manage Users in the Requirements model and the Use Case model as the source and target packages and explore the likely element and connector types in the packages This like the Traceability diagram identifies which Requirements are or should be realized by which Use Cases You can then perform similar checks with the Manage Users packages in say the Use Case and Implementation models The Source and Target field browsers enable you to examine child packages within the theme package and obtain further detail on how the feature at this stage is defined UML Model Management Traceability Traceability Tools 225 Sc Mago pi TOS Rn 7 Tope Maze pea Dor sa o Gm Other Tools You can also obtain information on what elements realize and are realized by the elements in a given package using the Dependency report and Implementation report respectively see the Other Documents topic in Report Creation in UML Models You can trace how a Class or Interface element in a diagram or the Project Browser is implemented in code or for tables in DDL using the Source Code viewer For code as you click on features in the element the corresponding code is highlighted in the vi
218. ise Architect XMI UML 1 3 v Other Options Version ID 10 E Use DTD Owe i Pa i Last Load Date Batch Export J Last Save Date 3 Set the required options as follows Select the Control Package checkbox to indicate that this is a controlled package Click on the Version Control drop down arrow and select the version control repositories this connects the package to a specific version control configuration In the XMI Filename field type or browse for the path and XMI file for importing and exporting XMI files The field accepts Local Path Substitution strings for example use an XMI local path definition where myLocalPath C Documents and Settings John Desktop EA Models Then myLocalPath CIM xml is equivalent to C Documents and Settings John Desktop EA Models CIM xml In the UML XMI Type field click on the drop down arrow and select the type of XMI generated options include Enterprise Architect XMI UML 1 3 Rational Rose Unisys UML 1 3 and Generic XMI 1 0 UML 1 3 currently only Enterprise Architect UML 1 3 is supported for complete import export round tripping of packages In the Version ID field type the version ID number In the Owner field type or select the name of the package owner If required click on the Use DTD checkbox to use a Data Type Definition DTD If required click on the Log Import Export checkbox to log import and export activity to a log file If required click on the Batch Import
219. isplay the dialog select the Project Security Manage Users menu option then select the required user and click on the View All button 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 182 User Security Maintain Groups 12 8 Maintain Groups Security groups make it easy to configure sets of permissions and apply them to a number of users in one action Notes e You must have Security Manage Users 183 permission to manage user groups the initial Admin administrator automatically has this permission e You do not define groups as group logins with passwords If you intend to use a group login you can define a single user login and password 175 that all group members use that is Enterprise Architect allows multiple logins under one user ID Set Up a Security Group To set up a security group follow the steps below 1 Select the Project Security Manage Groups menu option The Security Groups dialog displays Group Name Business Proc Description Business Processes and Procedures _ Set Group Permissions Group Name Description Administrators System Administrators Business Proc Business Processes and Procedures 2 Inthe Group Name and Description fields type the security group name and a description of the group 3 Click on the Save button Note You can transport these security group definitions between models using the Export Reference Dat
220. itory Once the repository is created you can connect to it Note To connect to a repository you must have the usual SELECT UPDATE INSERT and DELETE permissions To find out how to connect to your repository see one of the following topics e Connect to a MySQL Data Repository 50 e Connect to a SQL Server Data Repository 52 e Connect to an Oracle Data Repository 55 e Connect to a PostgreSQL Data Repository 62 e Connect to an Adaptive Server Anywhere Data Repository 65 e Connect to an MSDE Server Data Repository 687 e Connect to a Progress OpenEdge Data Repository 687 1 4 1 Upsize to Access 2007 Before you set up Enterprise Architect for use with Access 2007 it is recommended that you run the project integrity check tool 767 select the Tools Data Management Project Integrity Check menu option on the base project to upsize to Access 2007 This ensures the project data is clean before uploading Note You cannot move a model from a source EAP file of a version earlier than 3 5 0 Upsizing your Database You upsize your database in two stages as follows Stage One Create the Repository Using Access 2007 open a EAP file and allow Access to convert it to a ACCDB file This forms the Access 2007 repository UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 13 Note If you do not have Access 2007 you can connect by downloading the Acc
221. ity is enabled you must have Check Project Data Integrity 183 permission to perform a data integrity check See User Security in UML Models To check the data integrity of your project follow the steps below 1 Select the Tools Data Management Project Integrity Check menu option The Project Integrity Check dialog displays UML Model Management Project Data Integrity Check Project Data Integrity 77 li Prost intento Chace s a Action Checks to Run Report Only Y Package Structure V Verify Cross References Recover Clean V Object Structure Y Connectors Y Object Features T UML 2 0 Migration Y All GUIDS Save Results Checks Complete Go Close Help AT Problem Item Proposed Action s Mismatched dassifier name t Counted 44 Update type iz Inconsistently named Package Package Name Pack 470 O Rename package to Elem 4 Inconsistently named Package Package Name Pack 467 O Rename package to Elem 4 Inconsistently named Package Package Name Pack 468 O Rename package to Elem 4 Inconsistently named Package Package Name Pack 469 O Rename package to Elem 4 Inconsistently named Package Package Name Pack 474 O Rename package to Elem 4 Inconsistently named Package Package Name Pack 473 O Rename package to Elem 4 Inconsistently named Package Package Name Pack 472 O Rename package to Elem 4 Inconsistently named
222. ject Indicators Estimation Factors UML MDG Technologies Namespaces Template Package Local Paths Auto Name Counters Code Datatypes Database Datatypes Preprocessor Macros Code Generation Templates Ctrl Shift P Transformation Templates Ctrl Alt H 1 Images Colors b UML Model Management Reference Data People 227 17 1 People The People dialog enables you to control the following for your project e Project Authors 227 e Project Roles 230 e Project Resources 232 e Project Clients 2337 Project Author s Project Roles Resources Project Clients Name s Role Notes To display this dialog select the Settings People menu option 17 1 1 Project Authors You can define the people who are working on a project such as the authors of specific elements To define the project authors select the Settings People menu option The People dialog displays defaulted to the Project Author s tab 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 228 Reference Data People Name s Role Project Author s Project Roles Resources Project Clients D ipti Application Analyst Use Case Modeller Project Manager VB Programmer Deployment Use Case Modeller C Programmer Business Analvst Complete the fields as described below Type the name of the p
223. l If this is not the case please see the Set up Subversion 1a81 topic Once you have set up and tested the Local Working Copy you are ready to define a Version Control configuration for use with the Enterprise Architect model to place under version control To apply version control to your Enterprise Architect model using the Subversion working copy that you have set up follow the steps below 1 Launch Enterprise Architect and open the model for which this Working Copy was created 2 Select the Project Version Control Version Control Settings menu option 3 Click on the New button enter a suitable name in the Unique ID field then click on the Type Subversion radio button Model Settings v This model is private for Shared models it is best to disable this check box V Save nested version controlled packages to stubs only recommended Configuration Details Unique ID Type scc CVS Subversion TFS Working Copy path C VC Workspaces Subversion Workstation Settings Subversion Exe Path C Program Files CollabNet Subversion svn exe new seve Location UML Model Management Version Control Version Control Setup 153 4 To the right of the Working Copy path field click on the Select Path button and select the local folder in which to keep local working copies of the XML files to be stored in the Version Control repository 5 Inthe Workstat
224. les bug Sparx Systems reports and assistance in the development of Enterprise Architect M ina Edit The task of developing and maintaining this tool has been greatly anagingiEctor enhanced by their contribution Geoffrey Sparks Technical Editors Brad Maxwell Simon McNeilly Vimal Kumar Henk Dekker Contents l Table of Contents Foreword 1 Model Management 2 Enterprise Architect Project Piles cacacaninononiocnonanonorosnene no rocmere moroso coran 6 What is a Project cxtenete aeaee iaeia na Erea ra Ee aaaea O aaaea e EEEa aeania a 7 Op i a Project sia ea eee a a e e a suet aa aa aa Aaa Eea PEARSA Create a New Project Model WiZar dl iii A sus E R Set Up a Database Repository sscssecsseseesseeseeseeesensneeseneneeeseeseneseesenesenenueesessneseesenesensneessneseeeseesenenentenes 11 Upsize to Access 200 Tiida a id A 12 Upsizeto Sybase ASA ivi Ade 14 Wpsiz to Progress OpenEdYS iRi A A A np eee 15 Wpsize to MSDE iii a ae aire eee 17 Upbsize to PostgreSQL wat aad A eA Ahead ie eats 17 Upsize to Oracle 9i 10g or 11g ae 19 Wpsiz to SQL SAVER AA Matias end aban teehee PTAS 20 Upsize to MySQL vai icnn ana 22 Set Up an ODBC Driver for a Connection to a REPOSItOLY eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeteeeeaeeeateeeeaeeaees 24 MySQL ODBC DriVernoissonsmiarta A ada 25 PostgreSQL ODBC Driver is 27 ASA ODBC Driver i sri mona e a idea ania a andes ele ae eae aeteecte 30
225. ling Tool A supporting standard of MOF is XMI which defines an XML based exchange format MOF is a closed strict meta modeling architecture every model element on every layer is strictly an instance of a model element of the layer above MOF only provides a means to define the structure or abstract syntax of a languages or of data Simplified MOF uses the notion of Classes as known from object orientation to define concepts model elements on a meta layer These Classes concepts can then be instantiated through objects instances of UML Model Management MOF 127 the model layer below Because an element on the M2 layer is an object instance of an M3 model element as well as a Class an M2 layer concept the notion of a clabjectis used Clabjectis a merge of the words Class and object Another related standard is OCL which describes a formal language that can be used to define model constraints by means of predicate logic See Also e Getting Started 127 e Export MOF to XMI 128 10 1 Getting Started MOF diagrams are Class diagrams that are contained in packages with a metamodel stereotype To create a MOF diagram follow the steps below 1 Create a package to contain your MOF elements 2 Double click on the package name to display the Properties dialog Stereotype metamodel Author Frederick Walter Scope Alias Phase 3 Inthe Stereotype field type the value me
226. lled packages in the project Only retrieves packages that are checked in Put Latest Update the central repository with the currently selected package which you have checked out while retaining checkout status on the package This is equivalent to checking a package in and immediately checking it back out again File Properties Ask the version control provider to show the version control properties associated with the XML export file pertaining to the currently selected package This also identifies who has checked out the package File History Where the controlling package has been configured by an SCC provider this provider shows a change history for the package See your provider s documentation for details on how to use the control Otherwise if the version control is CVS the history is shown via Enterprise Architect s internal CVS history menu Compare with version on Compare the current package with the XMI version on disk disk Add Branch to Version Apply version control to all packages within a selected model branch in a Control single operation In this context a model branch is a package that is currently selected in the Project Browser and all of the packages contained within it Export as Model Branch Export 1661 a newly created model branch from your own private copy of a model Import a Model Branch Retrieve 1651 a model branch and import it into either the source model or another model Get Package Access package
227. log or e Click on the Compare Options icon 2131 on the Compare Utility tab toolbar Always Expand to Differences Show Elements that are Suppress these Changes J Changed Suppress Diagrams In Baseline Only Suppress Date Modified Y In Model Only Suppress Date Created Unchanged Items Suppress Children of Missing Items v Suppress Advanced Properties _o_ cancel Always Expand to Always display the list of elements fully expanded to show changes O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 212 Baselines Differencing and Merges Compare Options Differences If you deselect the checkbox when the Compare Utility tab is first opened it lists the package contents to element level and you expand each element as required to show the changed items For large branches of the model it is better to leave the checkbox unselected Show Elements List elements that that are y Have been changed since the Baseline was created Are in the Baseline only that is have been deleted from the model since the Baseline was created Are in the model only that is have been created since the Baseline was created Have not changed since the Baseline was created you might generally leave this checkbox unselected Suppress these Exclude Changes Changes to diagrams Changes to the Date Modified field for an item Changes to the Date Created field for an item Child items of a deleted item Changes to
228. m you must download a binary suitable for that platform as well Chapter 6 in the Subversion documentation provides guidance on how to configure the server for different methods of access by the client Secure connection methods are also covered in this chapter Your administrator should set up user IDs and passwords for every person who is to access the repository Your administrator should then provide all users with the path to the repository and ensure that they can all connect Before users can make use of Subversion they must create local working copies 150 from the repository by checking out a repository sub treel145 Steps for setting up a repository and creating a local working copy can be found at http Awww svnbook red bean com en 1 4 svn basic in action html svn advanced reposurls Note Sparx Systems recommend that each new Enterprise Architect model being added to version control with Subversion should have a separate repository sub tree created for it and users should create a new local working copy from the sub tree to be used with that model Repository URLs Subversion repositories can be accessed using many different methods on local disk or through various network protocols A repository location however is always a URL The table below describes how different URL schemas map to the available access methods Schema Access Method file Direct repository access on local disk http Access via WebDA
229. ment Enterprise Architect Project Files Open a Project 9 2 Use the file browser to navigate to the project to open which has a EAP file extension EAP Select the project and click on the Open button Recently Opened Projects Enterprise Architect keeps a list of recently opened projects and displays them on the Start Page for easy selection If the project to open is in the Recent list simply click once on the name of the project to open it Note If you already have a project open Enterprise Architect prompts you to save changes before loading Enterprise Architect Example Project File New Enterprise Architect users in particular should start by exploring the EAExample file supplied with Enterprise Architect The example model file is stored in your Enterprise Architect installation directory The default installation directories depending on which version you have installed are e Registered version C Program Files Sparx Systems EA e Trial version C Program Files Sparx Systems EA Trial e Lite version C Program Files Sparx Systems EA Lite Connect to a Data Repository Note This feature is available in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering Systems Engineering and Ultimate editions You also have the option to connect to SQL Server 40 MySQLI 38 Oracle 9i 10g or 11q 43 Postgre SQL s2 ASA 65 MSDE Server 68 and Progress OpenEdge 687 data repositories 1 3 Cr
230. ment Project Data Transfer Compare Projects 81 4 3 Compare Projects To compare projects follow the steps below 1 Select the Tools Data Management Project Compare menu option The Project Compare dialog displays Compare Type O EAP to EAP DBMSto EAP EAP to DBMS DBMS to DBMS Source and Target Projects for Compare Source Project Target Project Resuts Compare Proects Cancel Help Source Reco Target Recor Difference 2 Select the option for the required comparison type You can choose from e EAPto EAP e DBMS to EAP e EAP to DBMS e DBMS to DBMS 3 Inthe Source Project and Target Project fields type the name or connection string for the Source and Target projects 4 Click on the Compare Projects button The results of the comparison display in the panel at the bottom of the dialog 5 If required click on the Print List button to print the results 4 4 Copy Packages Between Projects Using the XML import export capabilities of Enterprise Architect you can copy and move packages between Enterprise Architect projects This gives you a high level of flexibility in building a project from re usable parts and from elements produced in widely dispersed geographic regions This procedure with the Strip GUID s checkbox selected see step 8 below is effectively the same as copying packages within or between models You would tend to use this export import
231. ment Now update the file from the repository lock the file edit it and commit once more Use the following commands svn update lt fileName gt svn lock lt fileName gt Then edit and save the file using your preferred editor svn commit lt fileName gt m A meaningful comment 11 5 4 4 Subversion Under WINE Crossover When running Enterprise Architect under WINE CrossOver you can use either a Windows based Subversion client or a Linux based Subversion client If you intend to use the HTTP or HTTPS protocols you must use the Unix like client as the Windows client cannot access the libraries necessary to create the required network connections It is also easier to set up your working copy folder using the native Unix like Subversion client and then continue using that same client from within Enterprise Architect However to make use of the Unix like client under CrossOver you must also download and install a bridging utility called SVN_gate which is available from the CodeWeavers CrossOver web site http www codeweavers com support wiki EAsvn When using the Windows Subversion client you simply install the Win32 Subversion client under CrossOver Once you have set up your working copy directory you are ready to use Subversion with Enterprise Architect However setting up your working copy is more difficult when using Win32 Subversion under CrossOver Because you cannot see any output from Subversion commands run under Cr
232. mport Export dialog displays 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 122 CSV Import and Export CSV Export Package System Model Specification Generate y Edit New File C EA Generate Packagew GenfileCSV csv Action Import o Export Progress Results Pret Resuts View Fie fun Cese tee 3 Set the required options as outlined below option fuere Specify the name of the export specification 11 to use CON CET List the element types to export leave blank for all or enter a comma separated list of types Note If you specify element types ONLY elements of those types are exported Therefore in order to enable the Preserve Hierarchy option in the specification to operate if selected you must include Package as an element type Otherwise no Packages are exported in which to preserve the hierarchy If you do not specify any element types all elements including Packages are exported and the hierarchy can be preserved COMET CON CTN UML Model Management CSV Import and Export CSV Import 123 9 3 CSV Import It is possible to import information about Enterprise Architect elements in CSV format Once you have defined a CSV import specification 115 you can read in major element attributes from a CSV text file Notes e Inthe Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterpris
233. n Auditing has been enabled and disabled along with who made the change and the date and time of the change e Raw to display all audit records without sorting although any search and filtering you define still apply Additional database information is displayed this additional information might be unimportant UML Model Management Auditing The Audit View 205 Standard Mode In Standard mode Auditing is automatically synchronized with the Project Browser When synchronized and where changes have been made the Audit View reflects your selection from the Project Browser If you click on e An element the Audit View displays the history for that element e A package the Audit View displays the history for that package and its immediate children but not the contents of nested packages e A diagram the Audit View displays the history for that diagram and its contents which could be drawn from a wide area of the Project Browser Advanced Mode In Advanced mode you can load sets of audit data independent of the Project Browser These sets of data display all significant changes but you can reduce the selection by filtering by time or by running a search Advanced mode also displays e Changes to the Audit Settings e When Audit Operations are executed e Security changes which can be browsed in the same way as other changes Raw Mode In Raw mode all data recorded by auditing is displayed in chronologi
234. n existing model into the server Stage Three Transfer the Data Note When transferring a project you must have permission to execute the CREATE SEQUENCE command 1 Open Enterprise Architect click on the Cancel button on the Open Project screen to open with no project loaded O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 20 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 2 8 9 Select the Tools Data Management Project Transfer menu option The Project Transfer dialog displays Transfer Type O EAP to EAP C DBMS to EAP C EAP to DBMS C DBMS to DBMS Source and Target Projects Source Project s Target Project a Logfile Zlote Caution The Target Project will be erased prior to transfer Please ensure you have backed up target if necessary Transfer Close Help Progress In the Transfer Type panel select EAP to DBMS In the Source Project field type the name of the EAP file to upsize to Oracle At the right of the Target Project field click on the Browse button The Datalink Properties dialog displays Select Oracle Provider for OLE DB from the list then click on the Next button On the Connection page of the Data Link Properties dialog enter the Oracle service name in the Data Source field and the user name and password as required Note See Connect to an Oracle Data Repository 557 for more information
235. n to log on to the server User name Password E Blank password Allow saving password 3 Enter the initial catalog to use 5 Click on the Use data source name drop down arrow and from the list select the ODBC driver you have set up to connect to your PostgreSQL repository Click on the Test Connection button to confirm that the details are correct If your test succeeded click on the OK button If your test did not succeed revise your settings After you have clicked on the OK button the Connection Name amp Type dialog displays E O UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 65 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Connection Name amp Type xs Name pg E Encrypt Connection String Database Server ODBC Connection PostgreSQL E Lazy Load Server Port DSN ene Give the connection a suitable name so that you can recognize it in the Recent Projects panel on the Open Project dialog 8 If required select the Encrypt Connection String checkbox This encrypts and hides the connection details of the database from the users that the connection string is given to If required select the Lazy Load checkbox to not load the full project view when the model is loaded Instead only the parts that are necessary to display the visible portion of the tree are loaded This means tha
236. n view and delete your own user level locks in Enterprise Architect This is especially useful when working in Mode 2 security 17 user locks required to edit To manage your locks select the Project Security My Locks menu option The My Locks dialog displays Package 4 06 2009 ClassM 4 06 2009 Locked ByCurrent User 4 06 2009 Class1 4 06 2009 Locked ByCurrent User 4 06 2009 Package 1 4 06 2009 In the My Locks dialog you can select one or more locks and delete them that is unlock the object by clicking on the Unlock Selected button UML Model Management Auditing 197 13 Auditing Auditing is a project level feature available in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions that enables model administrators to record model changes in Enterprise Architect By enabling this option you can view information on changes such as e Who changed an element e How many elements they changed e When they changed the data e Whatthe previous values were and e What type of elements they changed Auditing does not record changes to RTF Templates Model documents Baselines or Profiles Warning If your site runs separate editions of Enterprise Architect when Auditing is turned on in a project any Desktop or Professional edition users are locked out of the project To restore access turn Auditing off in the project from a Corporate Business and
237. nality Add Ins are documented in the Enterprise Architect Add In Model topic of the SDK for Enterprise Architect Project Team Review Enterprise Architect provides a Project Team Review which can be used to discuss the development and progress of a project or model You can switch the team review to other projects so you can monitor and compare developments in several projects at once The Project Team Review is documented in Using Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool Replication Note This functionality is available in the Corporate Professional Business and Software Engineering Systems Engineering and Ultimate editions The Desktop edition is intended for single users so does not support replication In addition to sharing projects in real time over a network Enterprise Architect also enables projects to be shared using replication 100 Replication is a simple process that enables data interchange between EAP based repositories and is suitable for use in situations where many different users work independently Modelers merge their changes into a Design Master only as required It is recommended that a backup is carried out prior to replication Replication requires the use of EAP based repositories and cannot be performed on repositories stored on a DBMS server See Also e Upgrading Models 74 e Project Data Integrity 76 e Setting Up a Database Repository 1 UML Model Management Model
238. nce 200 Audit View Audit Changes 203 Controls 203 Custom Time Periods 203 Display Database Changes 203 Filter By Time 203 Mode Advanced 203 Mode Raw 203 Mode Standard 203 Performance Problems 206 Refresh 203 Search 203 Slow Loading 206 Slow Navigation 206 Sort 203 Auditing Alternative To Differencing 207 And Performance Of Enterprise Architect 197 And RTF Reporting 197 Audit Tree 201 Display Audit Results 201 Enable 199 How To Invoke 198 Include Reverse Engineering 199 Include XMI Export 199 Include XMI Import 199 Introduction 197 Large Deletion Issue 206 Level Core 200 Level Extended 200 Level Standard 200 Performance Issues 206 Quick Start 198 Record Display 201 Reverse Engineering Issue 206 Settings 198 199 Use Database Timestamp 199 XMI Import Issue 206 Auditing Settings ClearLogs 199 LoadLogs 199 Save Logs 199 Authentication Accept Windows Authentication 175 Automatic Delete On Relocation Of Project 175 Author Define 227 From Windows Active Directory 227 Automatic Exclusive Edit Lock 173 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 256 Index B Base Project Copy 73 New 73 Baseline And Differences Overview 207 Considerations 208 Create 210 Delete 208 Export 208 Import 208 Include XMI Stubs 210 Load From Alternative Model 208 Manage 208 Merge With Current Model Overview 207 Model 208 Overview 208 Scenarios 208 Versions 210 Base
239. nd location Compare Options Display the Compare Options 21 dialog Manage Baselines Display the Manage Baselines 2081 dialog Help o Display the Help topic Baselines Differencing and Merges 207 Context Menu Each item in the hierarchy has a context menu which you display by right clicking on the item The options displayed depend on the level of the item in the hierarchy but include some or all of the following Merge from Baseline Restore the item in the model to the Baseline state or restore a deleted item from the Baseline Add from Baseline Delete from Model Remove a recently created item from the model Merge From Baseline For the root node of the hierarchy on the Compare Utility tab with Options Display the Merge dialog see below which enables you to specify options for rolling back the whole model branch to the Baseline state Object level items Re run the comparison to refresh the current display Find in Project Locate and highlight the item in the Project Browser Browser Expand All Fully expand the selected item Expand To Changed Expand the selected item to show changed items only Items UML Model Management Baselines Differencing and Merges Example Comparison 215 Collapse All Collapse the changed items in the selected item Log To XML Log the changes to an XML file A browser displays on which you specify the file name and location Compare Options
240. ndard use of in a string literal set the server variable in the postgresq l contf file to escape_string_warning off When the process is complete you have upsized your model to PostgreSQL and can now open it from Enterprise Architect 1 4 6 Upsize to Oracle 9i 10g or 11g Before you set up Enterprise Architect for use with Oracle it is recommended that you run the project integrity check tool select the Tools Data Management Project Integrity Check 761 menu option on the base project to upsize to Oracle This ensures your data is clean before uploading Note You cannot move a model from a source EAP file of a version earlier than 3 5 0 Warning Before proceeding ensure MDAC 2 6 or higher is installed on your system Upsizing Your Database You upsize your database for Oracle in three stages as follows Stage One Create an Empty Database 1 Install Oracle 2 Create an empty database Note See Create a New Oracle Repository 437 Stage Two Configure the Database 1 Using a tool such as the SQL Plus or SQL Plus Worksheet load the Oracle_BaseModel sq file This is available to registered users on the Corporate edition Resources page of the Sparx Systems website Make sure the new database is selected as the current database Run the script to create all required data structures Note 2 3 See Create a New Oracle Repository 43 You now have an empty database and can transfer a
241. ndex 257 Connector Locked 193 Constraint Status Type Define 238 Type Define 237 Controlled Package 160 Batch Export To XMI 115 Batch Import From XMI 116 Load 114 Menu XMI 110 Recovery 116 Version Control 116 With XMI 110 Copy Base Project 73 Packages Between Projects 81 Corrupt EAP file 85 Create Access 2007 Repository 37 Adaptive Server Anywhere Repository 46 Baselines 210 Data Repository 37 Design Master 101 Model 9 MSDE Server Repository 48 MySQL Repository 38 Oracle 10g Server Repository 43 Oracle 11g Server Repository 43 Oracle 9i Server Repository 43 PostgreSQL Repository 43 Progress OpenEdge Repository 48 Project 9 Project File 6 Replicas 101 SQL Server Repository 40 Cross Reference Between EMX Files 108 CSV Export 118 121 Import 118 123 Preserve Hierarchy 118 Specifications 118 Custom Template Create From Project 9 CVS Remote Repository 141 Version Control Options 141 145 Version Control With Local Repositories 145 D Data Compare 81 Export 251 Import 253 Integrity 76 Integrity Check 76 Integrity Run SQL Patches 78 Data Repository Adaptive Server Anywhere Connect To 65 Connect To 6 49 Create 37 MSDE Server Connect To 68 MySQL Connect To 50 Oracle 10g Connect To 55 Oracle 11g Connect To 55 Oracle 9i Connect To 55 Oracle Connect Via ODBC 55 Oracle Connect Via OLE DB 55 PostgreSQL Connect To 62 Progress OpenEdge Connect To 68 SQL Server Connect To 52 Data Tran
242. nection to a repository This connection information includes the path to the local or remote repository the user name and password in order to make a connection Note To see a video demonstration of setting up a CVS repository for version control go to http www sparxsystems com au resources demos settingupCVS CVS Final 1 htm 11 5 3 1 CVS with Remote Repositories Before you can connect to a remote repository you must e Have version control setup on your local machine e Have version control setup on a remote server O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 142 Version Control Version Control Setup e Have a working directory on your local machine that points to the repository on the server To set up CVS version control with a remote repository follow the steps below 1 Ask your system administrator to install CVS and create a remote repository with a module that you can use to control your Enterprise Architect package files Your administrator must create a username and password for you before you can make a connection 2 Open a command prompt window and navigate to or create a suitable directory to hold your CVS working copy directory for example C gt cd myCVSWorkSpace 3 Connect to the remote CVS repository An example connection command is C myCVSWorkSpace gt cvs d pserver myUserID ServerName repositoryFolder login Note Replace myUserlD with your CVS username replace ServerName with the name
243. ng Too If the Output window does not automatically display select the View System Output menu option While performing the validation Enterprise Architect also displays a progress window containing the Cancel Validation button which enables you to cancel the validation process at any time Alternatively select the Project Model Validation Cancel Validation menu option Example Model Violations The following UML diagram contains several basic violations UML Model Management Model Validation 91 fociConstraint3 iterative ggfdExpansionRegion1 e os a o ow P l l If you run Model Validation on this diagram Enterprise Architect displays the following violations in the Output window Output x MVR020001 warning ggfdExpansionRegionl ExpansionRegion ggfdExpansionRegionl is missing required child element Expansion MVRO50005 error Class2 Class Class2 cannot generalize self MVRO20001 warning ExceptionHandlerl ExceptionHandler ExceptionHandlerl is missing required child element ObjectNode Validation complete 1 error s 2 warning s M 4 gt gt System Script Model Validation The validation results show that the diagram e Contains a UML ExpansionRegion ExpansionRegion1 that is missing its child input ExpansionNode e Contains an invalid self generalization on Class2 UML elements cannot be self generalized e Contain
244. ng the Export Reference Data 25 and Import Reference Datal253 options on the Tools menu You can either export the test types together with the default problem types as a Maintenance Types file or separately as a Test Types file 17 4 Metrics and Estimation TCF values EFC values and Default Hour Rate for a project are controlled from the Estimation Factors dialog Risk metric and effort types for a project are controlled from the Project Indicators dialog For further information on these see the Project Management and Resource Management topics in Project Management with Enterprise Architect or specifically e Technical Complexity Factors e Environment Complexity Factors e Default Hours UML Model Management Reference Data Metrics and Estimation 245 e Effort Types e Metric Types e Risk Types 17 5 UML Types The UML Types dialog enables you to configure stereotypes 245 Tagged Value types 247 and the cardinality list 2481 for your project Select the Settings UML menu option to display this dialog 17 5 1 Stereotype Settings Enterprise Architect has an extensive set of Standard Element Stereotypes that you can apply to any UML construct see UML Modeling with Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool Using the Stereotypes tab of the UML Types dialog a Technical Developer can also customize the stereotypes for your project by adding modifying and deleting them For information on customizing ster
245. ng this process marks the package within Enterprise Architect as being checked in without exporting and committing the pending changes Subsequently checking out the package imports the latest revision of the package file from version control effectively discarding the uncommitted modifications from the model Similarly if a package file is checked out in the version control system but not in the Enterprise Architect model running this process marks the package within the model as checked out but it does not import the associated package file from the version control system Consequently it is possible to check in a package from Enterprise Architect that is potentially out of date compared to the latest revision of the package file within the version control system 11 7 Offline Version Control When loading a model that uses version control Enterprise Architect normally initializes a connection to the version control system for each Version Control Configuration defined in the model If Enterprise Architect is unable to connect a Version Control Configuration for any reason it displays warning messages to notify you and provides offline version control functionality for all packages associated with the failed connection You can prevent Enterprise Architect from attempting to make any version control connections by selecting the Project Version Control Work Offline menu option before loading a model This is useful if you know O
246. noDB 16 kB 0B 5 t constants InnoDB 16 kB 0B el T t constrainttypes InnoDB 16 kB 08 3 information_schema T t datatypes InnoDB 16 kB 08 G mysal T t diagram InnoDB 16 kB 3 adas m t_diagramlinks InnoDB im t_diagramobjects InnoDB 16 kB 16 kB 16 kB 16 kB 16 kB 16 kB 16 kB 16 kB m t_diagramtypes InnoDB m t_document InnoDB M ted InnoDB Ww t_efforttypes InnoDB m t_files InnoDB AOS 2 68 5 86 50 00 50 2 8 0 0 5 00 50 2 5 0 5 Y i t_genopt InnoDB 1 4 10 3 SQL Server Repository Note This feature is available in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions Before creating a SQL Server data repository you must have SQL Server and MDAC 2 6 or higher installed and access permission to create a new database Please note that setting up SQL Server and the issues involved are beyond the scope of this user guide Consult your program s documentation for a guide to this Sparx Systems provide SQL scripts to create the required tables how you create the database and execute that script are up to you e Registered users can obtain the scripts from the Registered Corporate edition Resources page of the Sparx Systems website at http www sparxsystems com registered reg ea corp ed html e Trial users can obtain the scripts from the Corporate edition Resources page of the Sparx Systems website at http www sparxsystems com resources corporate Create a SQL Server Rep
247. ns Before creating a SQL Server MSDE data repository you must have MSDE Server and MDAC 2 6 or higher installed Please note that setting up MSDE Server and the issues involved are beyond the scope of this user guide Consult your program documentation for guidance Sparx Systems provide SQL scripts to create the required tables how you create the database and execute that script are up to you e Registered users can obtain the scripts from the Registered Corporate edition Resources page of the Sparx Systems website at http www sparxsystems com registered reg ea corp ed html e Trial users can obtain the scripts from the Corporate edition Resources page of the Sparx Systems website at http www sparxsystems com resources corporate Use the SQL Server 2000 2005 or 2008 script for MSDE and follow the steps to Create a New SQL Server Data Repository 40 1 4 10 8 Progress OpenEdge Repository Notes e This feature is available in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions e The OpenEdge database must be either version 10 0B03 or version 10 1B01 or later Before creating a Progress OpenEdge data repository you must have OpenEdge and MDAC 2 6 or higher UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 49 installed and access permission to create a new database Please note that setting up OpenEdge and the issues involved
248. nsfer 79 function to upload a basic model into the repository 1 4 10 5 PostgreSQL Repository Note This feature is available in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions Before creating a PostgreSQL data repository in Enterprise Architect you must set up PostgreSQL and PostgreSQL ODBC drivers For further information on setting these up see Set up a PostgreSQL ODBC Driver 27 gt To create a new PostgreSQL repository you must first create a database into which to import the table definitions for Enterprise Architect Sparx Systems provide SQL scripts to create the required tables how you create the database and execute that script are up to you e Registered users can obtain the scripts from the Registered Corporate edition Resources page of the Sparx Systems website at http www sparxsystems com registered reg ea corp ed html e Trial users can obtain the scripts from the Corporate edition Resources page of the Sparx Systems website at http www sparxsystems com resources corporate Create the Data Repository After you create the database and execute the script the result should be an empty Enterprise Architect project to begin working with You can transfer data from an existing EAP file or simply start from scratch Third Party Tools If you are unfamiliar with PostgreSQL and DBMS systems in general you might want to consider a suitable front end tool O 1998 20
249. nt of team development You can create a replica of your project make changes to it then merge your changes back into the master project Version Control For UML Models Enterprise Architect UML Model version control j13 enables you to e Coordinate sharing of packages between users with either read only access or update access e Save and retrieve a history of changes to packages To use version control in Enterprise Architect you require a third party source code control application such as Subversion CVS or any other version control product that complies with the Microsoft Common Source Code Control standard Version Control is documented in Version Control Within UML Models Using Enterprise Architect User Security Note This feature is available in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions UML Model User Security 1731 in Enterprise Architect provides a means of limiting access to update functions in a project Elements can be locked per user or per group and a password defined for login Enterprise Architect offers two security policies e Standard where each element is considered unlocked until specifically locked e Rigorous where each element is assumed to be locked until specifically unlocked User Security is documented in User Security in UML Models Traceability Traceability 217 identifies the way a given process has been or is to be developed in a system The
250. nterprise Architect Performance 62 65 68 For ASA Data Repository 65 For MSDE Server Data Repository 68 For MySQL Data Repository 50 For Oracle Data Repository 55 For PostgreSQL Data Repository 62 For Progress OpenEdge Data Repository 68 For SQL Server Data Repository 52 Limitations Of XMI 109 50 52 55 Load Controlled Package 114 Lock Apply User Lock 194 Connector 185 Delete 185 Delete User level 196 Diagram Rigorous Security Mode 194 Diagram User Group Lock 192 Element 185 Identify Owner 196 Manage 185 Manage User Level 196 Model Elements Rigorous Security Mode 194 Model Elements User Group Lock 192 Package Rigorous Security Mode 194 Package User Group Lock 192 Packages 193 Release User Lock 194 Standard Security Policy 192 View 185 View User Level 196 Locked Element Add Connectors 193 Indicators 195 Login Group 182 Multiple Under One ID 182 Maintain Groups 182 Security Users 175 Maintenance Dialog 242 Problem Types 242 Testing Types 243 Manage Baselines 208 Locks 185 Models 2 User Level Locks 196 Views 85 Views Add Views 86 Views Delete 88 Views Rename 87 Manual Version Control With XMI 116 Menu Package Control 110 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 260 Index Menu Create Oracle 10g Server Repository 43 Version Control 157 Create Oracle 11g Server Repository 43 Merge Create Oracle 9i Server Repository 43 Baseline With Current Model Overview 207 Create Post
251. number of valid UML Model Management Model Validation Rules Reference 93 children and whether or not the element is missing any required children e Element Relationship Feature Property Validity e Checks whether or not the item has the correct UML properties defined and whether the properties contain incorrect or conflicting values for more information on these properties see the Custom Properties topic in UML Modeling with Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool e Element Relationship Feature OCL Conformance 94 Validates an item against any defined constraints in OCL 6 2 1 Well Formedness This group of rules checks whether or not an element relationship feature or diagram is well formed The rules includes checks such as whether the item is a valid UML item and whether a diagram contains valid elements within it Reported violations include MVRO10001 MVRO50001 MVRO50002 MVR050003 MVR050004 Element is not a valid UML Element Relationship is not a valid UML Relationship Relationship is not legal for Start Element gt End Element Parent Element isLeaf true and cannot be generalized by Child Element Child Element isRoot true and cannot generalize Parent Element The element is not a recognized UML 2 1 1 element The relationship is not a recognized UML 2 1 1 relationship The relationship between the given start and end
252. ny existing model file see the Design a Custom Template 9 topic When you have entered the filenames click on the Create Project button to create your project Click on the Cancel button to close the dialog without creating a new project Tip You can copy any Enterprise Architect project using Windows Explorer and open the copied project as a new project O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 74 Upgrade Models 2 Upgrade Models The structure of Enterprise Architect project files is occasionally changed to support more features When this happens existing project files must be upgraded to the new format to ensure correct operation and to take advantage of all the new features When you try to load a project that was created in an early release of Enterprise Architect for example an archived project using a recent release of Enterprise Architect the system determines whether the project should be upgraded and if the upgrade is necessary displays the Upgrade Wizard 74 which takes you through the upgrade process Upgrading is a simple and quick process that brings your project to the current level to support all the latest Enterprise Architect features 2 1 The Upgrade Wizard When you first try to load an old project in a new version of Enterprise Architect the system determines whether the project should be upgraded and if the upgrade is necessary displays the Upgrade Wizard Upgrading Enterpris
253. o VFP Driver dbf Microsoft ODBC for Oracle e mos so nan A As 5 Select Adaptive Server Anywhere or SQL Anywhere from the list 4 Click on the Finish button 5 Enter the following configuration details e A name for the connection on the ODBC tab O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 32 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository ODEC Login Database Network Advanced Data source name asa ea modell Description Isolation level E Microsoft applications Keys in SQL Statistics Delphi applications Suppress fetch wamings E Prevent driver not capable errors E Delay AutoCommit until statement close Describe Cursor Behavior Never 9 Hf required Always Translator lt No Translator gt e The username and password on the Login tab dba sql are the defaults when ASA is installed UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 33 ODBC Login Database Network Advanced Use integrated login 9 Supply user ID and password UserID dba Password eee E Encrypt password ok Cancel Hep e The server name and the path to the database on the Database tab 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 34 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository ODBC Login Databas
254. o apply Windows authentication from the new database 12 4 Import User IDs From Active Directory When you import user IDs from Windows Active Directory you should create an appropriate user group 181 and assign the imported user IDs to that group You can then assign appropriate permissions to the group When a user logs in to Enterprise Architect under their Windows login ID they do not have to enter a password Enterprise Architect automatically generates a random password However you can assign a new password to an imported user ID if required To import user IDs from a Windows Active Directory follow the steps below 1 On the Security Users dialog select the Accept Windows Authentication checkbox and click on the Import button The Import Users dialog displays _ Users Security Group Administrators z Add _ Remove 2 On the Import Users dialog click on the down arrow in the Security Group field and select the appropriate security group for the imported user IDs 3 Click on the Add button The Select Users screen displays O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 178 User Security Import User IDs From Active Directory Enterthe object names to select examples 4 Click on the Object Types button and on the Object Types dialog select the checkbox for the type of object to import from the Active Directory Click on the OK button to return to the Select Us
255. o apply a User Lock throughout the selected model branch before proceeding 11 6 6 Include Other Users Packages You can retrieve packages that have been created by other users or by you in another model from version control and import them into your current model Other users might be creating packages to use in your model If you are not sharing a SQL database or EAP file those packages do not automatically become part of your model If the packages have been placed into version control you can retrieve them and import them into your model as children of an existing package using the Get Package command 1 You must have access to the package files through the version control system and you must define a Version Control Configuration through which to access those files The version control configuration must use the same unique ID that was originally used to add the package to version control In the Project Browser right click on the package to use as the parent of the incoming package Select the Package Control Get Package context menu option The Get Shared File dialog displays UML Model Management Version Control Use Version Control 165 Select a Version Control Configuration SVN_config SVN C VC Workspaces Subversion RoysTesting Select shared file for 4 Inthe Select a Version Control Configuration field click on the drop down arrow and select the version control
256. o begin the data transfer process When the process is complete you have upsized your model to Access 2007 and can now open it from Enterprise Architect O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 14 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 1 4 2 Upsize to Sybase ASA Before you set up Enterprise Architect for use with Sybase Adaptive Server Anywhere ASA it is recommend that you run the project integrity check tool select the Tools Data Management Project Integrity Check 76 menu option on the base project to upsize to ASA This ensures the data is clean before uploading Note You cannot move a model from a source EAP file of a version earlier than 3 5 0 Warning Before proceeding ensure MDAC 2 6 or higher is installed on your system Upsizing Your Database You upsize your database for ASA in three stages as follows Stage One Install ASA Components 1 Install Adaptive Server Anywhere SQL Anywhere Studio 8 or higher This also installs the ASA ODBC driver 2 Create a new database for the Enterprise Architect repository using Sybase Central 3 Create a suitable ODBC Data Source to point to your new database Note See Set up an Adaptive Server Anywhere ODBC Driver 30 Stage Two Configure the Database From Sybase Central 1 Right click on the newly created database 2 Open Interactive SQL and load the ASA_BaseModel sq file This is available to register
257. o made the change e When the change was made e Where the change was made e The value of the characteristic before the change e The value of the characteristic after the change 13 5 Auditing Performance Issues Impact of Auditing on Other Facilities Enabling auditing on a project increases the time taken for most actions For most modeling tasks this increase is insignificant however there are some situations where the difference is more substantial Large Deletions Deleting large packages or package structures or large numbers of elements takes significantly longer with auditing on You might disable auditing 1981 before performing such a deletion XMI Imports Importing XMI 1061 takes longer with auditing enabled A project level option 1981 is provided for disabling auditing of XMI Imports Reverse Engineering Reverse engineering code takes longer with auditing enabled A project level option 19 is provided for disabling auditing of reverse engineering 13 6 Audit View Performance Issues Most operations in the Audit View are affected by the volume of use of the database both by other facilities and by auditing itself Some potential problems and their solutions are outlined below Navigating the Project Browser Within Auditing is Slow e Try setting the time filter 204 to a period in the immediate past such as Today Previous 24 Hours or Previous Week This time period updates each time you open or refresh the Au
258. o review package history follow the steps below 1 Inthe Project Browser right click on the package configured for version control The context menu displays 2 Select the Package Control File History menu option e lf the package has been configured through SCC you access the history through the mechanism offered by the third party SCC provider e If the package has been configured for CVS Subversion or TFS Enterprise Architect s File Version History dialog displays and the following steps apply Revisions Log Entry ES 2667 2668 rchester 2009 05 14 17 10 35 1000 Thu 14 May 2005 2662 Check in 14 05 2009 4 09 46 PM 3 Inthe Revisions field click on a revision number to view the log entries for that revision 4 To view the package history select a revision and then click on the Retrieve button A warning dialog displays indicating that the package is being opened in read only mode 5 Click on the Yes button to continue or the No button to cancel the action The package is retrieved in read only mode enabling you to view the history of the package at the specified version 6 To go back to the latest version in the Project Browser right click on the package and select either the Package Control Check Out context menu option or the Package Control Get Latest context menu option 11 6 11 Refresh View of Shared Project When a user of a shared model checks out a package and makes changes other user
259. odel E Actors G Manage Users i Manage Inventory E Take Orders J Fulfill Orders S E Traceability Model Ea ManageUsers fa Manage Inventory E Business Processes Model a Abstract Implementation Model S y OnlineBookstore TA AdminBookstore tS Manage Users Ge Ge T ME EE E E Traceability in this model is examined further in the following topics e Packages and Elements 2137 e Create Traceability Diagrams 22 e Traceability Tools 224 16 1 Packages and Elements Analyzing the requirements of a system or process helps you identify units of functional activity in that system or process You can represent these units with Packages which you then populate with elements of relevance to the functional units and to the stage of development In the following four diagrams you can see how Requirements and Use Case Packages are created to group the Requirements elements and Use Case elements that define and start to implement each of several functional areas By maintaining the same structure in each model in the project as discussed in the Traceability 217 topic you also make it easy to trace the project development through the stages UML Model Management Traceability Packages and Elements 219 Requirement Packages for Online Bookstore Process Formal Requirements Online Bookstore Log Transaction REQO11 Manage User Accounts REQO13 Manage Deliveries REQ016 Add Users REQ028 Proc
260. odeling systems as additional information or are ignored completely Enterprise Architect can both generate and read XMI 1 0 and 1 1 using UML 1 3 format XMI 1 2 using UML 1 4 format and XMI 2 1 using UML 2 0 and UML 2 1 format Note that round tripping model elements using XMI for example to version control or for controlled package is only possible using XMI 1 1 UML 1 3 Enterprise Architect format which uses the additional Tagged Values to store the UML 2 0 information Notes for Exporting to Rose and Other Tools e There are also discrepancies in the Unisys Rose implementation with regard to spelling mistakes and slightly different syntax to the official XMI 1 1 specification so problems might occur e The way packages are arranged in different models can impact successful import into other systems Experimentation is the only work around for this problem e Some parts of the XMI import export process do not work as expected in products like Rational Rose for example Note Links are not supported and State Operations import but do not appear in diagrams In addition Rational Rose only supports import of a full project not a single package e For best results it is recommended that you keep the model elements to export to Rose simple and conforming as closely as possible to the UML 1 3 specification 8 5 The UML DTD When you import or export Enterprise Architect packages to XMI the import or export process can be validated using a
261. odels e Security Groups 182 see User Security in UML Models e Security User Groups 175i see User Security in UML Models e Security User Permissions 180 see User Security in UML Models e Security Users 175 see User Security in UML Models e Standard Complexity Types currently these cannot be directly edited and are therefore effectively standard for all models they can be listed using the Predefined Reference Data Tagged Value type Complexity Types see SDK for Enterprise Architect e Status Colors 2351 the colors defined for status types e Status Types 23h e Status Applies Tol2351 elements to which the status can be applied e Stereotypes all those listed on the Stereotypes page of the UML Types dialog see SDK for Enterprise Architect e Templates HTML Style exports the web templates listed in the Templates folder of the Resources window see Report Creation in UML Models e Templates HTML Style Detail exports the content of the HTML report templates see Report Creation in UML Models e Templates RTF Document exports the Extended RTF Style templates in the Templates folder of the Resources window see Report Creation in UML Models e Templates RTF Style exports the Legacy RTF Style templates in the Templates folder of the Resources window see Report Creation in UML Models e Templates RTF Style Detail exports the content of the RTF templates see Report Creation in UML Models e T
262. of your CVS server and replace repositoryFolder with the path to the repository on the server 4 Create a local CVS workspace derived from the remote repository An example command is C myCVSWorkSpace gt cvs d pserver myUserlID ServerName cvs checkout moduleName Note The above command creates a subdirectory in your current working directory called moduleName Replace moduleName with the name of the module created by your system administrator It creates local copies of all files contained in the CVS module found at ServerName cvs It also creates a subdirectory beneath moduleName called CVS This subdirectory contains a file called Root that contains your CVS connection information Enterprise Architect uses this file to obtain your CVS user ID 5 Verify that your CVS installation is working correctly 6 Change directory to the one you specified as the working copy in the cvs checkout command above that is C myCVSWorkSpace moduleName 7 Now create a test file such as Test txt containing the text CVS Test You can do this with the command echo CVS Test gt Test txt 8 Execute the following CVS commands e cvs add Test txt e cvs commit m Commit comment Test txt e cvs update Test txt e cvs edit Test txt e cvs editors Test txt 9 The editors command should produce output resembling the following Test1 txt myUserlD Tue Aug 9 10 08 43 2009 GMT myComputer C myCVSWorkSpace moduleName 10 Take note of the userlD that
263. ol configurations for each model You can use the Version Control Settings dialog to set up a connection to your version control application To set the Version Control Configuration select the Project Version Control Version Control Settings menu option and see the Version Control Settings Dialog 1351 topic See Also e Version Control with SCC 137 e Version Control with CVS 144 e Version Control with Subversion 14 e Version Control with TFS 154 11 5 1 Version Control Settings Dialog The Version Control Settings dialog enables you to specify the information required to create a Version Control Configuration which can then be used to establish a connection to a version control provider Enterprise Architect supports version control through MS Team Foundation Server Subversion CVS or any SCC compliant version control product It is possible to use multiple version control configurations in the same Enterprise Architect model It is also possible to use the same version control configuration across different models to facilitate sharing standard packages between those models through the version control system Note In the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect if security is enabled you must have Configure Version Control 183 permission to set up version control options for the current model Setting Up Version Control When you display the Ve
264. ommon Type Length Precision amp Scale Defined Datatypes for Programming Languages New Save ii Product Datatype Size Unit Default Max Java boolean Java byte Java char Java double Java float Java int Java long Java short Product Name Specify the name of the programming language Add Product Add a new programming language to the drop down fields for Class elements within the Enterprise Architect model and enable the new language to be made available to the Code Template Editor once at least one datatype has been added to the language See Code Engineering Using UML Models Datatype Specify the name of the datatype this is the language specific name of the datatype Common Type Specify the common type the generic name of the datatype for example the Java boolean datatype has a common datatype Boolean New Create a new data type Save the newly created datatype Delete the selected datatype Note You can transport these data types between models using the Export Reference Datal25 and Import Reference Datal2531 options on the Tools menu 17 7 Import and Export Reference Data Reference data including Glossary and Issue information can be exported to and imported from XML files for convenient update of models You can automatically 2537 or manually 257 import data into the model from a reference data XML file exported 25H from another model or an iteration of the current model
265. on Click on the Constraint Status tab UML Model Management Reference Data General Types 239 To add a new constraint status type click on the New button type the status type in the Status field and click on the Save button The constraint status type displays in the Status list Note You can transport these constraint status types between models using the Export Reference Data 25 and Import Reference Datal253 options on the Tools menu 17 2 4 Requirement Types The Requirement tab of the General Types dialog enables you to specify the generic set of requirement types that can be entered into the requirements sections of dialogs This helps to maintain a single set of typed requirements To access this dialog select the Settings General Types menu option Click on the Requirement tab O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 240 Reference Data General Types Defined Requirement Types Name Description Display System will display in a specifie Functional Functional Requirement Performance Performance based requirement Printing System printing requirement Report The system will produce a report Testing Testing requirement Validate Validate a particular rule To add a new requirement type click on the New button and e Inthe Requirement field type the name of the requirement type e Inthe Description field type a
266. on it the object border displays in red This indicates that you cannot change the object 12 16 Add Connectors To Locked Elements When working with locked elements the ability to add connectors depends on the locked status of the source and target elements The rules are Source unlocked target unlocked any kind of connector can be added e Source unlocked target locked allowed except for composition connectors e Source locked target unlocked prohibited except for composition connectors e Source locked target locked prohibited for all connectors That is a connector can be added if its source is unlocked regardless of the locking state of the destination think of it as modifying what the source can see The exception is composition connectors where the target that is parent must be unlocked think of it as modifying the parent by adding children Connectors with locked source or target elements are also locked To unlock the connector you must unlock 185 the source and or target element 12 17 Lock Packages Note If security is enabled you must have Lock Objects 1837 permission to lock a package You can lock all the contents of a package and optionally all contents in child packages in one step using the Lock Package function The locks are automatically applied to elements and to diagrams as if they had been individually set or cleared Lock types and details are the same as for locking a single element 192
267. onnection with a new unique ID You can assign a name to the existing SCC configuration or associate the project with a configuration that has previously been assigned a unique ID By having a unique ID for Version Control Configurations you can assign a configuration quickly and efficiently using configurations that have been created previously for other version controlled repositories This enables you to configure the many packages to use an existing version control repository this can apply to packages created for more than just one model enabling a great deal of flexibility To upgrade an existing SCC version control project created before release 4 5 in Enterprise Architect release 4 5 or later follow the steps below 1 Open the project that has an SCC Version Control Configuration created in Enterprise Architect earlier UML Model Management Version Control Version Control Setup 141 than version 4 5 2 The Select or Create Unique ID for Version Control dialog prompts you to create an ID for an existing configuration or to choose a previously created one from the Unique ID drop down list 3 The existing SCC configuration is the initial value represented by SCC XXXXX this number is not especially meaningful therefore it is recommended that the configuration be given a meaningful name This project is configured for version control using Enterprise Architect 4 1 or earlier To use it under 4 5 or later sup
268. ons of XMI 10 e Applying a UML Data Type Definition 10 DTD For further information on XMI including specifications see the OMG XML XMI Technology topic Notes e XMI 2 1 exported by Enterprise Architect 7 0 or later might not be correctly imported into earlier versions of Enterprise Architect e When you select to apply a DTD during an XMI 1 1 export the UML_EA DTD file is written to the output directory into which the XML files are written unless the UML_EA DTD file is already present in the directory No error is generated if the UML_EA DTD file is not present in this directory during the XMI export However an error does occur if you are importing an XMI 1 1 file that has been exported with the UML_EA DTD file and the UML_EA DTD file is not present in the same directory as the XMI file UML Model Management XMI Import and Export 105 Important When you import an XML file over an existing package ALL information in the current package is deleted first Before you import the XML file please make sure you do not have important changes that you do not want to lose 8 1 Export to XMI You can export a package to an XMI XML based file This enables you to move Enterprise Architect Model elements between models for distributed development 9 manual version control 161 and other benefits It also enables limited export of Enterprise Architect model elements to Rational Rose and other tools that
269. options are for exporting del elements to ott t 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 106 XMI Import and Export Export to XMI 3 Inthe Filename field type the directory path and filename into which to output the XMI file 4 If required in the Stylesheet field click on the drop down arrow and select a stylesheet to post process XMI content before saving to the file 5 Select the Export Diagrams checkbox to export diagrams in the file 6 Select the Export Alternate Images checkbox to export the alternative images used in the diagrams 7 Select the Format XMI Output checkbox to format output into readable XML this takes a few more seconds at the end of the run 8 Select the Write Log file checkbox to write a log of export activity recommended the log file is saved to the directory into which you export the XMI file 9 If using XMI 1 1 select the Use DTD checkbox to use the UML1 3 DTD recommended Setting this option validates the correctness of the model and checks that no syntactical errors have occurred For more information regarding the use of DTDs see the UML DTD 10 topic 10 Leave the Enable full EA Roundtrip checkbox selected to keep data specific to Enterprise Architect in the XMI file 11 In the XMI Type field click on the drop down arrow and select the appropriate XMI format e XMI 1 1 to generate output in XMI 1 1 format necessary if you intend to use this file in a comparison with th
270. or Zach Requirements mix TCONIX Use Case Sc SystemC Domain Model W Verilog Class WH VHOL Database BRM Business Rule Model Component Deployment Testing Maintenance Project Management User Interface DOP SG emm SHH AAA Select From Select the category containing the types of Model Package to create Technology If you have advanced Add Ins and MDG Technologies this panel lists them Select the appropriate technology to list the associated templates in the Name panel To list the standard Enterprise Architect model templates select lt default gt For more information on the model templates see Using Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool A Select all of the models UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Create a New Project 11 None Clear all models selected ES Create the Model Packages for your project Abort the creation of model packages Help Display this Help topic If you are a Technology Developer you can also create and distribute custom templates as part of your own MDG Technology The name of your technology displays in the Technology panel and when you select the technology the model template names display in the Name panel If you have defined a filter in your Model Technology File you can select that from the Select from drop down list see SDK for Enterprise Architect 1 4 Set Up a Database Repository Introduction The
271. ord see the Change Passwordl196 topic 7 Set up users and permissions as required Note Once security has been enabled you must have the Security Enable Disable 1851 access right to turn it off The initial administrator automatically has this access right 8 To disable security click on the Enable Security menu option and again type the authorization key in the Authorization dialog Click on the OK button Security is disabled Notes e The system prompts you to log off the project and log on again but this is not strictly necessary e To re enable security follow the procedure above but be aware that any changes you have made to the admin user password and reduced access rights are reset to password and full access e The Automatically apply Exclusive Edit Locks to diagrams option is not displayed when disabling security Therefore to toggle the setting whilst security is enabled you must disable security and re enable it Security settings users groups and permissions and locks on elements are NOT affected by this action 12 2 Security Policy There are two possible security policies in Enterprise Architect 1 In the User Group Locking mode all elements and diagrams are considered unlocked and anyone can edit any part of the project However when you edit a diagram package or element you lock the element or set of elements at either the user level or group level This mode is good for cooperative work groups
272. ord fields Created Date and Modified Date are not set when imported from CSV Using Preserve Hierarchy When selected the Preserve Hierarchy option inserts two fields into the CSV specification that are e automatically populated by Enterprise Architect on export and e used to reconstruct the exported package s hierarchy upon import Peia Desert CSV_KEY A unique identifier for the current element Note This key is unique per export subsequent exports produce different keys for the same set of elements CSV_PARENT_KEY The corresponding CSV_KEY of the current element s parent If the field is left blank or references a non existent CSV_KEY the element is added to the top level of the package However if you intend to import hierarchical information from a spreadsheet that was not populated by exporting data from Enterprise Architect you must add these two fields to your spreadsheet as the last two columns and populate the columns yourself For example UML Model Management CSV Import and Export CSV Specifications 121 NAME Requirement Package REQ1 REQ2 REQ2 1 REQ2 2 REQ2 3 REQ3 REQ3 1 REQ3 2 REQ4 REQ4 1 REQ4 2 REQ4 3 Note TYPE Package Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement NOTES Notes Package1 Notes on REQ1 Notes on REQ2 Notes on REQ2 1 Notes on REQ2 2 Notes on REQ2 3
273. orming the transfer take a backup of the target project to ensure that you can recover any important information it contains Notes e Inthe Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect if security is enabled you must have Transfer Data 1831 permission to transfer project data between repositories See User Security in UML Models e You cannot move a model from a source EAP file of a version earlier than 3 5 0 e You must transfer data into a repository where scripts have been run to set up tables not just a database If necessary follow the steps below e Install the DBMS software and create a database Ensure that the collation is set to the alphabet you use such as Latin or Cyrillic e Runa script supplied by Sparx Systems http www sparxsystems com resources corporate index html sql_scripts to create the required tables To perform a project data transfer follow the steps below 1 Select the Tools Data Management Project Transfer menu option The Project Transfer dialog 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 80 Project Data Transfer Perform a Project Data Transfer 4 5 displays Transfer Type EAP to EAP C DBMS to EAP C JEAP to DBMS C DBMS to DBMS Source and Target Projects Source Project em Target Project ass Logfile og Caution The Target Project will be erased prior to transfer Ple
274. ort data from This must be an XML file produced by the Enterprise Architect Data Exporter 25h 3 If you have entered the name of a valid file a list of available tables to import displays in the Select Datasets to Import panel Click on one or more of the tables to import press Ctrl or Shift to click on multiple tables 5 Click on the Import button to start the process A message displays when the import is complete Generally the process is quite fast Import Data Automatically The automatic import checks if the source file has changed since the last import if the file has not changed the import does not proceed If the file has changed the changed data is imported however you can configure Enterprise Architect to display a prompt for you to allow or cancel the import 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 254 Reference Data Import and Export Reference Data To set up the system to check and import reference data automatically whenever your model is reloaded into Enterprise Architect follow the steps below 1 Select the Tools Import Reference Data menu option The Import Reference Data dialog displays Click on the Shared File tab Import File Shared File Reference data file for automatic import Select File Clear E Always prompt before import Datasets in File Name _impor_J cose Hep 2 If you are changing an existing configuration to impo
275. ository SQL Server repositories are created without any data so you must perform a project data transfer 79 in Enterprise Architect to copy a suitable starter project If you are starting from scratch EABase EAP 6 is a good starting point If you are using an existing EAP model you can upsize 11 it UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 41 To use SQL Enterprise Manager to create a SQL Server repository follow the steps below 1 In SQL Enterprise Manager locate the server on which to create your new Enterprise Architect model in the example below this is DBSERVERO2ASQLEXPRESS g B DBSERVERO2 SQLEXPRESS SQL Server 9 0 204 Restore Database Restore Files and Filegroups Haee Reports E Refresh ri 2 Right click and choose the New Database context menu option 3 Enter a suitable name for the database Set any file options as required Selecta page S Script y Hel General Sse He 14 Options o Filegroups Database name ea_sqlserver Owner lt default gt aaa Database files Logical Name File Type Filegroup Initial Size MB Autogrowth ea_salserver Data PRIMARY i 4 i By 1 MB unrestricted growth ea_salserver Log Not Applicable 1 By 10 percent unrestricted growtl Server DBSERVERO2 SQLEXPRESS Connection sa 337 View connection properties maa
276. ossOver the best way to run the commands is to create a Windows batch file containing the command to run and to run that batch file as a UML Model Management Version Control Version Control Setup 151 Windows command under CrossOver See the example batch file 15 below If you are running directly under WINE launch the Windows batch file from a Unix shell script such as follows home user cxoffice bin wine bottle ea untrusted workdir home user cxoffice ea drive_c nome user cxoffice ea drive_c batfile bat Enterprise Architect uses the Subversion command line client to communicate with your Subversion server In order for Enterprise Architect to work successfully with Subversion your Subversion working copy environment must be set up such that you can issue commands to Subversion from the command line without ever being prompted for user input such as username or password By default whenever the Subversion command line client successfully responds to a server s authentication challenge it saves the credentials in the user s private runtime configuration area which is e subversion auth on Unix like systems or e APPDATA Subversion auth on Windows which translates to drive_c windows profiles crossover Application Data Subversion auth under CrossOver For this reason Sparx Systems recommend that when you checkout a working copy from the Subversion repository you specify yo
277. ostgreSQL connection is now available to use in Enterprise Architect 1 4 9 3 ASA ODBC Driver Before you can connect to an Adaptive Server Anywhere ASA data repository you must first set up an ASA ODBC driver To do this you must have Microsoft MDAC components the ASA DBMS system and the ASA ODBC driver installed with the ASA DBMS installed To set up your ASA ODBC Driver follow the steps below 1 Select the Windows Control Panel Administrative Tools Data Sources ODBC option The ODBC Data Sources Administrator window displays UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 31 User DSN System DSN File DSN Drivers Tracing Connection Pooling About Microsoft dBase Driver dbf Excel Files Microsoft Excel Driver xds MS Access Database Microsoft Access Driver mdb Regression MySQL ODEC 3 51 Driver An ODBC User data source stores information about how to connect to Eb the indicated data provider A User data source is only visible to you and can only be used on the current machine 2 Click on the Add button The Create New Data Source dialog displays enabling you to add a new DSN Select a driver for which you want to set up a data source Name Microsoft dBase Driver dbf Microsoft dBase VFP Driver dbf Microsoft dBase Treiber dbf Microsoft Excel Driver ds Microsoft Excel Treiber xds Microsoft FoxPr
278. ou are importing an XMI 1 1 file that was previously exported with a UML_EA DTD file the UML_EA DTD file must be present in the directory into which the XMI file is being written An error occurs if the UML_EA DTD file is absent In the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect if security is enabled you must have Import XMI 183 permission to import packages from XMI See User Security in UML Models UML Model Management XMI Import and Export Import from XMI 107 You can import the following formats XMI 1 0 XMI 1 1 XMI 1 2 UML 1 3 XMI 2 1 UML 1 3 UML 1 4 UML 2 0 UML 2 1 XMI 2 1 MOF 1 3 XMI 1 1 MOF 1 4 XMI 1 2 RAZA Enterprise Architect can also import the emx and uml2 files 1087 generated by tools such as Rational Software Architect RSA and Rational Software Modeler RSM Import From XMI To import a package from XMI follow the steps below 1 Inthe Project Browser window select the package into which to import the file 2 Either e Right click and select the Import Export Import Package from XMI context menu option or e Select the Project Import Export Import Package from XMI menu option The Import Package from XMI dialog displays oar Requirements Model Filename C Requirements Req020509 Options Y Import Diagrams E Strip GUID s Y Write Log file
279. ous details including the name of the project to connect to and perhaps the user name to use when you log in 10 The new configuration is added to the list in the Defined Configurations panel O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 140 Version Control Version Control Setup Note A new entry is also created in the Local Paths list with the same ID as the new version control configuration The Local Path entry records the Local Project path for use in subsequent path substitutions 11 When you have finished defining your version control configurations click on the Close button For further information on the fields on the Version Control Settings dialog see the following table This model is Specify whether all users connect to a single shared copy of the model for example a private DBMS or each user connects to their own private copy of the model When unselected for shared models the option disables the File History Retrieve functionality when the selected package is checked out by another user This prevents modifications that might have been made by the other user from being discarded through importing a prior revision from version control Save nested Set nested version controlled packages to stubs or fully expanded trees Defaults to version controlled selected packages to stubs only For a full explanation of this option see Version Control Nested Packages 137 Specify a configuration name
280. pecified letter found in the directory location 8 Click on the required name or press and hold Ctrl and click on several names and click on the OK button The simple Select Users dialog redisplays with the selected names listed 9 Click on the OK button The Project Authors tab redisplays with the selected name or names in the Name s field Project Roles People associated with a project play a role in analysis design or implementation such as Application Analyst Architect Developer and Project Manager Project roles define the activities that resources can undertake To define the role types that are captured within Enterprise Architect select the Settings People menu option and on the People dialog click on the Project Roles tab UML Model Management Reference Data People 231 Project Author s Project Roles Resources Project Clients Role Description Defined Roles Type Description Application Analyst Define and model the application s Business Analyst Model business processes C Programmer Programming in Visual C Developer Application development Java Programmer Java programming Project Manager Manage schedule Solution Architect Lead Technical and Project Archit Use Case Modeller Use Case modelling VB Programmer Visual Basic Programming To add further roles click on the New button and complete the fields as described below Roe Type
281. perties dialog displays 6 Select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers from the list then click on the Next button 7 Inthe Use Data source name field click on the drop down arrow and select the ODBC Data Source you configured to point to your new database Note See Connect to a OpenEdge Data Repository 68 for more information 8 Click on the OK button 9 If required select the Logfile checkbox and enter a path and filename for the data transfer log file 10 Click on the Transfer button to begin the data transfer process When the process is complete you have upsized your model to OpenEdge and can now open it from Enterprise Architect 1 4 4 Upsize to MSDE Before you set up Enterprise Architect for use with SQL Server Desktop Engine MSDE it is recommended that you run the project integrity check tool select the Tools Data Management Project Integrity Check 76 menu option on the base project to upsize to MSDE This ensures the data is clean before uploading Note You cannot move a model from a source EAP file of a version earlier than 3 5 0 Warning Before proceeding ensure MDAC 2 6 or higher is installed on your system Upsizing Your Database Follow the steps in Upsizing to SQL Server 20 gt to upsize your model to MSDE 1 4 5 Upsize to PostgreSQL Before you set up Enterprise Architect for use with PostgreSQL it is recommend that you run the project integrity check tool select the Tools
282. plays instead of the Select Enterprise Architect Project to Open dialog UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 53 Select the data you want to connect to OLE DB Provider s MediaCatalogDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogMergedDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogWebDB OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Outlook Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider MSDataShape OLE DB Provider for Microsoft Directory Services 3 Select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server from the list 4 Click on the Next gt gt button The Connection tab displays 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 54 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository Provider Connection Advanced AL Specify the following to connect to SQL Server data 1 Select or enter a server name 2 Enter information to log on to the server Use Windows NT Integrated security Use a specific user name and password User name sa Password E Blank password Allow saving password 3 Select the database on the server C Attach a database file as a database name
283. plied a user lock and the current user cannot edit the item If you are using the standard 74 security mode 174 No marker there is no lock the item is editable but any user can now apply a user or group lock 19d e Blue exclamation mark the item has a lock set by the current user or a group having the current user as a member and the user can edit the item e Red exclamation mark the item has a lock set by another user or a group of which the current user is not a member the current user cannot edit the item If another user has locked an item you can identify who has locked it 1967 Note If a diagram is locked and you select an object on it the object border displays in red This indicates that you cannot change the object O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 196 User Security Identify Who Has Locked An Object 12 20 Identify Who Has Locked An Object If you find that a diagram package or element is locked you can find out which group or user currently holds the lock on that item To do this follow the steps below 1 Inthe Project Browser right click on the diagram package or element that is locked by another user or user group The context menu displays 2 Select the Lock menu option A message box displays showing which group or user currently holds the lock on that item A The selected item is locked by the user Frederick Walter 12 21 Manage Your Own Locks You ca
284. ply a new unique ID for this connection or select one of your existing configurations which matches the settings for this project Unique ID SCC Defaul Y 4 You can associate the version controlled package with a previously defined configuration by selecting an existing configuration from the Unique ID drop down list if one exists This project is configured for version control using Enterprise Architect 4 1 or earlier To use it under 4 5 or later supply a new unique ID for this connection or select one of your existing configurations which matches the settings for this project Unique ID SCC DCIC5 SCC Default My Link MywlinCWS 5 After you have assigned the unique ID click on the OK button to load the model 11 5 3 Version Control with CVS CVS is used to manage files and directories and is an open source version control system In order to use CVS version control with Enterprise Architect you must install version control software on your local machine Also you must create a working directory using your version control software before you can configure Enterprise Architect You can have as many working directories as you like on your local machine You must also connect to a repository which can be either a remote repository 144 or local 1451 to your machine If your repository is local it must be created with your version control software Each working folder you create contains information on con
285. prise Architect prompts you to specify whether to save or clear the items covering a specific period of time e If you click on the No button you save or clear all log items currently held in the database e If you click on the Yes button the Time Filter dialog displays on which you select a standard time period or define your own o 9 Today Previous Hour C Previous 24 Hours Previous Week O Previous 30 Days C Previous Year 13 2 3 Auditing Level The Auditing Level panel provides three options that determine what kind of model changes are recorded e Core select this radio button to record changes to elements including attributes and operations packages connectors and some model level information e Standard select this radio button to record the same changes as the Core option plus changes to diagrams e Extended select this radio button to record the same changes as the Standard option plus changes to security 13 2 4 Audit Options The following elements are always audited e Packages e Notes e Boundary e Text e Diagrams if on Standaral200 level e Security if on Extended 200 level The audit options enable you to configure auditing to record changes to only certain types of elements e Maintenance select this radio button to audit maintenance elements that is e Package e Requirement e Feature e Use Case e Actor e Note UML Model Management Auditing Auditing Settings
286. procedure for duplicating larger structures such as complete models or projects although exporting and importing individual child packages within the same model is just as feasible You cannot export and import specific elements using this procedure but the process of copying elements within or between packages models and projects is derived from it For further details of these copy procedures see UML Modeling With Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 82 Project Data Transfer Copy Packages Between Projects Procedure To copy a package from one Enterprise Architect project to another follow the steps below 1 2 3 Open the Enterprise Architect project to copy from In the Project Browser right click on the package to copy The context menu displays Select the Import Export Export package to XMI file menu option The Export Package to XMI dialog displays Root m weet eto Filename C Documents ProjMan CommsReview xml Stylesheet v Optional stylesheet to post process XMI content General Options For Export to Other Tools Export Diagrams V Enable full EA Roundtrip Export Altemate Images Format XMI Output XMI Type XMI 1 1 E Write Log file Use DTD Generate Diagram Images ormat sis S Select the appropriate options and filename see the Export to XMI 105i topic for further information Click on the Export button to b
287. project 9 open a project 8 and Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions connect to a data repository 49 Create a New Project File On creating a new project 9 the Model Wizard 107 enables you to create a model containing various Model Packages You can also add Model Packages to a project from the Project Browser by e Right clicking on an existing model and selecting the New Model or Add a New Model using Wizard context menu options e Right clicking on a package and selecting the Add Add a New Model using Wizard context menu option e Clicking on an existing model pressing Insert and selecting the New Model or Add a New Model using Wizard context menu options e Clicking on a package pressing Insert and selecting the Add a New Model using Wizard context menu option Open an Existing Project There are various ways to open a project 8 1in Enterprise Architect New users are advised to explore the EAExample file 8 supplied with Enterprise Architect Connect to a Data Repository Note This feature is available in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions Enterprise Architect enables you to connect to any of the following data repositories e MS Access 97 2000 and 2003 in all editions EAP files are stored in Microsoft JET databases e Access 2007 374 UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files
288. r Lock context menu option for the selected item The following dialog displays Select the appropriate radio button to apply or release a user lock on the selected item Note For a package you can elect to also lock all child packages at the same time If any elements in the package tree are locked by other users a list of elements that couldn t be locked displays at the end of the process UML Model Management User Security Locked Element Indicators 195 12 19 Locked Element Indicators When an item is locked through Project Security the lock is indicated in the Project Browser by a marker against the item as shown below Project Browser x FS a Po to Aa E dE G o E Model a 8 Locking LJ NoLocks e NoLocks E Packagel Edf Packagel 3 ClassM Y attl Opp10 J LockedByCurrentUser A LockedByCurrentUser a J Packagel dp Packagel E E ClassM ay attl Opp10 J LockedByOtherUser A LockedByOtherUser a J Packagel ep Packagel a fB ClassM A y Attl Opp10 m The meaning of the marker depends on the security mode If you are using the Require User Lock to Edit 1741 security mode No marker there is no lock the item is not editable but any user can now apply a user lock 194 to edit the item e Blue exclamation mark the current user has applied a user lock and can edit the item no other user can edit the item e Red exclamation mark another user has ap
289. re attempting to connect from Enterprise Architect For guidance on verifying your set up see the Create a Local Working Copyl150 topic The following is an example of a Windows batch file that can be used under CrossOver to run Subversion commands Simply uncomment the command to execute Each command should be a single line the is intended as a continuation character rem C Program Files Subversion bin svn exe checkout username UserName password myPassword svn myServerName 3690 myProject C SVN test workcopy gt CASVN testistdout txt amp 2 gt C SVN test stderr txt rem C Program Files Subversion bin svn exe add C SVN test workcopy myTestFile xml A gt CASVN testistdout txt amp 2 gt C SVN test stderr txt rem C Program Files Subversion bin svn exe commit m a message C SVN test workcopy myTestFile xml A gt CASVN testistdout txt amp 2 gt C SVN test stderr txt rem C Program Files Subversion bin svn exe lock C SVN test workcopy myTestFile xml A gt CASVN testistdout txt amp 2 gt C SVN test stderr txt 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 152 Version Control Version Control Setup 11 5 4 5 Version Control Configuration This topic assumes that you have already installed Subversion both the server and the client parts and that you have a local working copy 150 derived from a repository sub tree 14 already set up for use with your Enterprise Architect mode
290. rior revision from version control Save nested version Set nested version controlled packages to stubs or fully expanded trees controlled packages to Defaults to selected Stubs only For a full explanation of this option see the Version Control Nested Packages 137 topic Specify a configuration name that readily distinguishes it from other configurations The unique ID displays as a selection in a list of Version Control configurations a package can connect to In addition it is possible to select a previous version control configuration from this drop down menu providing the configuration is not in use in the current model Working Copy path Specify the folder where the XML files representing the packages are stored UML Model Management Version Control Version Control Setup 145 This folder should already exist before it is specified here Every version control configuration you define in Enterprise Architect should have its own local working copy folder in which to store working copies of the XMI package files this should not be a shared network folder Particularly bear this in mind if you are creating an Enterprise Architect project that is to be shared e g a SQL database Current User Specify the CVS user name associated with all CVS commands that are issued This name is used by Enterprise Architect to determine who has a package checked out CVS EXE Path Specify the full path of the CVS cl
291. rise Architect then imports the package file into the model updating the contents of the existing package in the model When checking in 162 Enterprise Architect exports the package as an XMI file overwriting the existing local working copy of the file The new file is then checked in to the version control system Nested Version Controlled Packages Nested version controlled packages result in much smaller XMI files being exported for parent packages as the parent packages XMI files do not contain any content for the version controlled child packages Version Control of nested packages 137 together with a model structure having small individual packages also provides greater scope for multiple users to work concurrently as individual users are locking much smaller parts of the model Notes e Do not place your EAP files under version control as this creates problems for you e Most version control systems mark their controlled files as read only unless they are specifically checked out to you e The EAP file is an MS Jet database and Enterprise Architect must be able to open this file for read write access when you load your model Enterprise Architect displays an error message and fails to load the model if it is read only 11 3 Version Control amp Team Deployment Team deployment and the use of version control is discussed in two Sparx Systems white papers available on the Sparx Systems web site e http www sparxsystems
292. rity is not enabled by default in Enterprise Architect you must enable it 173 first e For a number of operations in Enterprise Architect if security is enabled a user must have the appropriate user or group access permission to perform the operation However if security is not enabled the user does not have to have access permissions See the List of Available Permissions 185 topic 12 1 Enable Security User security is not enabled by default in Enterprise Architect To enable security for a project in Enterprise Architect for the first time follow the steps below 1 Access the Registered Users section of the Sparx Systems website http Awww sparxsystems com registered req_ea_corp ed html and obtain the Authorization Key You must have the Registered Users login and password to access this web site 2 In Enterprise Architect select the Project Security Enable Security menu option The Enter authorization dialog displays Enter authorization key Automatically apply Exclusive Edit Locks to diagrams 3 Inthe Enter authorization key field type the authorization key from the Sparx Systems website 4 If required select the Automatically apply Exclusive Edit Locks to diagrams checkbox Note In standard User Group Locking security mode 174 this option blocks multiple users from simultaneously attempting to modify the same diagram As a user modifies a diagram Enterprise Architect automatically applies
293. roject Browser The context menu displays 2 Select the New View menu option The Create New View dialog displays UML Model Management Model Maintenance Manage Views 87 3 Inthe Name field type the name of the View 4 Inthe Set View Icon Style panel click on the radio button for the required View icon 5 If the model root node is under version control 13i the Add to Version Control checkbox displays defaulted to selected If you do not want the new View to also be under version control deselect the checkbox See Version Control Within UML Models Using Enterprise Architect 6 Click on the OK button 5 4 2 Rename Views If required you can rename a view Procedure To rename a view follow the steps below 1 Right click on the View in the Project Browser The context menu displays 2 Select the Properties menu option The Package Properties dialog displays O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 88 Model Maintenance Manage Views 3 In the Name field type the new name and click on the OK button 5 4 3 Delete Views If necessary you can delete a view Warning If you delete a view all its contents are deleted at the same time It CANNOT be restored Procedure To delete a view follow the steps below 1 In the Project Browser right click on the view to delete The context menu displays 2 Select the Delete lt viewname gt option The following
294. roposed Validate and Mandatory See Project Management with Enterprise Architect 8 6 2 Configure Packages Before you can use a controlled package you must configure it with options such as the filename to save to load from the type of export and the version number Once a package is configured and marked as controlled it is displayed in the Project Browser with a small colored rectangle next to the package icon indicating it is a controlled package In the example below the RQ01 Formal Requirements package is a controlled package S C RaQuest a RaQuestUse a iL RQO1 Formal Requirements J BP01 Business Process Model 3 BPO2 Business Requirements Note In the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect if security is enabled you must have Configure Packages 83 permission to configure controlled packages and package properties See User Security in UML Models Configure a Controlled Package To configure a controlled package follow the steps below 1 Inthe Project Browser right click on the package to control or configure The context menu displays 2 Click on the Package Control Configure menu option The Package Control Options dialog displays UML Model Management XMI Import and Export Controlled Packages 113 Control Package Y Version Control None XMI Filename Resources xml 5 UML XMI Type Enterpr
295. rsion Control Settings dialog for the first time in any given model it appears as shown below 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 136 Version Control Version Control Setup Model Settings This model is private for Shared models it is best to disable this check box V Save nested version controlled packages to stubs only recommended Configuration Details Unique ID Type To begin defining a new version control configuration follow the steps below 1 Click on the New button In the Unique ID field type a suitable name Against the Type field click on the radio button for the version control product to connect to At this point the middle section of the dialog changes to display a collection of fields relating to the type of Version Control Configuration you are defining Go to the relevant topic below e Version Control with SCC h37 e Version Control with CVS 14t e Version Control with Subversion 14 e Version Control with TFS 154 wo UML Model Management Version Control Version Control Setup 137 To import a previously defined configuration for use in the current model follow the steps below Click on the New button 2 Inthe Unique ID field click on the drop down arrow and select one of the previously defined version control configurations 3 Click on the Save button to save the selected version control configuration in this mod
296. rsion controlled packages to stubs only recommended Configuration Details Unique ID Type Delete 3 Click on the New button 4 Inthe Unique ID field type a suitable name Click on the SCC radio button 5 To the right of the Local Project path field click on the Select Path button The Browse for Folder dialog displays UML Model Management Version Control Version Control Setup 139 E Browse For Folder The local path used to transfer package files must be specified HE Desktop Michael Fraser Le Public a Computer gt L Local Disk C gt Gg DVD RW Drive D gt GP SparxSoftware sparxsys01 S gt GP sparxshare sparxsys02 Y amp Network Le 7 5 Addins Ji Coding Locate and click on the local folder in which to keep local working copies of the XML files to be stored in the Version Control repository Click on the OK button The Select SCC Provider dialog displays Select SCC Provider Select Source Code Control Provider Microsoft Visual SourceSafe Microsoft Visual SourceSafe Internet Perforce SCM Note All users of the shared database must specify the same SCC provider Click on an SCC provider and click on the OK button to return to the Version Control Settings dialog 9 Click on the Save button to save the configuration you have defined The SCC provider is likely to prompt you for vari
297. rt from a different XML file click on the Clear button to clear the dialog fields 3 Click on the Select File button and browse for the filename to import data from This must be an XML file produced by the Enterprise Architect Data Exporter 25 4 If you have entered the name of a valid file a list of tables to import displays in the Datasets in File panel 5 If you prefer to control whether or not the automatic import takes place select the Always prompt before import checkbox 6 Click on the Import button to import the reference data now and to enable the automatic check and import for subsequent reloads UML Model Management Index 255 Index m EMX Import 106 UML2 Import 106 Access 2007 Repository Create 37 Upsize To 12 Active Directory Import User ID From 177 Adaptive Server Anywhere Data Repository Connect To 65 ODBC Driver Set Up 30 Repository Create 46 Upsize To 14 Add Connectors Between Locked Elements 193 Model To Project 6 Views 86 Administrator Security Perrmissions 173 All Permissions Dialog User Security 181 View User Security 181 Apply Rigorous Security Mode Lock 194 User Lock 194 ASA Data Repository Connect To 65 ODBC Driver Set Up 30 Repository Create 46 Upsize To 14 Audit Scope 199 Audit History Tab Description 205 How To Display 205 Audit Options All 200 Connectors Audited 200 Core Structural 200 Custom 200 Elements Audited 200 Maintena
298. ry is longer than the display area a horizontal scroll bar displays at the bottom of the panel Use this to scroll to the text that is not shown Show Differences Run the Compare 210 utility on the selected Baseline and the current model branch and to display the differences 212 between the two Restore to Completely restore the model branch from the selected Baseline Baseline New Baseline Create a new Baseline 210 Delete Selected Delete the selected Baseline Load Other Display a drop down menu that enables you to load Baselines from another model in Baselines either an EAP file or a DBMS file e For EAP files a browser displays locate the required project file e For DBMS files the Windows Data Link Properties dialog displays select the data provider and click on the OK button to display the Select Data Source dialog from which you select the required project In either case the Connected To message at the bottom of the Manage Baselines dialog changes to the name of the alternative model To return the dialog to the original project select the third option on the drop down list Load From Selected Package peace Import an XML 1 1 file from the file system as a new Baseline for this current model branch 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 210 Baselines Differencing and Merges Baselines Export File Export the selected Baseline to an XML file on disk Compare Model to Compare the
299. s Attribute 94 Element 94 Feature 94 Model Validation Rules for Conformance 94 Relationship 94 ODBC Driver Set Up 24 Offline 132 137 Checkout 169 Version Control 169 OLE DB Provider Microsoft For Oracle 55 Oracle Provider 55 Options Compare Utility 211 Oracle Upsize To 19 Oracle 10g Data Repository Connect To 55 Server Repository Create 43 Oracle 11g Data Repository Connect To 55 Server Repository Create 43 Oracle 9i Data Repository Connect To 55 Server Repository Create 43 Outline Red 195 P Package Apply Version Control To Model Branch 165 Batch Export To XMI 115 Batch Import From XMI 116 Check In 162 Check Out 162 Comparison Example 212 Configuration 112 Configure For Version Control 160 Control Menu 110 Control Remove 113 Controlled 160 Copy Between Projects 81 CSV Import Export Specification 118 Export 110 Export To XMI Stubs 112 Export Version Controlled Model Branch 166 Import 110 Import Version Controlled Model Branch 166 Load 114 Lock 193 Lock Require User Lock 194 Lock User Group Lock 192 Nested in Version Control 137 Resynchronize Package Version Control Status 169 Review Version Control History 168 Save 114 Validate Version Control Configuration 161 O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 262 Index Package Integrity Run SQL Patches 78 Version Control 130 Open Existing 6 XML 110 Recover 76 Password Rename EAP File 84 Administrator Chang
300. s This facility is not to be used for any other purpose UML Model Management Project Data Transfer 79 4 Project Data Transfer The Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect support SQL Server 407 MySQL 387and Oracle 9i 10g and 11g 4 data repositories At some point it might become necessary to move a complete model from one repository to another row by row table by table The project data transfer function enables you to perform the following tasks e Upload an existing EAP file to a SQL Server or MySQL repository e Download a repository in MySQL or SQL Server to a EAP file e Move a repository from SQL Server to MySQL or from one server to another e Move all records from a EAP file with replication to a model with none Remove Replication e Copy all records from a EAP file to another recommended after serious network crash or repeated database corruption e Copy all records from a JET 3 5 to JET 4 Access 2000 or XP repository or back the other way See the Perform a Project Data Transferl 79 topic for instructions Note You cannot move a model from a source EAP file of a version earlier than 3 5 0 Warning All records in the target repository are overwritten 4 1 Perform a Project Data Transfer Warning During a project data transfer all records in the target project are overwritten Before perf
301. s an OCL violation for the anonymous Association between Class2 and Object e Contains a UML ExceptionHandler ExceptionHandler1 that is missing its child input ObjectNode Note If you double click on an error in the Output window you select the diagram element that the error message refers to 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 92 Model Validation Configure Model Validation 6 1 Configure Model Validation Use the Model Validation Configuration dialog to enable and disable the rules 9 that are run with the model validator You can define additional rules in this dialog from any additional Add Ins that might be installed besides Enterprise Architect To display the Model Validation Configuration dialog select the Project Model Validation Configure menu option Enabled Validation Rules Element Well Formedness Element Composition Element Property Validity Element OCL Conformance Relationship Well Formedness Relationship Property Validity Relationship OCL Conformance Feature Well Formedness Feature Property Validity Feature OCL Conformance Diagram Well Formedness Requirements Management MDG Technology for DODAF MODAF Rules 4 Zachman Framework ZF Rules Csen sore m CEEEREREREREEREERERE Click on the checkbox against each Validation Rule to apply in performing a model validation 90 Tip To disable UML s
302. s can see those changes by refreshing their view of the package or the changed diagram within the package You can refresh your view of the Project Browser in the following ways e Right click on the package name in the Project Browser and select the Contents Reload Current Package context menu option e Select the File Reload Current Project menu option or select the Reload Project icon in the Project toolbar or press Ctrl Shift F11 e Close the project and reopen it You can refresh the current diagram in the following ways e Select the Window Reload Current View menu option e Right click on the opened diagram tab in the diagram view and select the Reload lt diagram name gt context menu option UML Model Management Version Control Use Version Control 169 11 6 12 Resynchronize the Status of Version Controlled Packages Enterprise Architect enables you to re synchronize the version control status of either a single version controlled package or all version controlled packages within your current model with the status reported by your version control provider This can be useful when you give a copy of a EAP file configured for version control to a new team member e For a single package right click on the package name in the Project Browser and select the Package Control Re synch Status With VC Provider menu option e For all version controlled packages within the project click on the Projec
303. s in the version control repository that are not currently available in your model Re synch Status With VC Update the version control status value recorded for the selected package Provider in the Enterprise Architect project to match the value reported by the version control provider 164 without performing an XMI import or export Use this function when the package s version control status recorded in your Enterprise Architect project is out of synchrony with the version control status reported by your version control provider Version Control Settings Display the Version Control Settings dialog 135 Update Package Status Provide a bulk update on the status of a package including status options such as Proposed Validate and Mandatory Note This option is a generic package option not specific to version control O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 160 Version Control Use Version Control 11 6 2 Configure Controlled Package Before working on a package under version control you must define it as a controlled package and specify the version control configuration to use Note In the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect if security is enabled you must have Configure Packages 183 permission to configure packages for version control Configure a Version Controlled Package To configure a version controlled package follow the steps
304. s long as any given package is always accessed via the same version control configuration The easiest way to perform step 4 throughout the team is to have one user set up version control on the O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 134 Version Control Version Control amp Team Deployment model and then share that model with the rest of the team e In Shared Model deployment all users connect to a single instance of the model database so the model is shared automatically e In Private Model deployment it is easiest to distribute copies of the original model after version control has been set up to all other members of the team Whenever you open a model Private or Shared 13h that uses a version control configuration that is not yet defined on your workstation Enterprise Architect prompts you to complete the definition for that configuration This typically means specifying the local working copy directory and maybe choosing the version control project associated with this Enterprise Architect project Once this has been done the version controlled packages that already exist in the model are ready for use Version Control Branching Currently Enterprise Architect does not support Version Control Branching Work arounds to achieve similar results might be possible for certain version control products contact Sparx Support for advice e Registered users _http www sparxsystems com registered reg support html e
305. select one or more tables for a single file 3 Click on the Export button 4 When prompted to do so enter a valid file name with a XML extension This exports the data to the file You can use any text or XML viewer to examine this file The data exported includes all instances of the data type in the project for example all defined cardinality values or all RTF Style Templates Note If there are no instances of a selected data type in the project the export does not generate any output for that data type in the XML file For information on each category of data you can export refer to the following topics e ActionScript Code Templates and other language code templates see the Code Templates topic in Code Engineering Using UML Models entries for code templates are listed only if templates for a particular language exist in the model The list entry has the format lt language_name gt _Code_Templates e Automation Scripts JavaScript JScript and VBScript 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 252 Reference Data Import and Export Reference Data e Cardinality Types 248 e Constraint Status Types 238 CSV1118 Specifications e Defined Metric Types see Project Management with Enterprise Architect e Defined Problem Types 2421 e Diagram Matrix Profiles Model Profiles see the Swimlanes Matrix topic in UML Modeling with Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool e Estimation Environment Compl
306. selected model branch with an XML 1 1 file on disk A browser displays File which you use to locate the file Options Set filters 21 to make the comparison more specific 14 1 2 Create Baselines Open the New Baseline dialog by clicking on the New Baseline button on the Manage Baselines 2081 dialog Name Resources Version 1 2 1 Y Include sub packages Note Baseline time 30 11 2009 9 30 26 AM a Name Display the package name of the currently selected model branch Version Type a unique version reference for this Baseline This can consist of any alphanumeric characters The Manage Baselines dialog sorts the Baselines according to the value of this field Include Include the entire sub package hierarchy of this branch in the Baseline Defaults to selected sub packages If you deselect the checkbox only the immediate contents XMI stubs of the package are included in the Baseline Edit the default current time and date to any other value The field is a single line entry for display on the Manage Baselines dialog a one line per entry list Click on the OK button to create a new Baseline and return to the Manage Baselines dialog 14 2 The Compare Utility Diff Notes e This utility is available in the Professional Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect e You cannot compare the current model with an XMI 2 1 file t
307. sers 175 Import User IDs From Active Directory csssssscsssssessesseeseesseeseesenesensseeesnenseeseessneneesseeeeeeseeeneenseeseneseeees 177 Assign User To Group ii ia 179 Set UP Single Permissions doo 180 View All User Permissions sccscsessessseresserseneesecesseneenseessceeeseersanessenesseneeseeessenersenesaceesscerensenseneesener 181 Maintain Groups we 182 Set Group Permissions naiseen a acd eces cus ace enceusuccas anes six aA AE aaa Aaaa a aeara EA 182 List of Available Permissions ias cantadas 183 View and Manage Locks sisiicsiscsesisiscccenssecnsssersesacsccusvanssieasenstncendssdbesesacciaibessesinetnsdacvesouscsotveabcdsaddrascnisucsesenee 185 Password Encryption susedvacseuadscsetscduenpausicesoabautieviehdsdiavsndvacncudsnastionensdende 186 Workflow Scripts Introduction ww 187 Workflow Script FUNCtIONS rio EE 188 Change Password r a a a E E EE ES 190 Lock Model Elements a a A a a eaaa Ea a Eae E 192 Add Connectors To Locked Elements cssssssesseeesssseeessseeeseeseneseeseeeseesseesseeseeesnseeeseeeseesseeseeseeasenenenees 193 LOCK PaCkaGes clas ccseitectssacscessnadespuaeavscnveteaisatcencendeasedsonsesucsdendevdeidessnvdesuarbepdouieatuaiiualsesuntcaviudsacbesauteotaetenedasua 193 Apply a User LOCK E E E sac 194 Locked Elomentindicators 0i lis 195 Identify Who Has Locked An Object 196 Manage Your Own LOCKS ii derbi 196 PRUNING a res lh lan erth icin tv china eatin acto Gatat
308. sfer Between Repositories 79 Compare Projects Instructions 81 Compare Projects Why 80 Copy Packages Between Projects 81 Transfer Project Data 79 Upsize to MySQL 22 Data Type Add 249 Code 249 Definition 109 Delete 249 Extend 249 Modify 249 Programming Language 249 Database Repository Access Permissions For 11 Connect To 11 Create 11 Set Up 11 Define Author 227 Clients 233 Resources 232 Roles 230 Delete Elements Impact of Auditing 206 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 258 Index Delete Locks 185 Views 88 Deletion And Auditing 206 Dependency Report In Traceability 224 Deployment View 85 Design Master 75 100 Create 101 Desktop Edition Upsize From 11 Diagram Exclusive Edit Lock 173 Lock Require User Lock 194 Lock User Group Lock 192 Traceability 222 Diff Utility 207 210 Differencing Facility 210 Output 212 With Baselines 210 Disable Security 173 Disconnect Controlled Package 113 Distributed Development Replication 99 XMI Import Export 99 DTD 109 Dynamic View 85 oe ee EAB File Export 166 Import 166 Model Branch File 166 EABase As Source 73 Project File 9 EAExample File 8 EAP File As Project Database 6 Corrupt 85 Element Child Validation 93 Export Data In CSV Format 121 Import Data In CSV Format 123 Lock Indicators 195 Lock Require User Lock 194 Lock User Group Lock 192 Locked Add Connector To 193 EMX File Cross References 108 F
309. sion Control field to None Enterprise Architect XMI UML 1 3 Other Options 1 0 Last Load Date Last Save Date 4 Click on the OK button to remove package control Package control for the selected package has now been removed Note When disconnecting a package from version control the association between the package and the exported XML file is removed from your model However the XML file itself is not removed from version control nor is it deleted from your local version control working copy folder This is because it is possible for another model to be using the version controlled package and still referencing the associated version controlled XML file 8 6 4 Save a Package You can save a controlled package to an XMI file Once you have correctly configured 1121the package follow the steps below In the Project Browser window right click on the package to save The context menu displays 2 Select the Package Control Save Package to File menu option 3 The export process executes automatically according to your configured preferences overwriting any existing file Note If you are using a version control package in conjunction with the exported package files you must check out the XMI file first to enable Enterprise Architect to overwrite the existing version 8 6 5 Load a Package Using the Controlled Packages facility you can save and load packages to a named file lf a package has been
310. sneeseessaeeesnaesenesasneessneeseeeseneeeseeeeneneonens 99 A O O ON 100 Desig Masters id A A ALA AA eben eine 101 Create Replicas civic 101 Synchronize Replicas iii A Reel Aeon eee ese 102 Remove Replica AA AAA 102 Upgrade Replica sic eiii AA AAA AAA 102 Resolve Conti A A A 103 O and EXPO A R E a 104 EXPOrtstO XMI wvsccsccsscccacsessecsesaussudinssaccoccsedscvsatuesassdeaseavbaresnspcaudesecaasenerasciessocaseinatuddusdaesusdrsenedvadpesduaisusseasecevaa 105 Import THOM AM iii ia 106 Import EMX UML2 File viiscssccscccesnisecsanceccsatscsoctencenssedssussesuscauauseusavaseisecavsenssevossndsncunasssessesudsedsesdedaseteudsandece 108 EA q naaaEaaaa aaar Eaa ae Eaa naapa aa praga Aaaa aaa neaei aasian ennaii 109 TU E DUD EEE EE E E A E TREE 109 Controlled Packages ads 110 Controlled Package Menu 110 Configure Packages t ts saith ict cent etal ein eee Ea a i 112 Remove Package from Control ccceccseceesceeceseeeseseeeeaeeeeeceeeeaeeeesaeeeaeseecaeseaeseeesaeseeesenesaeseaeseesearenaeeaes 113 Sava Package iii A ea eee 114 LOA a aa o Aale IEEE EA E A OT E T A AAT 114 Batch XMI Export 115 Batch AMINO Eolica 116 Manual Version Control with XM1 cecessesceeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeesaeeeaeesaesaeeeaeseeeeaeesaeeneeseeeaeseeeeneeeatees 116 CSV Import and Export ct dd da 118 CSV Specifications o OT 118 ESE tada 121 CSV IMPOR aaa 123 MOP diari 125 G tting Started i ai at aeaaee se Esa a aaa eami aea ae deae CEA
311. ssions The following table lists the available permissions in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect These permissions are required for the corresponding operations if security is enabled Note Some permissions take precedence over others For example if you set Use Version Control permission for a user that user can modify model elements on import even if they do not have Update Element permission el a Compact 84 and repair 85 project database Develop and manage workflow scripts 187 Audit View Enable auditing and display data in the Audit View 203 and Audit History 208 tab Baselines Manage Create delete import and export Baselines 207 Baselines Restore Merge datal20 into the project model from a Baseline or XML file Change Password Change your own password 175 or Administrator another user s password 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 184 User Security List of Available Permissions Check Data Integrity Check and repair project integrity 787 Configure Datatypes Add modify and delete datatypes 249 Configure Images Configure alternative element images Configure Packages Configure controlled packages 112 and package properties Configure Resources Create and manage Resources window items RTF templates patterns profiles favorites Configure Stereotypes Add modify and delete Stereotypes 2451
312. sting time on changes that are ultimately discarded 11 2 Apply Version Control To Models All Enterprise Architect models are stored in databases even the EAP file is a database In simple version control terms the model is a single entity of binary data It is not practical to apply version control to the database as a whole Being binary data it would require the use of the lock modify unlock model 132i of version control which would mean that only a single user at a time could work on any given version controlled model UML Model Management Version Control Apply Version Control To Models 133 To overcome this limitation Enterprise Architect exports discreet units of the model the packages as XMI package files and it is these XMI files not the EAP file that are placed under version control The XMI file format used by Enterprise Architect dictates that they too be treated as binary files therefore it is not possible to merge the XMI files either however by splitting the model into much smaller parts this approach enables many users to work on separate parts of the model simultaneously When a user checks out 162 a package Enterprise Architect sends a command to the version control system to check out the equivalent XMI file The version control system then puts the latest revision of the file into the user s working copy directory overwriting any previous revision of the file in that directory Enterp
313. stomize any Enterprise Architect project and use it as the base for the new project This enables you or your organization to build a default project with company standards tutorials frameworks or any other common piece of modeling already in built A default project is no different from an ordinary project Enterprise Architect simply copies and renames it as a starter for your new project With careful planning you can save 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 10 Enterprise Architect Project Files Create a New Project yourself many hours of work at project start up Configure Project Having created your project you can set a range of project parameters to define defaults tailor the project to particular coding languages and make development and use of the project consistent See the following topics in Using Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool e The Settings Menu e Defaults and User Settings 1 3 1 Model Wizard The Model Wizard is available on creating a new project Once you have created a project you can also access the Model Wizard from the Project Browser Right click on a root node View or other top level package and select the Add a New Model using Wizard context menu option The Select Model s dialog displays Select model s to add to your project Select from lt all gt Technology Name ME lt default gt BPEL Model MDG Technology for DoDA Business Process MDG Technology f
314. sure the new database is the currently active database 3 Run the script to create all required data structures Note See Create a New SQL Server Repository 407 You now have an empty database and can transfer an existing model into the server Stage Three Transfer the Data Note When transferring a project you must have db_ddladmin permission in order to execute the SET IDENTITY_INSERT table ON OFF command 1 Open Enterprise Architect click on the Cancel button on the Open Project screen to open with no project loaded Select the Tools Data Management Project Transfer menu option The Project Transfer dialog displays 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 22 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository Transfer Type O EAP to EAP DBMS to EAP O EAP to DBMS 5 DBMS to DBMS Source and Target Projects Source Project mm Target Project s Logfile Toge Caution The Target Project will be erased prior to transfer Please ensure you have backed up target if necessary Transfer Close Help Progress 3 Inthe Transfer Type panel select EAP to DBMS 4 Inthe Source Project field type the name of the EAP file to upsize to SQL Server 5 At the right of the Target Project field click on the Browse button The Datalink Properties dialog displays 6 Select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server from the lis
315. t Version Control Re synch Statuses of All Packages menu option For a given package the re synchronization process queries the corresponding version control provider to find the status of the package file associated with the version controlled package If necessary the process then updates the package flags within the model database to synchronize the package status recorded in the model with the value reported by the version control provider The results of the re synchronization process are sent to the Enterprise Architect Output window as shown below Output x Resynchronising status of all version controlled packages with their respective Version Control Providers Package Development Model no change Package Logical View no change Package DFD clearing package flags CheckedOutTo rchester Version control status synchronization completed Double click a package entry above to select that package in the Project Browser M 4 gt bl System Script Version Control lt l Double click on any result message to select in the Project Browser the corresponding package Note This process does not cause any package data to be e exported from your model to the associated package file or e imported from a package file into your model s package data If a package has been checked out and modified with Enterprise Architect but your version control provider reports the package file as checked in runni
316. t then click on the Next button 7 On the Data Source Details page of the Connection dialog type in the server name database name and security details as required Note See Connect to a SQL Server Data Repository 527 for more information 8 Click on the OK button 9 If required select the Logfile checkbox and type in a path and filename for the data transfer log file 10 Click on the Transfer button to begin the data transfer process When the process is complete you have upsized your model to SQL Server and can now open it from Enterprise Architect 1 4 8 Upsize to MySQL Before you set up Enterprise Architect for use with MySQL it is recommended that you run the project integrity check tool the Tools Data Management Project Integrity Check 78 menu option on the base project to upsize to MySQL This ensures data is clean before uploading Note You cannot move a model from a source EAP file of a version earlier than 3 5 0 UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 23 Warning Before proceeding ensure MDAC 2 6 or higher is installed on your system Upsizing Your Database You upsize your database for MySQL in four stages as follows Stage One Install MySQL Components 1 Install MySQL version 4 0 3 or higher 2 Install MySQL ODBC 3 51 or higher 3 Create a suitable ODBC Data Source to point to your new database Note There are
317. t Reference Data vic as 253 Index 255 UML Model Management Foreword 1 Foreword This user guide provides an introduction to the Model Management facilities of Enterprise Architect O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd Model Management y What is a UML Model A model is a special type of package being the top level entry point to an Enterprise Architect project file You can develop a project with one model or with several Each model is a root node of a hierarchy of Model Packages and Views and below them packages A model contains the diagrams elements relationships and associated metadata that define the structure and function of a system or process These components are organized through the package hierarchy which helps to group and manage related components By iterating through all models you can access all the elements within the project You can create the model or models when you first create the project or you can add and develop new models later You can also delete a model but remember that everything contained in the model is deleted as well In Model Management you configure and maintain e Project files and data repositories 25 e Project sharing in team environments 3 e Version Control of packages 3 e User Security in updating packages and elements 34 e Auditing of model changes 341 e Baselining and differencing 3 to capture and roll back c
318. t a model loads faster and users can begin work sooner but at the expense of later small delays as Enterprise Architect loads specific portions of the model If required select the Use WAN Optimization 721 checkbox To improve performance over a Wide Area Network remote database calls can be routed through a WAN Optimizer that compresses the data returned from the repository reducing transfer time If you select this checkbox complete the next three fields see your administrator for the correct values Otherwise go to step 17 In the Server field type the network name or address of the optimizer server In the Port field type the port on which the server is running on the remote machine In the DSN field type the data source name of the database as it appears on the remote machine Click on the OK button to complete the configuration 1 4 11 5 ASA Data Repository Note This feature is available in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions In order to use an ASA data repository you must connect to it in Enterprise Architect first Before connecting to the repository you must have set up an ASA ODBC driver 30 To connect to an ASA data repository in Enterprise Architect follow the steps below 1 In the Open Project 8 dialog select the Connect to Server checkbox or on the Start Page click on the Connect to Server link Click on the Browse button as
319. t also lock it and therefore cannot make any changes to that file All she can do is read the file and wait for Harry to finish his changes and release the lock After Harry unlocks the file Sally can take her turn in locking and editing the file The Copy Modify Merge Solution Subversion CVS and a number of other version control systems use a copy modify merge model as an alternative to locking In this model each user s client contacts the project repository and creates a personal working copy a local reflection of the repository s files and directories Users then work simultaneously and independently modifying their private copies In due course the private copies are merged together into a new final version The version control system often assists with the merging but ultimately a person is responsible for making it happen correctly When Locking is Necessary While the lock modify unlock model is generally considered a hindrance to collaboration there are still times when locking is necessary The copy modify merge model is based on the assumption that files are contextually merge able that is the files in the repository are line based text files such as program source code But for files with binary formats such as artwork or sound it is often impossible to merge conflicting changes In these situations it really is necessary for users to take strict turns in changing the file Without serialized access somebody ends up wa
320. t the Package Control Manage Baselines option 2 The Project Browser context menu select Package Control Compare with XMI File for a package not under version control 3 The Project Browser context menu select Package Control Compare with Controlled Version for a package under version control Differencing With Baselines As a Baseline is stored within a model and contains all the information elements and connections for a package at a point in time it can be used within Enterprise Architect to track changes to model elements over time The Differencing engine first builds a representation of the current package in memory based on what is currently in the model It then compares this with the stored Baseline highlighting changes new elements missing elements and elements that have been moved to other packages It is possible to filter the resultant output 21n to display only one particular kind of change for example additions to the model If a Baseline has been created to ignore child package contentl210 a comparison between that Baseline and the model does not include any child package content in the model See Example Comparison 2121 for an example of a model comparison 14 3 Compare Options The Compare Options dialog enables you to refine the output of the Compare utility when it compares the current model with a Baseline To display the dialog either e Click on the Options button on the Manage Baselines dia
321. t these Tagged Value Type definitions between models using the Export Reference Data 25 and Import Reference Data 253 options on the Tools menu Tagged Value Types are exported as Property Types 17 5 3 Cardinality The Cardinality Values tab of the UML Types dialog enables you to add modify and delete values in the default cardinality list The cardinality values are used to define the multiplicity of source and target elements in relationships see UML Modeling with Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool This is the range of instances of the role that can be active in the relationship for example one employee can be assigned to tasks for the target role you define the range of instances such as tasks the employee could be assigned to The cardinality values are also used to define the multiplicity of a Classifying element that is the number of instances of the element that can exist For example the Class element Building Walls might have a multiplicity of 2 n meaning that at least two walls must exist to support the roof but there can be many walls if the building design required it The values have the following formats e or0 zero one or many instances e 0 n zero or up to n instances but no more than n UML Model Management Reference Data UML Types 249 e n exactly n instances e n n or more than n instances To access this dialog select the Settings UML menu option Click
322. tamodel 4 Click on the OK button 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 128 MOF Getting Started 5 Right click on the package in the Project Browser and select the Add Add Diagram context menu option Create a Class diagram the default diagram 6 Give your MOF Class diagram an appropriate name 7 In the Enterprise Architect UML Toolbox select the More tools Metamodel menu option and add the required Metamodel elements to the diagram The following is an example of a MOF diagram A MOF diagram can typically contain Package Class Enumeration and Primitive elements and Generalization Association Compose and Aggregate relationships isLesf bool false e numeratio mo isAbstract bool false featuringClassifier feature Union isOrdered bool false isUnique bool tue Hower int 0 1 upper UnlimitedNatural 0 1 raisedExoeption idefault String direction ParameterDirectionKind if sequence subsets ownedMember namespace owningParameter 0 1 subsets owner 0 1 defaultValue subsets ownedElement gusrd ValueSpecificatio alue ValueSpecificatio 10 2 Export MOF to XMI Once you have created your MOF diagram you can export the diagram to XMI specifying the MOF 1 3 or MOF 1 4 standard 1 Right click on the package in the Project Browser The context menu displays 2 Select the Import Export Export Package to XMI fil
323. te Tested by Sparx Products that do not appear in the list should still integrate successfully with Enterprise Architect if there is a client available for that product that complies with the MS SCC API specification Set Up Before using Enterprise Architect s version control facility your version control software must be installed on each machine on which it is intended to be used UML Model Management Version Control 131 Typically there are e A server component that manages a version control repository and e Client components on the workstations that Enterprise Architect uses to communicate with the server A version control client must be installed on every machine where you run Enterprise Architect and want to access your version control system Once the version control software has been installed and configured you must define a Version Control Configuration within Enterprise Architect to use your installed version control product Note Sparx Systems strongly urge you not to manipulate version controlled package files outside of Enterprise Architect It is possible to leave the package files in a state that Enterprise Architect cannot recognize Usage There are four basic ways in which the version control facility might be used CNE Single Shared model Users share an Enterprise Architect model stored in a central EAP file or DBMS repository This configuration enables you to view changes to ot
324. tect Description imtormatin MVR040001 OCL violation violated OCL The element violates the OCL constraint specified MVRO70001 OCL violation violated OCL The relationship violates the OCL constraint specified MVROAO001 OCL violation violated OCL The attribute violates the OCL constraint specified Important To have a valid OCL constraint the syntax must be correctly formed If the expression is not correct Enterprise Architect displays a message stating that the OCL constraint is not valid Define OCL Constraints for an Element You can add OCL constraints to an element using the Properties dialog Element Properties Select the Constraints tab click on the Type drop down arrow and select OCL UML Model Management Model Validation Rules Reference 95 inv self ocllsKindOf DirectedRelationship Defined Constraints Save _ Delete Constraint Type Status oclConstraint OCL Validated To perform an OCL Validation display the Model Validation Configuration 92 dialog and select the Element OCL Conformance checkbox Any OCL violations are recorded in the Model Validation Output window 91 Define OCL Constraints for a Relationship You can add OCL constraints to a relationship using the Properties dialog right click and select the lt type gt Properties context menu option Select the Constraints tab click on the Type drop down arrow and select
325. tect Export 1651 a newly created model branch from your own private copy of a model See Version Control Within UML Models Using Enterprise Architect Retrieve 1661 a model branch and import it into either the source model or another model See Version Control Within UML Models Using Enterprise Architect Enables you to gain access from packages in the version controlled 130 repository that is currently available in your model See Version Control Within UML Models Using Enterprise Architect Retrieve the latest version 130 of the package from the repository Available only for packages that are checked in See Version Control Within UML Models Using Enterprise Architect The alternative option Get Latest if displayed is not intended for sharing EAP files and should only be used when users have their own individual databases Version controlled package Update the version control status O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 112 XMI Import and Export Controlled Packages value recorded for the selected package in the Enterprise Architect project to match the value reported by the version control provider 165 without performing an XMI import or export Version Control Settings Display the Version Control Settings 1351 dialog See Version Control Within UML Models Using Enterprise Architect Update Package Status Provide a bulk update on the status of a package This includes status options such as P
326. that readily distinguishes this configuration from other configurations The unique ID is displayed as a selection in the list of Version Control configurations a package can connect to You can also click on the drop down arrow and select a previous version control configuration providing the configuration is not in the current model Local Project Path Specify the folder in which the XML files representing the packages are stored This folder should already exist before it is specified here Every PC using version control should have its own local SCC project folder and this should not be a shared network folder Particularly bear this in mind if you are creating a EAP file that is to be shared such as a SQL database Read only Shows your user name as the user currently logged into the SCC provider SCC Provider Read only Shows the name of the provider specified in the database SCC Project Read only Shows the project selected during the initial setup of the connection to the SCC provider Note Sparx Systems strongly urge you not to manipulate version controlled package files outside of Enterprise Architect It is possible to leave the package files in a state that Enterprise Architect cannot recognize 11 5 2 1 Upgrade at Enterprise Architect 4 5 When a version controlled project created under a release of Enterprise Architect earlier than 4 5 is opened in Enterprise Architect release 4 5 or later you must identify the SCC c
327. that the connection string is given to If required select the Lazy Load checkbox to not load the full project view when the model is loaded Instead only the parts that are necessary to display the visible portion of the tree are loaded This means that a model loads faster and users can begin work sooner but at the expense of later small delays as Enterprise Architect loads specific portions of the model If required select the Use WAN Optimization 721checkbox To improve performance over a Wide Area Network remote database calls can be routed through a WAN Optimizer that compresses the data returned from the repository reducing transfer time If you select this checkbox complete the next two fields see your administrator for the correct values Otherwise go to step 16 In the Server field type the network name or address of the optimizer server In the Port field type the port on which the server is running on the remote machine Click on the OK button to complete the configuration 1 4 11 4 PostgreSQL Data Repository Note This feature is available in the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions In order to use a PostgreSQL data repository you must connect to it in Enterprise Architect first Before connecting to the repository you must have set up a PostgreSQL ODBC driver 2 To connect to a PostgreSQL data repository in Enterprise Architect follow the steps below 1
328. the full project view when the model is loaded Instead only the parts that are necessary to display the visible portion of the tree are loaded This means that a model loads faster and users can begin work sooner but at the expense of later small delays as Enterprise Architect loads specific portions of the model If required select the Use WAN Optimization 7 checkbox To improve performance over a Wide Area Network remote database calls can be routed through a WAN Optimizer that compresses the data returned from the repository reducing transfer time If you select this checkbox complete the next three fields see your administrator for the correct values Otherwise go to step 21 In the Server field type the network name or address of the optimizer server In the Port field type the port on which the server is running on the remote machine In the DSN field type the data source name of the database as it appears on the remote machine Click on the OK button to complete the configuration 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 72 Enterprise Architect Project Files The WAN Optimizer 1 5 The WAN Optimizer Introduction The Sparx Wide Area Network WAN Optimizeris a lightweight server installed on a Local Area Network LAN connection to a Database Management System DBMS that hosts an Enterprise Architect repository You can configure the server to listen for client connections on a particular port it acts as
329. the initial catalog Click on the All tab and double click on Extended Properties In the Property Value field edit the value to DefaultSchema PUB O ON D p oe Extended Properties Property Value Default Schema PUB Reset Value 10 Click on the Connection tab again and click on the Test Connection button to confirm that the details are correct 11 If the test succeeds click on the OK button If the test does not succeed revise your settings 12 After you have clicked on the OK button the Logon to Progress dialog displays UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 71 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Host Name dbserver02 Port Number 20932 Cancel Database Name eal Help User ID oe_user Password eo Check the details and click on the OK button The Connection Name amp Type dialog displays Name pe ea E Encrypt Connection String Database Server ODBC Connection Progress OpenEdge F Lazy Load Server Port DSN cancel Give the connection a suitable name so you can recognize it in the Recent Projects panel on the Open Project dialog 8 If required select the Encrypt Connection String checkbox This encrypts and hides the connection details of the database from the users that the connection string is given to If required select the Lazy Load checkbox to not load
330. the name of the role Type a short description of the role Type any additional information related to the role Defined Roles Review all roles that have been previously defined in Enterprise Architect Click on the Save button to add the new role to the Defined Roles list The Defined Roles list is available for selection for any element in the model for example you can select roles on the Project Author 227 tab of the People dialog and the Resource Allocation tab of the Project Management window You can also specify other roles on these dialogs but such roles are not added to the Defined Roles list To delete a role click on the role type in the Defined Roles list and click on the Delete button O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 232 Reference Data People Notes e Deleting a role has no effect on any Project Author definition having this role the deleted role becomes a simple text entry in the Project Author definition e You can transport these role definitions between models using the Export Reference Data 25 and Import Reference Datal253 options on the Tools menu 17 1 3 Project Resources Resources are for example project authors analysts programmers and architects That is anyone who might work on the system over time either adding to the model or programming and designing elements of the system outside Enterprise Architect To record information on project resources select the Settings
331. tings Refresh pog Filter By Date Time lype Audit Settings Search User Display synchronized with Project Browser i Viewing log ite ded tod Mod Help Deletions iewing log items recorde ay For information on these controls see Audit View Controls 203 Audit Tree The audit tree displays the logs that have been recorded by auditing What is displayed in the tree is affected by the settings of the View Controls 2037 section such as e Sorting e Filter by time 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 202 Auditing The Audit View e Mode e Auditing settings 19 what was actually recorded E 1 Class Elements a E MyClass 2 2007 03 13 10 38 55 8 2007 03 13 10 39 01 X 2007 03 13 10 39 04 In the audit tree e The green tick indicates a creation e The yellow pencil indicates an edit e The red cross indicates a deletion If you right click on an element in the audit tree such as MyClass a context menu displays This menu enables you to locate the selected element in e The Project Browser e Any diagrams in which it exists Record Display The record display is in two parts the identity of the selected change and the actual change made User rchester admin Time 2009 06 04 14 30 01 Details Package Class Model Property Original Change version 10 1 1 stereotype agent status Proposed Validated phase 1 0 Li scope Public Protected Identity The identity of a chang
332. tion of the scenario type e Inthe Weight field type the weighting to apply to the scenario type e Inthe Note field type any additional information on the scenario type e All four fields must be completed Click on the Save button The scenario displays in the Defined Scenario Types list Note You can transport these scenario types between models using the Export Reference Data 25 1 and Import Reference Datal2531 options on the Tools menu 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 242 Reference Data Maintenance 17 3 Maintenance To control Testing types 2431 for your project select the Settings Maintenance menu option to display the Maintenance dialog Delete 17 3 1 Problem Types NOT CURRENTLY USED For the maintenance and change control screens you can use the Maintenance dialog to set the base Problem Types that are handled Examples are hardware related issues performance problems software bugs and network problems To access this dialog select the Settings Maintenance menu option The Maintenance dialog displays defaulting to the Problem Types tab UML Model Management Reference Data Maintenance 243 To add a new problem type click on the New button and e Inthe Problem Type field type the name of the problem type e Inthe Description field type a short description of the problem type e Inthe Weight field t
333. tomatically for the newly created element e When you add new elements in Mode 2 Require User Lock to Edit selected elements locked by default a user lock is created on the new element to enable instant editing 12 3 Maintain Users If you enable security you have access to the Security Users dialog which you can use to set up more users for your model Note You must have Security Manage Users 183 permission to maintain users and Change Password 185 permission to change the password of the current user the initial Admin administrator automatically has these permissions Set Up a User To set up a user for your model follow the steps below 1 Select the Project Security Manage Users menu option The Security Users dialog displays 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 176 User Security Maintain Users o xo a V Accept Windows Authentication Users Import New Sumame Firstname Login Administrator The admin Walter Frederick FWAL Walter Frederick Frederick You can use the Security Users dialog to set up new users by providing their name and other details You can also import user IDs from a Windows Active Directory 174 assign User IDs to groups 179 set up Single Permissions 180 or View All 18ti permissions for the currently selected user To identify a new user on this dialog click on the New button and type in the user s login ID first name and
334. ttings Author 227 Cardinality Multiplicity 248 Clients 233 Constraint Status Types 238 Constraint Types 237 Estimation 244 General Types 235 Maintenance 242 175 190 Menu 226 Metrics 244 People 227 232 Problem Types 242 Project Author 227 Project Resources 232 Requirement Types 239 Roles 230 Scenario Types 240 Status Types 235 Stereotypes 245 Tagged Value Types 247 Testing Types 243 UML Types 245 Shape Editor 246 Shape Scripts Shape Editor 246 Share An Enterprise Architect Project 99 Project On Network Drive 99 Simple View 85 Single Permissions Set Up 180 Source Code Control 130 SQL Patches Run 78 Server Data Repository Connect To 52 Server Repository Create 40 SQL Server Desktop Engine Upsize To 17 Upsize To 20 Status Type Color 235 Define 235 For Different Elements 235 Stereotype Settings 245 Subversion Caching Client Credentials 148 Configure Version Control 152 Documentation 148 Executables 148 Repository URLs 148 Setting Up 148 TortoiseSVN 153 UNIX Based Client 150 Using With Enterprise Architect Under WINE Crossover 150 Version Control Options 148 Version Control Create Local Working Copy 150 UML Model Management Index 265 Subversion Version Control Create Repository Subtree 149 Windows Based Client 150 Sybase Adaptive Server Anywhere ODBC Driver Set Up 30 Upsize To 14 Synchronization 100 Synchronize Replicas 102 System Users 175 Tagged Value
335. ugh the steps O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 76 Project Data Integrity 3 Project Data Integrity A A If you have a failed XMI import network crash or other unforeseen event that could disrupt the integrity of information in the model it is recommended to run the Project Integrity Check function 767 This examines all database records and ensures there are no orphaned records or inaccurate or unset identifiers You can run the integrity checker first in report mode to discover if anything should be corrected and then run it again in repair mode When Enterprise Architect checks the model it attempts to recover lost packages and elements and generates a new package at the model root level called _recovered_ Check through any elements that are found and if required drag them into the model proper If they are not required delete them Note This function does NOT check UML conformance only the data relationships and repository structure You can select a variety of items to check and select either to just report on the state of your model or to try and repair any inconsistencies The recovery process tries to restore elements where possible but in some cases simply deletes the lost records See Also e Run SQL Patches 78 gt 3 1 Check Project Data Integrity Note In the Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions of Enterprise Architect if secur
336. ur username and password on the command line such that your credentials are cached from the outset Use a Subversion command such as e Using a Unix like client run the command from the command line svn checkout username UserName password myPassword svn myServerName 3690 myProject drive_c workingCopyDirectory e Using a Win32 client run the command within a batch file run under CrossOver C Program Files Subversion bin svn exe checkout username UserName password myPassword svn myServerName 3690 myProject C SVN test workcopy gt C SVN test stdout txt amp 2 gt C SVN test stderr txt It is a good idea to checkout your Subversion working copy into a folder within the WINE bottle where Enterprise Architect is to run In this way the pathnames used for your version controlled package files are much shorter If you intend to use the Win32 Subversion client with Enterprise Architect you should create the local working copy that Enterprise Architect is to use by performing a Subversion checkout command using the Win32 client under WINE CrossOver Similarly if you plan to use the Unix like Subversion client with Enterprise Architect you should perform the initial checkout using that client In this way your user credentials are cached in the correct location for the client that Enterprise Architect is using It is important to verify that your command line client for Subversion is working correctly befo
337. ure of a system or process By applying tools such as the Relationship Matrix and Traceability window to these you can follow threads throughout the model to determine how the feature is implemented and tested You can also obtain information on what elements realize and are realized by the elements in a given package using the Dependency report and Implementation report respectively see the Other Documents topic in Report Creation in UML Models Traceability Window The Traceability window see Using Enterprise Architect UML Modeling Tool is a most useful and versatile traceability tool Starting with a Traceability diagram or a package structure in the Project Browser you can use the Traceability window to quickly explore the relationship chain of which any element is a component When you click on the element it immediately becomes the top point in the Traceability window When you click on the background of a diagram all elements in the diagram are listed in the Traceability window and you can follow the threads starting at each element through the diagram If you require a rapid broad brush view of relationship flows in the project structure starting with a general list of say all functional Requirements you can use a combination of Model Search Project Browser and Traceability window this is a powerful tool for scanning your project identifying how elements have been organized and how they interact For example the Model Search
338. valuable project feedback O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 188 User Security Workflow Scripts Introduction 12 13 1 Workflow Script Functions Workflow scripts are executed by the Enterprise Architect workflow engine to manage user input You write the scripts in the Scripter window in VBScript under the Workflow group type Functions Enterprise Architect Calls to Validate and Control User Input For each of the following functions that Enterprise Architect calls a set of objects 188 are filled AllowPhaseUpdate OldValue Validate a change a user has NewValue made to a phase AllowStatusUpdate OldValue Validate a change a user has NewValue made to a status AllowTagUpdate TagName OldValue NewValue Validate a change a user has made to a Tagged Value AllowVersionUpdate OldValue Validate a change a user has NewValue made to a version CanEditPhase Enable or disable the control for editing a phase CanEditStatus CanEditTag TagName CanEditVersion PreAllowPhaseUpdate OldVal ue NewValue PreAllowStatusUpdate OldVal ue NewValue PreAllowTagUpdate TagName OldValue NewValue PreAllowVersionUpdate OldV alue NewValue Enable or disable the control for editing a status Enable or disable the control for editing a Tagged Value Enable or disable the control for editing a version Determine what information is required to validate this change True to allo
339. ve Audit View permission to turn Auditing on and Audit Settings 18 permission to change Audit settings To open the Audit Settings dialog 1 Select the View Other Project Tools Audit View menu option to open the Audit View 2 Click on the Audit Settings button The Audit Settings dialog displays UML Model Management Auditing Auditing Settings 199 Y Enable Auditing Auditing Level rE O Core Y Audit XMI Import Standard Y Audit XMI Export Extended Audit Reverse Y Engi z JETAS Audit Options y Maintenance Core Structural Clear Logs All Custom Save Logs Load Logs The settings on this dialog are described in the following topics e Audit Scope 19 e Audit Logs 1931 e Auditing Level 200 e Audit Options 200 13 2 1 Audit Scope The Audit Settings dialog provides checkbox options for turning Auditing on and for including or excluding areas of processing in Enterprise Architecture e Enable Auditing select this checkbox to turn the Auditing facility on e Audit XMI Import select this checkbox to include XMI importing in the audit e Audit XMI Export select this checkbox to include XMI exporting in the audit Note As version control uses XMI these options must be selected to record changes from checking out packages e Audit Reverse Engineering select this checkbox to include reverse engineering in the audit e Use Database Timestamp
340. version controlled package files outside of Enterprise Architect It is possible to leave the package files in a state that Enterprise Architect cannot recognize 11 6 1 Package Version Control Menu To display the Version Control menu right click on a version controlled package in the Project Browser and select the Package Control context menu option This menu displays a number of different options if the selected package is not under version control see the Controlled Package Menul1101 topic O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 158 Version Control Use Version Control Configure Ctrl Alt P Manage Baselines Ctri Alt B Check In Branch Check Out Branch Check Out Get Latest Get All Latest File Properties File History Compare with Controlled Version Add Branch to Version Control Export as Model Branch Re synch Status With VC Provider Version Control Settings 8 Update Package Status Menu Option amp Function Keys Configure Display the Package Control Options l16 dialog which enables you to Ctrl Alt P specify whether this package and its children is controlled which file it is controlled through and which version control configuration to use Manage Baselines Create a Baseline 208 of the current package or compare the current Ctrl Alt B package with a previous Baseline Check In Branch For the selected branch of the model that is t
341. w this user to make this change False to disallow the change and revert to the previous value True to allow this user to make changes by enabling the control False to completely disable edit of this property by disabling the control Semi colon separated list of additional data required in order to validate this change See the list of supported data types 18s Functions Enterprise Architect Calls to Create a Search With User Tasks GetWorkflowTasks Describe the searches that this Ignored user must run Supported Data Types Tests fill the Tests array in the WorkflowContext object Workflow Data Structures Objects Enterprise Architect Fills WorkflowUser This object provides information about the user currently logged in to the model It is filled by Enterprise Architect before any function is called by Enterprise Architect It has the following properties UML Model Management User Security Workflow Scripts Introduction 189 Username the username for login to the system if using Windows Authentication this matches the Windows username Firstname as found in the Security Users 175 dialog Surname as found in the Security Users dialog Fullname the combination lt Firstname gt lt Surname gt the form Enterprise Architect uses for Author fields and similar This object also calls the following function IsMemberOf GroupName Check group membership of True if th
342. way enables you to manually connect to third party version control software outside the Enterprise Architect environment Enterprise Architect internally supports the configuration of version control through SCC and CVS e Support import and export of model elements between different models for example a Class library can be re used in many models and kept up to date in target models using controlled packages reloading packages as required when new versions of the Class model become available Package XML is standard XMl compliant output that can be loaded into any XML viewer or used by any XML based tool to perform manipulations and extracts such as document or code generators Controlled packages appear in the Project Browser with a small colored rectangle to the left of the package icon as shown below for the CIM package aL CIM CORBA amp J C SOO A controlled package is a package configured to save and load in XML format to a named file The XML output is UML1 3 compliant XMI with Enterprise Architect extensions to support diagrams and additional model elements Note When you select to apply a Data Type Definition DTD during an XMI 1 1 export the UML_EA DTD file is written to the output directory into which the XML files are written unless the UML_EA DTD file is already present in the directory No error is generated if the UML_EA DTD file is not present in this directory during the XMI export Important If you
343. where there is a solid understanding of who is working on which part of the model and locking is used mainly to prevent further changes or to limit who has access to a part of the model 2 The Require User Lock mode is more rigorous The Enterprise Architect model is read only everything is locked so that nobody can edit anything unless they explicitly check out the object with a user lock A single check out function operates on a diagram to check out the diagram and all contained elements in one go There are also functions on the context right click menus of packages diagrams and elements in the Project Browser to apply a user lock when this mode is in use You would use this mode when there is a strict requirement to ensure only one person can edit a resource at one time This is suitable for much larger projects where there might be less communication between users Toggle between these modes using the Project Security Require User Lock to Edit menu option deselected for User Group Locking mode and selected for Require User Lock mode UML Model Management User Security Security Policy 175 Manage Users Manage Groups Manage Locks Change Password Login as Another User My Locks Ctrl Shift L Y Enable Security Require User Lock to Edit Notes e When you add new elements in Mode 1 Require User Lock to Edit deselected elements editable by default no user lock is created au
344. work drive Individual developers and analysts can then open and work on the project concurrently Note that some project views especially the Project Browser require occasional refreshing to see changes made by other users 2 Using replication Replication 100 is a powerful means of sharing projects between isolated or mobile users In the replication scenario a project is converted to a design master then replicas made of the master Users take the replicas away modify the project then bring their replicas back to be synchronized with the master file 3 Using a shared DBMS based repository Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions 7 2 Share Projects on Network Drive The easiest way to share a project amongst a work group of developers and analysts is to place the project file on a shared network drive and have people connect concurrently from their Workstation Note Enterprise Architect accepts a number of concurrent connections without issue although there can be occasional lock outs when one user tries to access or update something another user is in the process of modifying Network Issues The main issues with shared network access are e Changes to the Project Browser are not automatically updated To compensate for this users must occasionally reload 168 their project to view any project changes at this level See Version Control Within UML Models Using Enterprise Architect
345. y seecae ain ai 152 TortoiseSVN sosiedat AAA niin rete 153 Version GontrolWitA TES deis 154 Connect an Enterprise Architect Model to Version Control using TES ooococicnnnccncnaconocnnanncccnrncnnnns 154 Use Version Co ech eset ese tates cesta cea aE A a a Ae E a a aeo eee AEE 157 Package Version Control Mel cuiioconiicn e aa tl edadea 157 Configure Controlled Package ceseescsseeseseeseceeseeeeeeacessecseecseceaecseesaeeeaeeeeeaeesaesseesaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeeaees 160 Use Existing Config ration geine e aia 161 Validate Package Configurations ccecceeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeesaeesaeseeesaeseaeseesaeeeaesieeseseaeennenaees 161 Check In and Check Out Packages 162 Include Other Users Packages scsscsesceseeseceeeeseeeaeeeeeeseeeaeesceeaeeeaeeaeeeaecaecseeeaeseaesieesaeseaeseeeaeeeaeeaee 164 Apply Version Control To Branches mocos da iaa 165 Export Controlled Model Branch ecesceesesceeseeeeesseeesecesececeeseceaeeseeeaeesaeeseeeaeeseeeaeseaeseeesaeeeaeseeeeaeeeatens 166 Import Controlled Model BranCh ooonconccnncnnncnnoconcnonccnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnn cono cnn canon rro rra rn 166 Review Package History 168 Refresh View of Shared Project 168 Resynchronize the Status of Version Controlled Packages oocncncninninnnnnnnncnninninninnanarancnnr ana carancnn 169 Offline Version Control arias 169 User Security Enable Security Securty do e EPA A A O AE e Pepe 174 Maintain U
346. y importing the stored XMI directly and merge in information and elements from a Baseline in a different project making it possible to keep multiple versions of a single model in synch The merge options 2131 are available on the Compare Utility tab which shows the results of a comparison The options are available through the toolbar context menus and the keyboard Notes e You use Baselines Differencing and Merges essentially to compare two snapshots of a specific part of your project to capture the differences between them and either roll back or incorporate selected changes or all changes Enterprise Architect Corporate Business and Software Engineering System Engineering and Ultimate editions have another facility Auditing 1971 which you can switch on to perform continuous monitoring of changes across the project You can dovetail your use of each facility to meet the range of your change management requirements e f a package under version control forms part of a Baseline and that package is checked in to the model you cannot merge the original data from the Baseline into that package e If security is enabled you must have Manage Baselines 18 permission to create import and delete Baselines and Restore From Baseline permission to merge data from a Baseline Security permissions are not required to select an existing Baseline and perform a comparison with the model O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 208 Baselines
347. y of the model When unselected for shared models the option disables the File History Retrieve functionality when the selected package is checked out by another user This prevents modifications that might have been made by the other user from being discarded through importing a prior revision from version control Save nested version Set nested version controlled packages to stubs or fully expanded trees controlled packages to Defaults to selected stubs only For a full explanation of this option see Version Control Nested Packages 137 Specify a name that readily distinguishes the configuration from other configurations The Unique ID is displayed as a selection in the list of Version Control configurations a package can connect to In addition it is possible to select a previous version control configuration from the drop down menu providing the configuration is not in use in the current model Working Copy path The folder where the XML files representing the packages are stored This folder should already exist before it is specified here Every version control configuration you define in Enterprise Architect should have its own local Working Copy Folder in which to store working copies of the XMI package files this should not be a shared network folder Particularly bear this in mind if you are creating an Enterprise Architect project that is to be shared for example a SQL database O 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd
348. yment can be undertaken using two different schemas for deployment using either e EAP based repositories or e DBMS server based repositories Replication requires the use of EAP based repositories and cannot be performed on repositories stored on a DBMS server DBMS server based repositories offer better response times than EAP files on networks due to the inherent structure of the DBMS DBMS also offers a better solution when networking problems are encountered as they have the ability to backtrack transactions caused by external breakdowns Replication Replication is a simple process that enables data interchange between EAP based repositories not DBMS and is suitable for use in situations where many different users work independently Modelers merge their changes into a Design Master only as required It is recommended that a backup is carried out prior to replication XMI Import Export XMI Import Export can be used to model discrete packages that can be exported and shared between developers XMI enables the export of packages into XML files which can then be imported into any model Package control can be used to set up packages for version control and to enable batch export of packages using XMI Version Control enables a repository to be maintained by a third party source code control application that is used to control access and record revisions Security User security is used to limit the update access to model elements
349. yntax The requested connection is not UML compliant select the Tools Options menu option click on Diagram in the hierarchy and in the General panel deselect the Strict UML Syntax checkbox When you perform a validation each violation listed on the Output 9 window has a violation ID of the format MVRxxnnnn where e MVR stands for Model Validation Rule e xxis a hexadecimal number corresponding to the position of the validation rule in the Model Validation Configuration dialog thus indicating which rule is applied and violated e nnnnis the number of the violation message Therefore messages with the ID MVRO1nnnn indicate that the Element Well Formedness checkbox is selected and a violation of that rule has been detected Messages with the ID MVROAnnnn indicate that the Feature OCL Conformance checkbox 10t in order on the dialog or Ath in hexadecimal is selected and a violation of that rule has been detected 6 2 Rules Reference Model Validation works against a set of validation rules arranged in the following groups e Element Relationship Feature Diagram Well Formedness 9 Checks whether or not an element relationship feature or diagram is well formed This group of rules includes checks such as whether the item is a valid UML item and whether a diagram contains valid elements within it e Element Composition 93 Checks whether or not a UML element contains valid children whether it contains the right
350. you normally would to browse for a project As you have selected the Connect to Server checkbox the Data Link Properties dialog displays instead of the browse directories dialog 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 66 Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository Select the data you want to connect to MediaCatalogDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogMergedDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogWebDB OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Outlook Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Search Microsoft OLE DB Providerfor SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider MSDataShape OLE DB Provider for Microsoft Directory Services 3 Select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers from the list 4 Click on the Next button The Connection tab displays UML Model Management Enterprise Architect Project Files Set Up a Database Repository 67 oo 7x0 Eronder Corecion Advanced A Specify the following to connect to ODEC data 1 Specify the source of data 9 Use data source name Use connection string f Lonnectior 2 Enter infomation to log on to the server User name Password E Blank password Allow saving password 3 Enter the initial catalog to use In th
351. ype the weighting to apply to the problem type e Inthe Note field type any additional information on the problem type e Click on the Save button The problem type displays in the Defined Types list Note You can transport these problem types between models using the Export Reference Data 25 and Import Reference Data 253 options on the Tools menu You transport the problem types together with test types as a Maintenance Types file 17 3 2 Testing Types Use the Test Types tab of the Maintenance dialog to add testing types to the basic set that comes with Enterprise Architect Typical test types are load tests performance tests and function tests To access this dialog select the Settings Maintenance menu option The Maintenance dialog displays Click on the Test Types tab 1998 2010 Sparx Systems Pty Ltd 244 Reference Data Maintenance Description Performance under load Regression Testing Simple Test procedure To add a new test type click on the New button and e Inthe Test Type field type the name of the testing type e Inthe Description field type a short description of the testing type e Inthe Weight field type the weighting to apply to the testing type e Inthe Note field type any additional information on the testing type e Click on the Save button The testing type displays in the Defined Types list Note You can transport these test types between models usi
352. ys as a selection in the list of Version Control configurations a package can connect to In addition you can select a previous version control configuration from this drop down menu providing the configuration is not in the current model Working Copy path Specify the folder where the XML files representing the packages are stored This folder should already exist before it is specified here Every PC using Subversion version control should have its own Subversion working copy folder in which to store working copies of the XMI package files this should not be a shared network folder Particularly bear this in mind if you are creating a EAP file that is to be shared for example a SQL database Subversion Exe Path Specify the full path name of the Subversion client executable file Note Sparx Systems strongly urge you not to manipulate version controlled package files outside of Enterprise Architect It is possible to leave the package files in a state that Enterprise Architect cannot recognize 11 5 4 6 TortoiseSVN TortoiseSVN is a Windows shell extension for Subversion Enterprise Architect cannot use TortoiseSVN to communicate with the Subversion server it must use the Subversion command line client TortoiseSVN provides icon overlays in Windows Explorer that are useful as a tool for observing the status of your Subversion controlled files lt enables you to create your repository sub trees and check out local working copies

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Promatrix 8000  Chimei 22" widescreen LCD monitor    IAN 96324 - Lidl Service Website  USER MANUAL………………………………….…...4 РЪКОВОДСТВО  D3PLOT 12.0 user manual  Canada - Buyandsell.gc.ca  SUFORT MANUAL DE INSTRUÇÕES PARA MONTAGEM E  IS 150/300 7/97 IHV  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file